JP6525036B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, among gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, those equipped with operation means operated by a player are known. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, an operation means is provided on the front of the gaming machine, and a special effect is produced according to the operation of the player in order to make the player expect the occurrence of a special gaming state etc. advantageous to the player. Is configured to be displayed on a screen or the like. In the gaming machine adopting the operation means as described above, how to increase the player's attention to the game by using the operation means is an important issue.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-223700

  Here, it is feared that if the special effect is merely performed according to the operation of the operation means, the operation becomes monotonous and the fresh taste is faded, and the interest in the operation itself is likely to be lowered. That is, even if the player is prompted to perform an operation, it is assumed that the operation is performed semi-mechanically, and it becomes difficult to properly exhibit the attention level improvement function to the game by the operation means. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in raising the level of attention to the game using the operation means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably enhancing the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
An operation unit having an operation unit which is displaced from a predetermined position in the operation direction by the operation of the player, an urging unit which displaces the operation unit to the opposite side to the operation direction, and a movable unit which is displaceable in the same direction as the operation unit. When,
A restricting portion that restricts displacement of the movable portion in a direction intersecting the operation direction;
Signal output means for outputting an operation signal when the operation unit is operated and displaced to the detection position;
Effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation signal from the signal output means;
By displacing the movable portion, the operating means is deformed from the first state to the second state so that the appearance of the operating means is recognized as changing according to the game situation as viewed from the front side of the gaming machine Equipped with deformation means,
Said operating means, said movable portion in accordance with the displacement of the operation direction of the operation unit when the operation unit from a first state during deformation to the second state has been operated the skilled the manipulation means displaced to the operation direction, Ri Contact is configured even during the deformation is permitted displacement to the detection position of the operating unit,
The direction in which the operation unit is displaced by the operation in the state where the operation means is in the second state is the direction in which the operation unit is displaced by the operation in the situation where the operation means is in the first state In the same direction as in

  The degree of attention to the game can be suitably enhanced.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a perspective view showing the back composition of a game board. It is a front view which shows the structure of a back pack unit. (A) The top view which shows an operation switch unit, (b) It is the AA partial cross section figure of Fig.10 (a). (A) A diagram showing the operation switch unit in the normal state, (b) A diagram showing the operation switch unit in the expanded state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows processing for operation field expansion presentation. It is a time chart for explaining the relation between the operation field expansion production displayed on the symbol display device and the operation of the operation switch unit. It is a flow chart which shows processing for continuous operation corresponding presentation. It is a time chart for demonstrating the relationship between the continuous operation corresponding | compatible production | presentation displayed on a symbol display apparatus, and operation of an operation switch unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment from diagonally forward. (A) The top view which expands and shows an upper dish unit, (b) It is the BB sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 22 (a). (A) It is the CC sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 22 (a), (b) It is a DD sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 22 (b). It is the schematic which shows the mode of operation at the time of continuous operation corresponding presentation execution. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows processing for the 1st continuous operation corresponding presentation. (A) is a schematic outside plan view of the operation switch unit 40A in the third embodiment, (b) is an outline schematic showing the internal structure of the operation switch unit 40A, (c) is the number of times of operation and operation area AE and operation stroke S Is a graph showing the relationship with (A) is a schematic diagram showing a table for selecting the prescribed number of operations, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variation display time and the effect mode, and (c) is an expectation of jackpot result suggested by the prescribed number of operations It is the schematic which shows the relationship of the degree. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a process of continuous expansion effect performed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special setting process for maximum prescribed times. It is a time chart which shows the display content in the symbol display apparatus 94 when continuous expansion production is performed, and the state change of the operation switch unit 40A. It is a time chart which shows the display content in the symbol display apparatus 94 when continuous expansion production is performed, and the state change of the operation switch unit 40A. (A) is a figure which shows the skip setting table for expansion effects in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a graph which shows the relationship between the number of times of operation, and the operation area | region AE and the operation stroke S. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing setting processing for continuous expansion effect performed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410. FIG. (A) is the schematic which looked at operation switch unit 600 in 5th Embodiment from upper direction, (b) is the EE sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 35 (a). FIG. 16 is a schematic view showing a modified embodiment of the operation switch unit 600. It is a flowchart which shows the process for operation switch form change presentation performed by MPU412 of the display control apparatus 410. FIG. (A) A flowchart showing a form change process, (b) A flowchart showing a second one-shot operation process. (A) is an outer schematic view showing the internal structure of the operation switch unit 600A in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic view showing the electrical configuration of the operation switch unit 600A. (A) is the schematic which looked at operation switch unit 700 in 7th Embodiment from upper direction, (b) is the GG sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 40 (a). It is the schematic which shows the modification of the operation switch unit 700 at the time of performing the operation corresponding presentation using the operation switch unit 700. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process for operating ports. It is a flowchart which shows information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process of pending | holding information. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. It is a flow chart which shows pending command corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing for command effects. It is a flowchart which shows a frequent operation corresponding process. It is a flowchart which shows specific one-shot operation corresponding | compatible processing. It is the schematic which shows the flow of instruction | indication production. It is a schematic diagram for explaining a case where a command effect corresponding to a big hit is performed. It is the schematic for demonstrating the case where the jackpot non-corresponding | compatible instruction | indication production is performed. It is the schematic for demonstrating the case where instruction | indication production is avoided. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the object of instruction production. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the continuous operation reception period in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a frequent operation corresponding process. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of regulation release timing. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the operation reception frequency at the time of big hit winning, and the timing of control cancellation. It is a perspective view which shows the structure concerning a lower side hinge part. (A) is a top view which shows a lower side hinge part, (b) is the HH line | wire partial sectional view of (a). It is the schematic for demonstrating the motion of the game ball accompanying a closing operation. (A) is a perspective view which shows an upper side hinge part, (b) is a perspective view which shows the upper side support bracket which comprises an upper side hinge part. (A) is the figure which looked at the upper-side support metal fitting from upper direction, (b) is the figure which looked at the upper-side support metal fitting from the downward direction, (c) is an II line fragmentary sectional view of (a). FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing a flow of attaching and detaching operations of the gaming machine main part 12; It is the schematic which shows a motion of a stopper. It is the schematic which shows an upper side hinge part. FIG. 2 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line JJ of FIG. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a game ball, a game machine main part, and a slate. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a lower side hinge part.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as seen obliquely from the front, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded manner. In addition, in FIG. 3, the structure in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is abbreviate | omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plate members to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed on the island facility of the game arcade by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on an island facility of the game arcade.

  The main frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in an openable / closable manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, the upper support fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11 The lower support fitting 18 is fixed to the connection portion with the lower support bracket 18. The upper support fitting 17 and the lower support fitting 18 constitute a support mechanism 16, and the support mechanism 16 rotates the left side of the gaming machine main part 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10. The right side is the front end side of the rotation, and the pachinko machine 10 can be turned forward.

  A detection sensor for detecting the opening and closing of the gaming machine main part 12 is provided at the upper right part of the outer frame 11, more specifically at the connection part between the upper frame and the right frame, and the detection information from this detection sensor It is possible to monitor the opening of the gaming machine main part 12 on the basis of.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack disposed behind the inner frame 13. And a unit 15 (see FIG. 4). The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11.

  The front door frame 14 is rotatably attached to the end on the rotation base end side of the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 has the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side in the front view. It can be turned forward as the tip end side. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the end on the rotation base end side of the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 rotates left side in front view The movement base end side can be turned backward with the right side being the turning tip side.

  Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape has substantially the same shape as the outer frame 11 and covers substantially the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. ing. A substantially elliptical window 21 (see FIG. 1) is formed in the central portion of the frame 20 so that almost the entire game area PE described later can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the window 21 is covered by the glass unit 30 from the back side of the front door frame 14.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a glass unit installation portion 22 is formed in the frame 20 so as to surround the window portion 21. Specifically, the glass unit installation portion 22 is disposed on the back side of the frame 20 and is recessed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the window portion 21 is disposed at the bottom thereof. By fitting the glass unit 30 into the glass unit installation portion 22, displacement in the vertical direction and the lateral direction is restricted.

  The glass unit 30 is equipped with the glass panels 31 and 32 which have transparency, and the glass holder 33 holding these glass panels 31 and 32. As shown in FIG. The glass holder 33 has an annular frame formed along the window 21, and the glass panels 31, 32 are accommodated in the area surrounded by the frame.

  Referring back to FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 21. For example, along the periphery of the window portion 21, an annular illumination portion 24 incorporating light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In the annular electric decoration part 24, lighting and blinking are performed according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, and the like. More specifically, a top lamp 25 provided with a function to light at the time of a predetermined error is provided at the top of the pachinko machine 10 at the center of the annular electric decoration 24 and on both the left and right sides of the window 21. A side lamp portion 26 is provided to which a function of lighting during ball discharging is given. In addition, on the left and right sides of the top lamp unit 25, speaker units 27 are provided to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output.

  As shown in FIG. 2, an upper bulging portion 28 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 29 are vertically arranged below the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14. The upper bulging portion 28 is provided with an upper plate 28a opened upward, and the lower bulging portion 29 is provided with a lower plate 29a similarly opened upward. The upper tray 28a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a later described payout device and guiding the game balls to the game ball launch mechanism side described later while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower tray 29a has a function of storing the game balls which become surplus in the upper tray 28a.

  An operation switch unit 40 manually operated by players is provided at a portion on the front side of the upper tray 28a (the game ball storage area) in the upper bulging portion 28. The operation switch unit 40 is an operation device for the player to give a predetermined instruction in the course of the progress of the game for the purpose of performing a predetermined effect on a display screen or the like of a symbol display device described later. The specific configuration of the operation switch unit 40 and the predetermined effect based on the operation will be described in detail later.

  A game ball emission handle 45 is provided at a position in line with the lower bulging portion 29 so as to protrude to the front side. By operating the game ball emission handle 45, the game balls are emitted from the game ball emission mechanism described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 50 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 50 is made of a synthetic resin and has a front door upper tray passage communicating with the upper tray 28a and a front door lower tray passage communicating with the lower tray 29a. At the upper corner of the passage forming unit 50, there is formed a receiving portion 53 which protrudes rearward and is opened upward, and the receiving portion 53 is divided into right and left by the partition wall 54 to make the front door side upper dish passage An inlet portion and an inlet portion of the lower door channel on the front door side are formed. The upper door passage on the front door side and the lower door passage on the front door side communicate with the game ball distribution unit described later on the upstream side, and the game balls entering the upper door passage on the front door side are guided to the upper plate 28a, and lower on the front door side. The gaming balls having entered the tray passage are guided to the lower tray 29a.

  Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail based on FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. In addition, in FIG. 5, the structure in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is abbreviate | omitted similarly to FIG.

  The inner frame 13 mainly includes a resin base 60 whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. Inner frame fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5) on the front surface of the resin base 60. Also, on the pivoting base end side (left side in FIG. 2) on the back surface of the front door frame 14, bearing fittings 57, 58 are provided corresponding to the inner frame fittings 71, 72. Shaft portions are formed in the inner frame fittings 71 and 72, and the front door frame 14 is inserted into the bearing holes of the bearing fittings 57 and 58 of the front door frame 14 by inserting the shaft portions into the inner frame 13. It is rotatably supported. That is, the inner frame fittings 71 and 72 and the bearing fittings 57 and 58 constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

  A locking device 75 is provided on the front of the inner frame 13. The locking device 75 has a plurality of front door wedge members 76 extending toward the front door frame 14. A plurality of weir members 59 extending toward the inner frame 13 are provided on the back of the front door frame 14 corresponding to the front door wedge members 76 (see FIG. 3). When the front door wedge member 76 is hooked on the hook receiving member 59, the front door frame 14 is locked in a closed state. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the locking device 75 has an inner frame wedge member 77 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. When the inner frame wedge member 77 is hooked on the wedge receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main portion 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  In the lower right corner of the resin base 60, a cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed. The cylinder lock 78 is integrated with the locking device 75, and its tip portion (key hole portion) is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 through a hole provided in the front door frame 14. By turning the key inserted in the key hole of the cylinder lock 78 to the right, the locking of the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 is released, and by turning the key to the left, the locking of the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 is released. .

  At a substantially central portion of the front surface of the resin base 60, a game board accommodating portion 61 for accommodating the game board 80 is formed. The game board storage portion 61 is recessed behind the pachinko machine 10 to define a storage space for storing the game board 80, and the game board 80 attached to the resin base 60 is fitted in the storage space. It has become.

  The game board 80 has wood plywood and a sheet material covering the front plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface is exposed to the front side of the resin base 60 through the open portion of the game board storage portion 61. . On the exposed portion, that is, on the front surface of the game board 80, a game area PE where a game ball flows down is formed. As described above, the game area PE is covered by the glass panels 31 and 32. The rear glass panel 32 has a gap with the front of the game board 80 slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game balls flowing down the game area PE go back and forth in the same place of the game area PE. It is arranged not to line up with. Thereby, ball clogging in the game area PE is suppressed. The game board 80 is not limited to wooden, and may be made of synthetic resin.

  Hereinafter, based on FIG. 6, the game board 80 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board 80. As shown in FIG.

  The gaming board 80 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (longitudinal direction) by being subjected to router processing. In each opening, a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, operation openings 83a and 83b, a through gate 84, a variable display unit 85, and the like are provided. When game balls enter the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operation openings 83a and 83b, the gaming balls are detected by a detection switch described later, and a predetermined number of payouts are executed based on the detection results. Ru. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80, and the game balls that did not enter the various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

  Further, on the game board 80, a large number of nails 87 are implanted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow-down path of the game ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed. The flow paths of the game balls are differentiated by various structures such as the nail 87 and the windmill, and the above-mentioned winning of the general winning opening 81 and the like is adjusted to occur with an appropriate probability.

  The variable winning device 82 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not win or is difficult to win, and is switched to a predetermined open state in which the game ball is easy to win in the case of a big hit. As an opening aspect of the variable winning device 82, the progress of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is one round, and the opening of the variable winning device 82 is plural rounds (for example, 15 rounds) It is set to be repeated as the upper limit.

  The variable display unit 85 is disposed closer to the upper center of the game board 80, and the operation openings 83a and 83b are disposed below the variable display unit 85. More specifically, the operation ports 83a and 83b are vertically arranged with the operation port 83a at the upper side and the operation port 83b at the lower side. The lower operating opening 83b is provided with a motorized part as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The motorized part has a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) where entering the ball to the operation opening 83b is impossible or difficult and an open state (support state) where the game ball can enter the ball more easily than the closed state. The main control unit is controlled to be in the open state when it is possible to switch to the guide state) and the lottery based on the winning on the through gate 84 is won. As the opening and closing mode of the motorized part, the low frequency support mode set so that the winning frequency to the lower operation opening 83b becomes lower than the upper operation opening 83a, and the lower operation side lower than the upper operation opening 83a The high frequency support mode set so that the winning frequency to the operation opening 83b is high is set, and it is low when a predetermined hit result is obtained by the lottery based on the ball entering each operation opening 83a, 83b. It is configured to shift from the frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode.

  The variable display unit 85 and the operation openings 83a and 83b are portions for controlling the game property, and the attention of the player is easily gathered. By arranging the variable display unit 85 and the operation openings 83a and 83b vertically at the center of the gaming machine, the movement amount of the line of sight between the two is suppressed, which contributes to the reduction of the burden generated on the eyes of the player.

  The variable display unit 85 is provided with a symbol display device 94 that variably displays symbols by using a winning on the operation openings 83a and 83b as a trigger. The symbol display device 94 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display (display screen 94a), and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. Specifically, on the display screen 94a, symbols are displayed aligned on the left, in the middle, and in the right, and these symbols are displayed so as to be scrolled in the vertical direction. Then, when a big hit occurs, symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on an effective line set in advance, and transition to the special game state is made. The display mode on the display screen 94a may be changed as follows. That is, the symbols may be displayed side by side in the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage, and the symbols may be varied and displayed so as to scroll in the left-right direction.

  Further, the variable display unit 85 includes a center frame 95 formed so as to surround the symbol display device 94. At an upper portion of the center frame 95, a first specific lamp unit 96 and a second specific lamp unit 97 are provided. In addition, holding lamp portions 98 and 99 are provided on the upper and lower portions of the center frame 95, respectively. The lower holding lamp unit 98 corresponds to the symbol display device 94 and the first specific lamp unit 96, and the number of times the game ball passes through the operation openings 83a and 83b is held up to four times, and the holding lamp unit 98 is The number of reservations is displayed by lighting. The upper holding lamp unit 99 corresponds to the second specific lamp unit 97, the number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 84 is held up to four times, and the number of holding units is displayed by lighting the holding lamp unit 99 It has become so.

  Further, at a portion of the center frame 95 located on the side (left side) of the display screen 94a, an operation number display unit 95a indicating the number of times the operation switch unit 40 is operated is provided. The operation number display unit 95a includes a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of light emitters (LEDs) are vertically arranged and mounted, and a transparent cover covering the light emitting substrate, and is electrically connected to a display control device described later. ing. The display content of the operation number display unit 95a is controlled by the display control device so that the light emitting members on the lower side are sequentially lighted by repeating the operation of the operation switch unit 40.

  Referring to FIG. 5 again, below the gaming board storage portion 61 (game board 80) in the resin base 60, the gaming ball is fired to the gaming area PE based on the operation of the gaming ball firing handle 45. A launch mechanism 110 is provided. The game ball firing mechanism 110 has a solenoid 111 for launching a game ball disposed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 for defining the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and the game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for feeding balls and a base plate 114 on which the various components 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is attached to a resin base 60 via a reinforcing plate described later. ing.

  The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 80 side. At a position closer to the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the firing rail 112, a ball stopper that holds the gaming balls supplied from the ball feeding device 113 in the above-described firing standby position is disposed. The solenoid 111 is disposed at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply and emission control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply and emission control device, so that the game ball placed at the emission standby position is on the game board 80 side, specifically, the game It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 80.

  The guide rail 100 divides the game area PE together with a game area division member described later so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 which are disposed to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the two rails 101 and 102 define a single guide passage 103 It is formed. The guiding passage 103 has an inlet portion 104 opened to the tip side (obliquely lower) of the firing rail 112, and an outlet portion 105 located at the top of the game area PE. The game balls fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 are guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → the induction rail 100 (the inlet portion 104 → the outlet portion 105). In addition, on the tip side of the exit portion 105 in the game board 80, in detail, in the vicinity of the tip of the inner rail 101, a reverse return preventing member 106 is attached which prevents the game ball reaching the game area PE from returning into the same induction passage 103. It is suppressed that the game ball which has reached the game area PE ahead of time prevents the launch of the following game ball from being hampered.

  The guiding rail 100 and the firing rail 112 are arranged such that the inlet portion 104 of the guiding rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are diagonally opposed with a gap. A ball ball passage 55 (see FIG. 3) is disposed below the gap formed in this manner. The foul ball passage 55 is integrally formed with the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE but moves backward in the guiding passage 103 as a far ball, those far balls enter the far ball passage 55 through the above-mentioned gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 55 leads to the lower door passage on the front door side, and the gaming ball entering the far ball passage 55 is discharged to the lower plate 29a shown in FIG. Thus, the interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be fired next is suppressed.

  Further, the resin base 60 is provided with a plurality of lock devices that can be switched between a locked state in which removal of the game board 80 from the game board storage unit 61 is not allowed and an unlocked state in which removal of the game board 80 is permitted. It is done. The lock device has an abutting portion which abuts against the front of the game board 80 in a locked state, and the abutting portion abuts against the front of the game board 80 to the front door frame 14 side of the game board 80. The displacement can be suppressed.

  In the resin base 60, on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14), a through hole penetrating the resin base 60 in the front-rear direction is formed. The passage forming member 121 is disposed. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 60, and has a main body side upper countersink path 122 and a main body lower countersink path 123. The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 communicate with a game ball distribution unit described later. In the lower part of the passage forming member 121, the receiving part 53 (see FIG. 3) of the passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 is intruded. An upper plate passage is disposed, and a front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body lower plate passage 123.

  Below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 60, a shutter 124 is provided which restricts the outflow of gaming balls from the body-side upper plate passage 122 and the body-side lower plate passage 123. The shutter 124 is supported by the resin base 60 so as to be switchable between a blocking position for narrowing the outlet portions of both passages and blocking the outflow of gaming balls and a permissible position for permitting the outflow of gaming balls. Further, an urging member for urging the shutter 124 to the blocking position is attached to the resin base 60, and in a state where the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the shutter by the urging force of the urging member. 124 is configured to remain in the blocking position. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in a state where gaming balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage 122 or the main body side lower plate passage 123, the disadvantage that the storage spheres spill out is avoided. . On the other hand, in the state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the shutter 124 is pushed back to the allowable position against the biasing force by the receiving portion 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the front door side upper tray passage communicate with the main body side lower tray passage 123 and the front door side lower tray passage, respectively, and movement of the game ball is permitted.

  Next, the rear face configuration of the inner frame 13 (the resin base 60 and the game board 80) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

  A bearing fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 7) on the back surface of the resin base 60. A bearing portion 133 is formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be vertically separated, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by the bearing portion 133. In addition, a plurality of fixing levers 134 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame 13 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 60.

  As described above, a central opening 64 penetrating in the thickness direction of the resin base 60 and opened on the back side of the resin base 60 is formed in the bottom portion of the game board accommodating portion 61 in the resin base 60 The central opening 64 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board 80 accommodated in the game board accommodation portion 61. On the back of the game board 80, various configurations such as a control device are mounted, and the various configurations are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the central opening 64. Here, the configuration of the back of the game board 80 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the game board 80 as viewed from the rear.

  On the back of the game board 80, a synthetic resin base member 141 for mounting the variable display unit 85 (see FIG. 6) on the game board 80 is fixed. The pedestal member 141 has a substantially box shape opened to the game board 80 side and covers almost the entire area of the back of the game board 80. A part of the pedestal member 141 protrudes to the back side of the resin base 60 through the central opening 64 of the resin base 60, and the symbol display device 94 (see FIG. 6) described above with respect to the protruding portion and its symbol display A display control device for driving the device 94 is attached. The symbol display device 94 and the display control device are arranged in an overlapping manner so that the symbol display device is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (the thickness direction of the resin base 60). Further, a sound lamp control device unit 142 is mounted on the game board 80 so as to be located behind the display control device. The voice lamp controller unit 142 is configured to include a voice lamp controller 143 and a mount 144, and the voice lamp controller 143 is mounted on the mount 144.

  The voice lamp control device 143 comprises a voice lamp control board for controlling voice and lamp display and display control according to an instruction from the main control device described later, and the voice lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is accommodated in the board | substrate box 145, and is comprised.

  Below the voice lamp controller unit 142, a main controller unit 160 is provided so as to cover the pedestal member 141 from the rear. The main controller unit 160 has a mount 161 made of synthetic resin fixed to the back of the game board 80 and a main controller 162 mounted on the mount 161. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) to control the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) to monitor the power, and the main control board is a transparent resin material. And the like are accommodated in a substrate box 163 formed of, for example.

  The substrate box 163 is provided with a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing unit 164 as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided in the short side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

  The box sealing portion 164 may have any configuration as long as it can unopenably connect the box base and the box cover. However, the box sealing portion 164 is configured by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole portion forming the box sealing portion 164. The base and the box cover are connected unopenably. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening is performed, such a situation can be detected early and easily. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the sealing process again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing sections 164. And when opening the substrate box 163 at the time of failure occurrence of the stored main control substrate or at the time of inspection of the main control substrate, a connection portion between the box sealing portion in which the locking pin is inserted and the substrate box 163 main body Cut. Thus, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the main control substrate inside can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking pin is inserted into the other locking hole. If a history indicating that the substrate box 163 has been opened is left in the substrate box 163, it is possible to easily find that unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  The base box 163 and the mounting base 161 are unopenably connected by the base seal portion 165. More specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has a locking hole and a locking pin as in the case of the box sealing portion 164, and the substrate pin 163 and the base box 163 are inserted by inserting the locking pin into the locking hole. The mounting base 161 is coupled inseparably. As a result, when the board box 163 is improperly removed, it is easy to grasp the fact.

  The portion of the pedestal member 141 facing the back surface of the game board 80 corresponds to the game board opening of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, the upper operation opening 83a, and the lower operation opening 83b at the downstream side A collection passage is formed to gather in one place. As a result, all the game balls that have won in the general winning opening 81 and the like are gathered below the game board 80 through the recovery passage. That is, the base member 141 is provided with a function of collecting the game balls that have been won in the various winning openings.

  Below the game board 80, there is disposed a discharge passage, which will be described later, and the gaming balls gathered below the game board 80 by the recovery passage are led out into the discharge passage. The out port 86 is also in communication with the discharge passage, and the game balls that did not win in any of the winning openings are led out into the discharge path through the out port 86.

  Further, in the collection path, there are a prize opening switch that detects gaming balls that have won in the general winning openings 81 on the front side of the gaming board 80, a count switch that detects gaming balls that have won in the variable winning device 82, and operation openings 83a, The operation port switch for detecting the game ball entering the block 83b is mounted, and the various switches constitute a prize detection mechanism. Further, gate switches for detecting game balls passing through the through gate 84 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 85 in the pedestal member 141. These various switches are electrically connected to the main controller 162, and the detection information of each switch is output to the main controller 162.

  Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described based on FIGS. 4 and 9. FIG. 9 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by the back pack unit 15. As shown in FIG. 9, the back pack unit 15 is provided with a back pack 201, and to the back pack 201, a delivery mechanism portion 202, a discharge passage panel and a control device collecting unit 204 are attached.

  The back pack 201 is molded of a synthetic resin having transparency, and has a base portion 211 to which the dispensing mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 which protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and at least has a size sufficient to surround the variable display unit 85.

  The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate (not shown) at the upper right portion thereof. The external terminal board is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are outputted to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower retaining pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the retaining pin 214 is inserted into the bearing portion 133 provided in the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported relative to the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions 215 through which the fixing lever 134 provided in the inner frame 13 is inserted. The fixing lever 134 is inserted rearward into the insertion portion 215 and the base portion 211 is rearward , And the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

  A dispensing mechanism unit 202 is disposed on the base unit 211 so as to bypass the protective cover unit 212. The payout mechanism section 202 is provided with a tank 221 disposed at the top of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and the gaming balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221 Ru. Below the tank 221, a tank rail 222 which is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected, and to the downstream side of the tank rail 222, a case rail 223 which extends in the vertical direction is connected. At the most downstream portion of the case rail 223, a dispensing device 224 is provided. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

  The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function to distribute the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any of the upper tray 28a, the lower tray 29a, or a discharge passage to be described later, and the inner opening described above is the main body It is connected to the upper plate 28a through the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening is formed to be connected to the lower plate 29a through the body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. It is done.

  At a lower end portion of the base portion 211, a discharge passage panel and a control device aggregation unit 204 are attached so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front and rear direction. In the discharge passage board, a discharge passage opened rearward is formed on the surface facing the control device collection unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device collection unit 204. The discharge passage is formed to discharge the game ball to the island facilities of the game hall, and the game ball led out to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like passes the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 Exhausted.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a mounting base 241 having a horizontally long shape, and the delivery control device 242 and the power / emission control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / discharge control device 243 are disposed so as to be stacked back and forth so that the payout control device 242 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 242, a payout control substrate for controlling the payout device 224 is accommodated in the substrate box 244, and a state recovery switch 245 provided on the payout control substrate protrudes out of the substrate box 244. For example, when the state recovery switch 245 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging in the dispensing device 224, the ball clogging is eliminated.

  In the power supply and emission control device 243, a power supply and emission control substrate is accommodated in the substrate box 246, and the substrate generates and outputs a predetermined power supply required for various control devices etc. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the launch handle 45 is performed. In addition, the power supply and emission control device 243 is provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched to the ON state (ON state) or the OFF state (OFF state).

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a memory holding function of various data, and maintains the state at the time of the power failure even when the power failure occurs, and returns to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure. It can be done. For example, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure as in the case of the end of business of the game hall, the state before the shutoff is stored. The main controller 162 is provided with a RAM erase switch 166. When the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166, the RAM data is initialized.

(Operation switch unit 40)
Next, the operation switch unit 40 provided in the front door frame 14 and the configuration related thereto will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 (a) is a plan view of the operation switch unit 40 and the upper bulging portion 28 shown by enlarging a peripheral portion thereof, and FIG. 10 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14 accommodates the unit for accommodating the operation switch unit 40 in the portion located on the front side of the upper tray 28a (the game ball storage area). The portion 28b is formed. The unit housing portion 28 b is formed in a concave shape opened upward, and a part of the operation switch unit 40 is exposed upward through the open portion.

  The operation switch unit 40 includes a housing 310 whose outer shape is formed in accordance with the inner shape of the unit housing portion 28 b. As shown in FIG. 10B, the housing 310 forms an outer shell of the housing 310 and is formed a little smaller than the outer cylindrical portion 311 and the outer cylindrical portion 311 that abut against the peripheral wall of the unit housing portion 28b. The inner cylindrical portion 312 opposed from the inside of the housing 310 to the outer cylindrical portion 311, and the top plate portion 313 which forms the outer shell of the housing 310 together with the outer cylindrical portion 311 connecting the both cylindrical portions 311 and 312. And the claw portion (not shown) formed on the outer cylindrical portion 311 is caught on the receiving portion (not shown) formed on the unit housing portion 28b so that removal from the unit housing portion 28b is restricted. It is done.

  The top plate portion 313 covers a part of the open portion of the unit housing portion 28b, and a central opening 314 is formed in the central portion thereof so as to communicate with the region surrounded by the inner cylindrical portion 312. A push button member 320 as an operation unit (press operation unit) is accommodated in the inner cylindrical portion 312, and a part of the push button member 320 is exposed upward through the central opening 314. Thereby, access to the push button member 320 is permitted.

  In the present embodiment, a shutter mechanism that forms a window opening OP as an access path to the push button member 320 is employed. By operating the shutter mechanism, the size of the window opening OP is changed.

  Specifically, on the left and right sides of the central opening 314 in the housing 310, shutter members 330 movable to a closed position covering a part of the central opening 314 and an open position not covering the central opening 314 are provided. . The shutter member 330 has a flat plate shape parallel to the top plate portion 313, and the top plate portion 313 is formed with a horizontally long slit 315 which can accommodate the shutter member 330. The slits 315 are opened to the sides facing each other (the side of the central opening 314), and the open portions allow the shutter members 330 to slide toward and away from each other.

  That is, the operation switch unit 40 is configured such that the portion (the push button member 320 and the shutter member 330) exposed to the player side can be deformed, and the exposed portion is deformed, It is possible for the player to visually or tactilely grasp that the operation switch unit 40 has been deformed.

  The housing 310 is provided with shutter spring members 335 as urging means for urging the shutter members 330 toward the closed position, and the shutter members 330 are directed toward the closed positions by these shutter spring members 335. It is always in an energized state. The top plate portion 313 is formed with a stopper portion 316 which restricts the further movement toward the central opening 314 side by coming into contact with the shutter member 330 from the front side in the biasing direction. On the other hand, in the state where the shutter member 330 is in contact, the ends on the central opening 314 side of the shutter member 330 are in contact at the center of the central opening 314 (see FIG. 10A). Thus, the position (that is, the closed position) in contact with the stopper portion 316 is the initial position of the shutter member 330.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, a semicircular notch portion 331 is provided at the end of the shutter member 330 on the side facing the other. When the shutter members 330 are in the closed position, the cutouts 331 form a circular window opening OP that straddles both shutter members 330. That is, when both shutter members 330 stand by in the closed position, access to a part of the push button member 320 is permitted through the window opening OP. In other words, the operable portion of the push button member 320 is limited by the shutter member 330.

  Further, the housing 310 is provided with a solenoid 340 as a driving means for moving the shutter member 330 to the open position, and a gear 345 as a driving force transmission means for transmitting the generated driving force to the shutter member 330. The solenoid 340 is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and switches from the non-excitation state to the excitation state based on the drive signal from the display control device 410. When the solenoid 340 is in an excited state, the shutter member 330 moves to the open position against the biasing force of the shutter spring member 335. The shutter member 330, the solenoid 340, and the gear 345 constitute a shutter mechanism (variable real opening forming means).

  When the shutter member 330 moves from the closed position to the open position, the ratio of the operable area (accessible area) in the shutter member 330 is increased by the expansion of the window opening OP. Further, in the present embodiment, the push button member 320 is movably provided, and the position of the push button member 320 also changes in accordance with the movement of the shutter member 330. Hereinafter, the configuration of the push button member 320 will be described, and then the relationship between the push button member 320 and the shutter member 330 will be supplementarily described.

  The push button member 320 is permitted to move in the same direction (vertical direction) as the central axis line CL of the inner cylindrical portion 312, and is restricted from moving in the direction intersecting with the central axis line CL. Specifically, the push button member 320 has a cylindrical body portion 321 extending in the same direction as the central axial direction of the inner cylindrical portion 312, and the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 321 is the inner cylindrical portion 312. By abutting against the inner circumferential surface, the movement in the direction intersecting the central axis CL is restricted.

  At an end (upper end) on the central opening 314 side of the body portion 321, an operation surface portion 322 as an operation target by the player is integrally formed. The operation surface portion 322 has a curved surface shape that is convex upward, and suppresses the occurrence of a local load on a finger or the like at the time of operation.

  In addition, while forming the push button member 320 by a transparent or semi-transparent synthetic resin material, a light diffusing plate is adhered on the back side, and further light emission of LED etc. which irradiates light to the said light diffusing plate from the back side The body may be provided and light may be emitted through the operation surface 322 of the push button member 320. In this case, the decorativeness of the push button member 320 is enhanced. In addition, by performing light emission control, a character or a symbol that prompts the player to perform an operation such as "PUSH", "PRESS!", Or "CHANCE" is displayed on the operation surface unit 322 at a predetermined timing. It is also good.

  The body portion 321 incorporates a button spring member 325 as biasing means for biasing the push button member 320 to the side projecting from the central opening 314. When the shutter member 330 stands by at the closed position, the further projection of the push button member 320 is restricted by the shutter member 330 coming into contact with the operation surface 322 from the front side in the biasing direction.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is employed in which the top of the operation surface 322 is exposed from the window opening OP, and the end (for example, the notch 331) of the shutter member 330 faces obliquely upward at the operation surface 322. It is in contact with the part where it is located. Therefore, the biasing force of the button spring member 325 is transmitted to the shutter member 330 through the push button member 320, and the shutter member 330 is pushed not only upward but also toward the open position. However, since the biasing force of the shutter spring member 335 is set larger than the biasing force of the button spring member 325, the shutter member 330 pressed by the push button member 320 is prevented from being retracted to the open position. . For this reason, in a state where the shutter member 330 functions as a stopper, the shutter member 330 pressed by the push button member 320 does not move, and remains in the closed position. A part of the biasing force of the button spring member 325 is dispersed to the top plate portion 313, and furthermore, by employing a plurality of shutter members 330 to disperse the biasing force, the stopper function of the shutter member 330 is preferable. Secured by

  When the shutter member 330 moves to the open position, the shutter member 330 is removed from the movement path of the push button member 320, whereby the function of the shutter member 330 as a stopper is invalidated. If attention is paid to the fact that whether or not the push button member 320 can be moved can be switched by the shutter member 330, the shutter member 330 can also be referred to as a "movable stopper".

  The housing 310 adopts another stopper (fixed stopper) for restricting the movement of the push button member 320 instead of the shutter member 330 when the shutter member 330 is disposed at the open position. Specifically, a flange portion 323 protruding in the radial direction of the central axis line CL is formed at an end opposite to the central opening 314 side in the body portion 321, and the housing 310 has a shutter relative to the flange portion 323. A first contact portion 317 is formed which can be in contact from the front side (upper side) in the biasing direction by the spring member 335. In a state where the movement of the push button member 320 is restricted by the shutter member 330, although the first contact portion 317 and the flange portion 323 face each other with a gap, the shutter member 330 moves to the open position. When the push button member 320 further protrudes, the flange portion 323 abuts on the first contact portion 317, whereby the further protrusion is avoided. That is, instead of the shutter member 330, the first contact portion 317 functions as a stopper.

  Further, the housing 310 is provided with a second contact portion 318 which can be abutted to the flange portion 233 of the push button member 320 from the opposite (downside) to the central opening 314 side, and the flange portion 233 is a second contact By hitting the part 318, further backward retraction is restricted. That is, the moving range of the push button member 320 is defined as follows by the two contact portions 317 and 318. That is, the push button member 320 moves between both the maximum projecting position whose movement is restricted by the first contact portion 317 and the maximum pushing position whose movement is restricted by the second contact portion 318. Is allowed. In a state in which the movement is restricted by the shutter member 330, the camera waits at an intermediate position between the maximum projecting position and the maximum pressing position. The state in which the shutter member 330 disposed in the closed position abuts in this manner is the normal state of the operation switch unit 40. The button spring member 325 is configured such that the biasing function is secured even when the push button member 320 is present at any position in the movement range.

(Operation of operation switch unit 40)
In the present embodiment, an area exposed upward in the operation surface 322 of the push button member 320, that is, an area which can be operated by being directly touched (hereinafter referred to as an operation area AE) is changed according to the game situation. It is one of the features. Therefore, the operation of the operation switch unit 40 when changing the operation area AE will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is an operation explanatory view of the operation switch unit 40. As shown in FIG. When the operation area AE is expanded, the operation switch unit 40 switches from the state of FIG. 11A to the state of FIG. 11B, and when the operation area is reduced, the operation switch unit 40 The state of b) is switched to the state of FIG.

  First, the case where the operation area AE is expanded will be described. When the solenoid 340 is not excited, that is, when a drive signal is not output from the display control device 410, the shutter member 330 stands by at the closed position by the biasing force of the shutter spring member 335 (see FIG. See FIG. 11 (a)). In such a state, the operation surface portion 322 of the push button member 320 abuts on the shutter member 330 from the lower side, whereby the further protrusion of the push button member 320 is suppressed.

  Here, when the solenoid 340 is excited, as shown in FIG. 11A to FIG. 11B, the shutter member 330 moves to the open position against the biasing force of the shutter spring member 335. As a result, the proportion of the portion exposed upward in the operation surface 322 increases. The push button member 320 is not in contact with the first contact portion 317, and there is room for movement to the projecting side. Therefore, the biasing force of the button spring member 325 causes the shutter member 330 to move to the maximum projecting position in accordance with the movement of the shutter member 330. As a result, the amount of protrusion from the central opening 314 is increased, and access to the operation surface 322 is facilitated. In addition, the operation stroke of the push button member 320 is increased.

  Next, the case where the operation area AE is reduced (the case of returning to the normal state) will be described. When the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 340 is stopped, the solenoid 340 is de-energized, and the shutter member 330 is closed by the biasing force of the shutter spring member 335 as shown in FIG. 11 (b) → FIG. 11 (a). Move to At this time, the shutter member 330 pushes the operation surface portion 322 in the opposite direction to the biasing direction of the button spring member 325. The force for pressing the operation surface 322 in the direction opposite to the biasing direction is set larger than the biasing force of the button spring member 325, the push button member 320 is retracted against the biasing force of the button spring member 325. Do. Thereby, the operation area AE is reduced and the operation stroke of the push button member 320 is reduced.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. In FIG. 12, the power supply line is indicated by a double arrow and the signal line is indicated by a solid arrow.

  An MPU 402 is mounted on a main control substrate 401 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 402 is a ROM 403 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 402 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 403 is executed. A certain RAM 404 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated.

  The MPU 402 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 402, the power failure monitoring board 405 provided in the main control device 162, the payout control device 242, and other switches not shown are connected. In this case, the power and emission control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring substrate 405, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power failure monitoring substrate 405. In addition, as part of the switch group, a plurality of detection sensors provided in various ball entry parts such as the operation ports 83a and 83b and the variable winning device 82 are connected, and to the ball entry part in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 The entry decision of is performed. Further, the MPU 402 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery based on the ball entry to the operation openings 83a and 83b in the ball entry part.

  Here, an electrical configuration in performing a big hit occurrence lottery or the like in the MPU 402 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 402 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit lottery, set the light emission color of the first specific lamp unit 96, set the symbol display of the symbol display device 94, etc. Specifically, the big hit Big hit random number counter C1 used for lottery of occurrence, big hit type counter C2 used when determining big hit type such as probability variation big hit state or normal big hit state, and used for reach lottery when symbol display device 94 deviates out Reach random number counter C3, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, a first variation type counter CS1 used to select a variation pattern of the symbol display device 94, and a first specific ramp unit 96 Period of time to switch the color displayed on the screen and the fluctuation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 94 A second change type counter CS2 which has been decided to use the off-symbol counter C4 is used to set the combination of off-design.

  Among them, each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1, and CS2 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and reaches a maximum value and returns to 0. In addition, the outset symbol counter C4 is configured such that the register value is added using the R register (refresh register) in the MPU 402, and as a result, the numerical value changes randomly. Each counter is updated at a short time interval, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 404. The RAM 404 is provided with a storage ball storage buffer consisting of one execution area and four storage areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a game for operating ports 83a and 83b. The values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in time series in accordance with the ball entry history.

  Specifically, for each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within a range of 0 to 676, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 676). In particular, when the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage buffer of the RAM 404 at the timing when the gaming ball enters the operation port 83a, 83b. That is, the pachinko machine 10 (specifically, the MPU 402) is provided with a jackpot occurrence lottery means for drawing the presence or absence of the jackpot state based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery start condition.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 49 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 49). Then, in the present embodiment, it is decided by the jackpot type counter C2 to determine whether to be in the positive change state (high probability state) or the normal state (low probability state) after the big hit state ends. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage buffer of the RAM 404 at the timing when the gaming ball enters the operation port 83a, 83b. That is, the present pachinko machine 10 (specifically, the MPU 402) is provided with the jackpot type lottery means for drawing the type of the jackpot state based on the establishment of the predetermined lottery start condition.

  Here, the definite change state means a gaming state in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot state is higher than that of the normal state until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied after the end of the jackpot state. Specifically, in the normal state, the number of random numbers for which the jackpot state occurs is two, and the value is “337, 673”, and in the positive variation state, the jackpot state occurs. The number of random numbers is 10, and the values are “67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661”.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the normal jackpot state (first special game state) that is in the normal state after the end of the jackpot state, and the probability change jackpot state (the second special game state) that is in the definite change state after the end of the jackpot state The aspect of the symbol that is stopped and displayed after the variable display on the display screen of the symbol display device 94 is different. Specifically, when a big hit condition usually occurs, the combination of the big hit symbols as the first special display result (more specifically, the combination of the symbols with the same even number attached) is stopped and displayed When the jackpot state occurs, the combination of the probability variation jackpot symbols (more specifically, the combination of the symbols given the same odd number) as the second special display result is stopped and displayed.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the holding ball storage buffer of the RAM 404 at the timing when the gaming ball enters the operation port 83a, 83b. That is, the pachinko machine 10 (specifically, the MPU 402) is provided with reach generation lottery means for drawing the presence or absence of reach display based on the establishment of a predetermined drawing start condition.

  For example, the first variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The second variation type counter CS2 is, for example, Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is sequentially added, and it is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 240).

  The first variation type counter CS1 determines the display mode of the symbol display device 94, such as the type of reach effect generated upon reach display and other rough symbol variation modes. That is, the present pachinko machine 10 (specifically, the MPU 402) is provided with effect type lottery means for drawing the type of reach effect.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) includes the symbol display device 94 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (pattern), and the stop display result after the variable display becomes a special display result In the case of a gaming machine in which the gaming state is a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol on the symbol display device 94 is started. Display state to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the special display result.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state can be established by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 94. It is a display state in which a combination of reach patterns with sex is displayed, and in that state, variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state is established on a preset effective line in the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94 as a pre-step to finish the fluctuation display of the symbols. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of possible reach symbols, and the variation display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol row under the situation where the reach line is formed.

  Furthermore, in reach display, while displaying combinations of reach symbols as described above, fluctuation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. What performs a reach effect is included by displaying a predetermined character etc. as a moving image in the substantially whole display screen, after reducing or displaying the thing of performing a reduction and the combination of a reach symbol reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 is operated (specifically, a pressing operation) as part of various reach effects, the effect display on the display screen is not operated. An operation-compatible effect is set in which an operation-compatible effect display different from that of the case is performed.

  As the operation corresponding presentation, after the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 moves from the initial position to the maximum pressing position (that is, after moving forward), the push button member 320 returns to the initial position (that is, A single-shot operation compatible effect is set in which an operation corresponding effect display is provided each time the push button member 320 is operated once, assuming that the return operation is performed once. In this case, the reach display occurs in any of the situations where the big hit state finally occurs and the situations where the big hit state does not occur, but the one-shot operation compatible presentation occurs with a predetermined probability in any situation. However, in the situation where the big hit state occurs and the situation where the big hit state does not occur, the content of the effect display that is finally displayed in the one-shot operation compatible effect is different.

  As the operation corresponding production, in addition to the one-shot operation corresponding production, the operation corresponding production display every time the push button member 320 is operated once, and the push button member in the fluctuation display time (game time) where the big hit state occurs The jackpot corresponding effect display is performed when 320 is operated a predetermined number of times predetermined, and the push button member 320 is operated a predetermined number of times predetermined within a predetermined period in the variable display times (game times) in which the big hit does not occur. In the case where it is determined that the continuous action corresponding display is performed, the continuous operation corresponding corresponding display is set.

  As the operation corresponding production, in addition to the one-shot operation corresponding production and the continuous operation corresponding production, every time the push button member 320 is operated once, the operation corresponding production display is made, and the prescribed number of times the push button member 320 is predetermined. When it is operated, it is possible to execute the specific one-shot operation, and when the specific one-shot operation is performed in the variable display times (game times) where the big hit state occurs The continuous operation corresponding production which performs the off-set corresponding production display when the specific one-shot operation is performed in the round is set.

  Furthermore, as the operation-based effect, in addition to the various operation-based effects, an operation area expansion effect is set in which the operation area AE of the push button member 320 is expanded during reach display. In the operation area expansion effect, by operating the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 in the state where the operation area AE is expanded, a jackpot is supported in the variable display times (game times) in which the jackpot state occurs The effect display is performed, and in the variable display times (game times) in which the jackpot state does not occur, the off-effect corresponding display is performed.

  The second variation type counter CS2 determines the switching display time as the time for switching the color displayed on the first specific lamp unit 96. The switching display time corresponds to the fluctuation display time of the symbol of the symbol display device 94. Both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The buffer values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are acquired at the time of the start of color switching displayed on the first specific lamp unit 96 and the determination of the variation pattern at the start of variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 94.

  The off symbol counter C4 is for determining the left stop symbol of the left row symbol, the middle row symbol, and the right row symbol when the big hit lottery is out, and a counter value in a predetermined range is prepared. The out-of-pattern counter C4 is updated in the normal processing, and the value of the out-of-pattern counter C4 is stored in any of the back and forth out-of-reach reach pattern buffer, the out-of-back out reach pattern buffer and the completely out-of-out pattern buffer of the RAM 404. Then, when the fluctuation pattern is determined at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, any buffer value of the reach symbol buffer, the reach symbol buffer other than the back and forth symbol and the completely out symbol buffer is acquired according to the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  In addition, the value of the electronic combination release counter C5 at that time is acquired at the timing when the winning on the through gate 84 occurs, and the lottery of whether or not to open the motorized combination based on the acquired value is executed. Be done.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, the power failure monitoring board 405, the payout control device 242 and the voice lamp control device 143 are connected to the output side of the MPU 402 in the main control device 162. For example, a winning ball command is output to the payout control device 242 based on the result of the entering determination to the ball entry unit.

  The voice lamp control device 143 outputs various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a stop display command, a big hit start command, and a big hit end command. Here, the change start command and the type command are output to the voice lamp control device 143 when the switching display on the first specific lamp unit 96 is started based on the information stored in the holding ball storage buffer. In this case, the fluctuation start command includes the fluctuation display time of symbol, information of presence / absence of big hit occurrence, information of presence / absence of reach display, information of reach type, etc. Contains type information. The stop display command is output to the audio lamp control device 143 when the switching display on the first specific lamp unit 96 is ended. The jackpot start command is also output to the audio lamp control device 143 when transitioning to the jackpot state. In addition, the jackpot end command is output to the audio lamp control device 143 when the jackpot state ends.

  In addition, a drive unit and the like provided in the variable winning device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 402, and in the big hit state, drive control of the drive unit is executed and opening and closing of the variable winning device 82 is executed. . As described above, by opening and closing the variable winning device 82 in the jackpot state, a large number of gaming balls are paid out to the player. That is, the jackpot state as the special gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

  The power failure monitoring board 405 relays the main control board 401 and the power supply and emission control device 243, and monitors a voltage of 24 volts DC stable which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and emission control device 243.

  The payout control device 242 performs payout control of the winning balls and the lending balls by the payout device 224, and when the winning ball command is input, the gaming balls of the number corresponding to the winning ball command are paid out. Drive control the dispensing device 224. In other words, when the payout control device 242 inputs a winning ball command, the payout control process is executed to drive-control the payout device 224, thereby delivering the number of gaming balls corresponding to the winning ball command. . That is, the pachinko machine 10 has a payout function of executing payout of the game ball based on the game result.

  The power supply and emission control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, and the like generate necessary operation power for each, and the generated operation power is indicated by a double-line arrow. Supply through the route. In addition, the power supply and launch control device 243 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

  The sound lamp control device 143 controls the display control device 410 while driving and controlling the speaker unit and the light emitting unit provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control board 401.

  An MPU 412 is mounted on a display control substrate 411 provided in the display control device 410. The MPU 412 is a ROM 413 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 412 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data upon execution of the control program stored in the ROM 413. A RAM 414 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated.

  The MPU 412 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The voice lamp control device 143 is connected to the input side of the MPU 412, and position detection means for the push button member 320 provided in the operation switch unit 40 is connected. The position detection means outputs position detection sensor 351 which outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to display control device 410 when push button member 320 exists at the maximum pressing position, and push button member 320 is at the maximum projecting position. And a position detection sensor 352 that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the display control device 410. Further, a symbol display device 94 is connected to the output side of the MPU 412, and a solenoid 340 provided in the operation switch unit 40 is connected. Further, on the output side of the MPU 412, a symbol display device 94 and an operation number display unit 95a are connected.

  The position detection sensor 351 outputs an HI level signal when the push button member 320 reaches the maximum pressing position, and outputs a LOW level signal by moving from the maximum pressing position. The display control device 410 is configured to determine that one operation has been performed based on the fall of the LOW level signal. Further, the position detection sensor 352 outputs an HI level signal when the push button member 320 reaches the maximum projecting position, and outputs a LOW level signal by moving from the maximum projecting position. The display control device 410 is configured to determine that the push button member 320 has reached the maximum projecting position based on the rise to the HI level signal.

  The MPU 412 inputs rendering commands (variation start command, type command, stop display command, jackpot start command, jackpot end command, etc.) output from the main controller 162 and output via the voice lamp controller 143. At the same time, the input command is analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the input command, and the display control of the symbol display device 94 is executed.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation start command is input, the fluctuation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 94 is started, and after the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed in a mode corresponding to the information included in the fluctuation start command, The variation display of symbols is ended in the state where the stop result corresponding to the type command is displayed. For example, the above-described reach display or reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 94 as the variation display of the symbol in the mode corresponding to the information included in the above-mentioned variation start command. In addition, when the stop result is displayed, the combination of the large jackpot symbols is displayed in the variable display cycle where the above normal jackpot condition occurs, and the variable display cycle where the above-mentioned probability variation big hit situation occurs. Display the combination of probability variation big hit symbols.

  Further, in the display control, the detection results from the position detection sensors 351 and 352 of the operation switch unit 40 are reflected. Further, the MPU 412 controls the operation switch unit 40 based on the effect command.

  When the display control of the symbol display device 94 is executed so that the detection results from the position detection sensors 351 and 352 of the operation switch unit 40 are reflected in the MPU 412, and the operation corresponding presentation using the operation switch unit 40 is performed In this case, various areas provided in the ROM 413 and the RAM 414 of the display control device 410 are used.

  As various areas provided in the ROM 413, for example, various table storage areas 421 are set. The various table storage area 421 starts the variation display of the symbol based on the variation start command input from the voice lamp control device 143, and when performing the operation corresponding presentation in the variation display cycle, the details of the effect contents This area stores a table for identification.

  As various areas provided in the RAM 414, various flag storage areas 425, a timing counter area 426, and a continuous operation counter area 427 are set. The various flags storage area 425 stores, for example, information for specifying the effect pattern in the variable display cycle when the variable display of the symbol is started based on the change start command input from the voice lamp control device 143, for example. It is an area. The timing counter area 426 is a counter area for specifying start timings and the like of various effects. The continuous operation counter area 427 is a counter area for measuring the number of continuous operations when the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 is operated a plurality of times in succession.

(Various processes executed by main controller 162)
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process which are executed when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 advances the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 402 executes a main process activated upon power on and an NMI interrupt process initiated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, the description of these processes is omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is activated periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 402.

  In step S101, monitoring processing of various sensor detections is performed. Specifically, signals from various detection sensors and switches connected to the main controller 162 are read, and those signals are determined to store detection information (for example, winning detection information).

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

  In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the out-of-design symbol counter C4, and the electric character release counter C5 are updated. Specifically, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the out-of-set symbol counter C4 and the electric character release counter C5 are each incremented by one, and when their counter values reach the maximum value, respectively Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

  Thereafter, in step S104, a winning process for the operation opening accompanying the winning of the operation openings 83a and 83b is executed. In the winning opening process for the operation opening, when the operation openings 83a and 83b have been hit, the number of start pending storages stored in the holding ball storage area is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4") The numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the outset symbol counter C4 updated in the step S103 is stored in the reserve area of the reserve sphere storage area under the condition of being present. In this case, the first free hold area among the first to fourth areas of the hold area, that is, the hold area corresponding to the current start hold storage number is stored. In addition, the processing for lighting the first hold lamp unit 98 corresponding to the start hold storage number is executed to the sound lamp control device 143.

  In the subsequent step S105, after the winning combination processing for through accompanying the winning on the through gate 84 is executed, the timer interrupt processing is ended. In the through winning process, when the winning on the through gate 84 has occurred, the number of bonus holding memories stored in the electronic holding area is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4") And stores the value of the motorized product release counter C5 updated in the step S103 in the electric wave holding area. In addition, the CPU executes processing for lighting the second hold lamp unit 99 corresponding to the number of bonus item holding memories with respect to the sound lamp control device 143.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of the normal process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process activated in response to the power-on, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is performed. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S201 to S206 is executed as periodic processing of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S208 and S209 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a prize ball command, and sends it to the payout control device 242 if the prize ball command is set, and effects commands such as variation commands, type commands, variation end commands, etc. Is set to the voice lamp control device 143. The command transmitted to the audio lamp control device 143 is transmitted to the display control device 410 via the audio lamp control device 143.

  Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to zero. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

  In the following step S203, award ball command setting processing is performed. In the prize ball command setting process, first, with reference to the flag corresponding to the prize detection stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 404, whether or not a prize has occurred in various entry sections such as the general prize opening 81 or not If a winning occurs, the number of gaming balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning is determined. Then, based on the number of gaming balls determined in the above-described processing, the winning ball command to be output to the payout control device 242 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S204, game number control processing for controlling the game in each game number is executed. In this game number control process, jackpot determination, setting of variation display of symbols by the symbol display device 94, display control of the first specific lamp unit 96 for performing variation display, and the like are performed.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By this gaming state transition processing, the gaming state shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, etc., and in the opening / closing execution mode, the control of the variable winning device 82 etc. Is executed.

  In step S206, a process for supporting the combination for driving and controlling the motorized part provided in the lower operation port 83b is executed. In this electronic-support-support process, it is determined whether or not to open the motorized combination.

  In the following step S207, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has come, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process (steps S208 and S209). That is, in step S208, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404. In step S209, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using such remaining time. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Next, among the various types of processing executed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410, processing relating to setting of the operation corresponding rendering concerning the operation switch unit 40 will be described.

  While the operation power is supplied, the MPU 412 executes a normal process for repeatedly executing a plurality of predetermined processes in a predetermined order. As a process related to setting of the operation corresponding effect in the normal process, a type of command input from the audio lamp control device 143 is specified, a command determination process for executing a process corresponding to the specified command, and the operation area expansion effect At least an operation area expansion effect process to be performed and a continuous operation corresponding effect process for performing the continuous operation corresponding effect are set. Each of these processes will be described below.

  First, command determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(Command judgment processing)
In the command determination process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not a change start command is input. The various commands input from the audio lamp control device 143 are stored in a command storage area provided in the RAM 414, and are erased by being read out in the command determination process.

  If a change start command has been input, it is determined in step S302 whether the change start command includes information related to the operation area expansion effect. Specifically, it is determined whether the information of the value of the first variation type counter CS1 included in the variation start command is included in the information of the value group for the operation area expansion effect stored in the ROM 413.

  If the information regarding the operation area expansion effect is included, the specific process for the operation area expansion effect is executed in step S303. In the specific process for the operation area expansion effect, the operation area expansion effect flag is stored in the operation area expansion effect flag storage area among the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414.

  If it is determined in step S302 that the information on the operation area expansion effect is not included, the process proceeds to step S304, and it is determined whether the information on the continuous operation corresponding effect is included. When the information concerning continuous operation corresponding production is included, the specific processing for the continuous operation corresponding presentation is executed in step S305. In the specific process for the continuous operation compatible effect, of the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414, the continuous operation compatible effect flag is stored in the continuous operation compatible effect flag storage area.

  In addition, in the identification process of step S305, the following process is executed along with the storage of the continuous operation corresponding effect flag. That is, based on the acquired random number value, the specified number of times determination table (see FIG. 16B) stored in the various table storage areas 421 of the ROM 413, and the presence or absence of the occurrence of the jackpot, the specified number of consecutive operations is determined. Do the processing. In this determination process, when the jackpot is won, the specified number of times is likely to be greater than when the jackpot is not won. Specifically, when the jackpot is won, "five times" is selected with a probability of 5/100, "10 times" is selected with a probability of 10/100, and "15 times with a probability of 85/100. Times is selected. On the other hand, when the jackpot has not been won, "five times" is selected with a probability of 85/100, "10 times" is selected with a probability of 10/100, and "15 times" with a probability of 5/100. Is selected.

  The upper limit value (15 times in the present embodiment) of the prescribed number of times is within the continuous operation corresponding rendering execution period, taking into consideration the return speed of the push button member 320 to the standby position and the reading timing of detection information. To be substantially within the achievable range.

  If it is determined in step S304 that the information related to the continuous operation corresponding presentation is not included, the process proceeds to step S306 after the identification process of steps S303 and S305 is performed. In step S306, a specific process for variable display is performed. In the specific process, based on the variation start command and the type command, the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 94, the variation display mode of the symbol including the reach display and the reach effect, and the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed The identification information is stored in the RAM 414. Thereafter, this command determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S301 that no change start command has been input, the process proceeds to step S307, and after this other specific process is executed, the present command determination process is ended. In the other specific processing, when the command being input is a stop display command, a jackpot start command or a jackpot end command, processing corresponding to each is executed. Further, in the other identification processing, when it is determined that a command is not input, the processing is ended as it is, and the processing is ended as it is even when the input command can not be analyzed.

(Processing for operation area expansion effect)
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 17, the process for the operation area expansion effect will be described. The operation area expansion effect processing is executed in a cycle of about 4 msec.

  In the operation area expansion effect processing, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not a variable display cycle (a game cycle) in which an operation area expansion effect is generated. When the variable display cycle is not in progress, the process for the operation area expansion effect is ended, and when the variable display cycle is in progress, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, it is determined whether a suggestion of a pressing operation has been performed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the operation area expansion effect is started, a pressing operation suggestion image (pressing operation prompting image) for prompting the player to press the pressing button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 is displayed. It is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94. For example, as the pressing operation suggesting image, a moving image is displayed such that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and a character such as "Press the button!" Is displayed on the display screen 94a. The indication of the pressing operation is not limited to that on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94, and may be performed by the output of sound from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that on the display screen 94 a. Alternatively, the push button member 320 may emit light. Furthermore, these various suggestion patterns may be used in combination.

  If it is determined in step S402 that the indication of the pressing operation has not been made, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether it is the expansion start timing of the operation area. The start timing is stored in advance in the ROM 413 of the display control device 410 as information on a predetermined count value after the start of the variable display of symbols. Then, after the start of the fluctuation display of the symbol, the value of the suggestion start timing counter provided in the timing counter area 426 is updated each time the positive determination is made in step S401, and the value of the counter is the predetermined count value. When it reaches, in step S403 affirmation judging is done.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not the expansion start timing of the operation area, the process for the operation area expansion effect is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the expansion start timing of the operation area, the operation area expansion processing is executed in the subsequent step S404. In the operation area expansion process, output of a drive signal to the solenoid 340 of the operation switch unit 40 is started. As a result, the solenoid 340 is excited, and the shutter member 330 moves from the closed position to the open position, as shown in FIGS. 11 (a) and 11 (b). Thereby, the operable area in the push button member 320 (more specifically, the operation surface 322) is expanded (that is, the ratio of the portion exposed upward in the operation surface 322 increases) and the push button 320 The amount of upward protrusion of x increases (the operating stroke increases).

  After the process of step S404 is performed, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, setting processing of a pressing operation suggesting image is executed. Thereby, a pressing operation suggesting image is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94. In addition, about the display of the said image, the display of the said message is started at the timing after the expansion of the operation area | region is completed, and the said message is complete | finished by progress of a suggestion period defined beforehand or execution of pressing operation.

  In the following step S406, setting processing for the pressing operation waiting state is executed. In the setting processing of the pressing operation waiting state, the flag storage for the pressing operation waiting flag is stored in the pressing operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 at the same timing as the display start timing of the pressing operation suggesting image. Set the timing of Thereafter, the processing for presentation for continuous operation is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S402 that the indication of the pressing operation has been made, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, it is determined whether or not the indication of the pressing operation has been made by determining whether the pressing operation wait flag is stored in the pressing operation wait flag storage area of the RAM 414.

  If it is in the state of waiting for the pressing operation, the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether it is an end timing of the pressing operation waiting state. Specifically, the value of the pressing operation waiting period measurement counter in the timing counter area 426 is referred to, and it is determined whether the end timing has come. The counter for measuring the pressing operation waiting period is set to a predetermined value in accordance with the setting processing of the operation waiting state, and is updated each time a negative determination is made in step S408. Then, when the counter for measuring the pressing operation waiting period has reached a predetermined value, the determination in step S408 is affirmative.

  When negative determination is carried out in step S408, it progresses to step S409. In step S409, it is determined whether the pressing operation of the push button member 320 has been performed. Specifically, in the MPU 412 of the display control device 410, in addition to the normal processing in which the command determination processing and the processing for operation area expansion effect processing are repeatedly executed, the normal processing is interrupted and executed periodically (for example, 2 msec) Timer interrupt processing is set. In the timer interrupt process, a sensor monitoring process for monitoring a detection signal (detection information) from the operation detection sensor 351 of the operation switch unit 40 is executed. Then, in step S408, the presence or absence of the pressing operation is determined based on the result of the sensor monitoring process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S409, the main operation area expansion effect processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S409, the process proceeds to step S410. In step S410, the setting process of the return waiting state is performed.

  In the setting process of the return waiting state, the return waiting flag is stored in the return wait flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414. Thereafter, the processing for the main operation area expansion effect is ended. The return waiting flag is a flag that is referred to when monitoring whether the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum projecting position is performed.

  After the setting process of the return waiting state is performed in step S410, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S408, the process of releasing the operation waiting state is executed in step S411, and then the process for the main operation area expansion effect Finish. In the release process of the operation waiting state, the pressing operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 is erased. As a result, the monitoring of the subsequent pressing operation is canceled.

  Returning to the description of step S407, if a negative determination is made in step S407, that is, if it is determined not to be in the operation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, it is determined whether or not it is in a return waiting state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a return waiting flag is stored in the return waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425. When an affirmative determination is made in step S412, that is, when it is determined that the apparatus is in a return waiting state, the process proceeds to step S413.

  In step S413, it is determined whether the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum projecting position. Specifically, the timer interrupt process is set in the MPU 412 of the display control device 410, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring a detection signal (detection information) from the operation detection sensor 352 of the operation switch unit 40 is executed. There is. Then, in step S408, based on the result of the sensor monitoring process, it is determined whether or not return to the maximum protruding position is made.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S413, that is, if it is determined that the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum projecting position, the process proceeds to step S414. In step S414, setting processing of the operation completed image is performed. As a result, an image indicating that the pressing operation has been completed is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94.

  After the setting process of the operation completed image is performed in step S414, the process proceeds to step S415 to execute release process of the return waiting state. In the process of releasing the recovery waiting state, the recovery waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 is erased. As a result, the monitoring of the return of the push button member 320 thereafter is released.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S413, it is determined in step S416 whether it is the start timing of the suggestion of pressing operation cancellation. Specifically, with reference to the value of the release operation suggestion timing counter in the timing counter area 426, it is determined whether the suggestion timing has come. A predetermined value is set for the release operation suggestion timing counter in accordance with the setting process of the return waiting state, and is updated each time a negative determination is made in step S416. Then, when the value of the release operation suggestion timing counter is a predetermined value, the determination in step S416 is affirmative.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S416, the process proceeds to step S417. In step S417, a setting process of the pressing operation cancellation indication image is performed. As a result, an image prompting the end of the pressing operation is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94.

  After the setting process of step S417 is performed, or when a negative determination is made in step S416, the process proceeds to step S418. In step S418, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the return waiting state. The end timing of the return waiting state is a timing prior to the limit timing when it is not possible to secure a period in which the effect based on the pressing operation can be completed by the end timing of the variable display cycle.

  If a negative determination is made in step S418, the processing for real operation area expansion effect is ended as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S418, a process of setting an operation incomplete image is performed in step S419. Thus, an image indicating that the operation has not been completed is displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 94. Note that the display of the image ends at the end of the game play, that is, when the game result is displayed.

  After the process of step S419 is performed, the release process of the return waiting state is performed in step S415, and the effect process for extending the operation area is ended.

  Returning to the description of step S412 again, if a negative determination is made in step S412, the process proceeds to step S420. In step S420, it is determined whether it is the display end timing of the operation completion image or the operation uncompleted image. When an affirmative determination is made in step S420, the process for setting the result display image is performed in step S421, and the process for the main operation area expansion effect is ended.

  By executing the processing of step S421, a result display image is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. As the display of the image, for example, when the variable display time is a variable display time that a big hit state occurs, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of a big hit state. If the variable display cycle is a variable display cycle in which no jackpot state occurs, a moving image is displayed such that the display content of the character is the same as that before the operation suggestive image is started. In the setting process of the result display image, when the operation completed image is displayed, the process for displaying the result display image corresponding to the operation completed is executed, and the operation incomplete image is displayed. In the process, the process for displaying the result display image corresponding to the incomplete operation is performed. That is, different images are displayed when the operation is completed and when the operation is not completed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S420, the process proceeds to step S422, and it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display. If it is not the end timing of the variable display, the processing for the main operation area expansion effect is ended as it is. If it is the end timing of the variable display, the processing for setting the end display image is executed in step S423, and the processing for returning from the extended state to the normal state is executed in step S424. Finish.

  In the setting process of the end display image in step S 423, when the variable display time is the variable display time that the big hit state occurs, the display setting is performed so that the moving image display that the occurrence of the big hit state is decided is performed. . In this case, when the setting process of the result display image is being executed and the moving image display is set to correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot state in the setting process of the result display image, The setting of the moving image display is performed so as to be the moving image display and the series of contents. On the other hand, when the setting process of the operation uncompleted image is executed, the moving image display in which the operation uncompleted image is dramatically switched to the moving image display to the effect that the occurrence of the jackpot state is decided is interposed. .

  In the return processing in step S424, the return flag is stored in the return flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 425. In the timer interrupt process described above, when the return flag is stored, a process for returning the operation switch unit 40 to the normal state is performed. In the return processing, it is determined whether it is time after the game result is displayed, and if it is determined that it is the time after the game result is displayed, the following process is performed.

  First, based on detection information from the position detection sensor 352, it is determined whether the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum projecting position. If it is determined that the push button member 320 has not returned to the maximum projecting position, the return processing is ended as it is. That is, when the player continues the pressing operation by putting his hand on the push button member 320 or the like, the return to the normal state is avoided.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum projecting position, the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 340 is stopped, and the solenoid 340 is put in a non-excitation state. Thus, the shutter member 330 is moved to the closed position by the biasing force of the shutter spring member 335, and the return from the expanded state to the normal state is completed. After the output stop process of the drive signal is executed, the recovery flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 is erased, and the recovery process is ended.

  When the return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 425, the operation area expansion effect is restricted, and in the variable display cycle in which the operation area expansion effect is executed, an alternative effect is executed instead. It will be. By the way, when the fluctuation display cycle in which the operation area expansion effect is performed is ended and the second pressing operation is not performed while the next fluctuation display cycle is started, the next fluctuation display cycle is started. It is set to complete the return from the extended state to the normal state by the time it is done. Therefore, when the return processing is completed as it is after the game result is displayed, the operation area expansion effect is not restricted in the next game round.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 94 and the state of the operation switch unit 40 when the operation area expansion effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

  First, with reference to FIG. 18A, the case where the operation switch unit 40 is released after the pressing operation is performed will be described.

  When the variable display cycle (game time) in which the operation area expansion effect is executed is started at the timing of ta1, the variable display of each symbol row which has been stopped and displayed until then is started. After that, first, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed, and then the right symbol row is stopped and displayed at timing ta2. At this time, reach display is started by stopping and displaying the same symbol (symbol “3” in FIG. 18) on the above-mentioned effective line. In the reach display, the reach symbol is displayed in a reduced size at the upper part of the display screen 94a, and a character image imitating a girl is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 94a. Thereafter, at timing ta3, the operation switch unit 40 switches from the normal state to the expanded state.

  At timing ta4 after the switching of the operation switch unit 40 to the expanded state is completed, the display of the pressing operation suggestion image is started. Thereafter, when the player performs the pressing operation of the push button member 320 at the timing of ta5, the display of the pressing operation suggestion image is ended and an image showing that the operation has been effectively accepted is displayed In the embodiment, white out of the display screen 94a is performed).

  Here, when the player releases the push button member 320, the push button member 320 returns to the maximum projecting position, and the operation completed image is displayed according to the game result at the timing of the subsequent ta6. Specifically, when the current game round is not a game round in which a jackpot state occurs, the display content before the display of the operation suggestion image is started, and the game round in which a jackpot state occurs in the current game round In this case, the display of an image corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of ta7, the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed, and the game result is clearly indicated. Specifically, when the current game time is not a game time where a big hit occurs, the combination of symbols corresponding to the disconnection is stopped and displayed, and the current change time is a change display time where a big hit occurs. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is displayed stopped. As described above, when the push button member 320 is not operated at the timing when the game result is displayed (that is, when waiting at the maximum projecting position), the operation switch unit 40 at the timing of ta8 thereafter. Will return to the normal state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18B, a case where the operation switch unit 40 is maintained in the pressed state when the pressing operation is performed will be described.

  The variable display of symbols is started at the timing of tb1, and the normal variable display is switched to the reach display at the timing of tb2. Thereafter, the operation switch unit 40 is switched from the normal state to the expanded state at the timing tb3, and the operation suggestion image is displayed on the display screen 94a at the timing tb4. In addition, since the flow of the timing of tb1 to the timing of tb4 is the same as the flow of the timing of ta1 to the timing of ta4, detailed description will be omitted.

  When the pressing operation is started at the timing of tb5 and the push button member 320 is kept pressed to the maximum pressing position, the display screen 94a is white-out to indicate that the pressing operation has been effectively accepted first. Do. If the push button member 320 has not returned to the maximum projecting position even after the predetermined period has elapsed since acceptance of the pressing operation, release of the pressing operation is performed at the timing of tb 6 when the predetermined period has elapsed (the push button member 320 An image suggesting the release) is displayed on the display screen 94a.

  When the release waiting period elapses without releasing the pressing operation, an image indicating that the operation is not completed is displayed on the display screen 94a, and the display screen 94a is displayed at the timing when the variable display cycle ends. The image of the girl displayed in the center of the image is not displayed, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the disconnection is stopped and displayed when the current variable display cycle is not a variable display cycle occurring in the jackpot state. In the case where is a variation display cycle in which the jackpot condition occurs, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, when the pressing operation is continued even at the timing when the next variable display time starts at the timing of tb8, the return to the normal state of the operation switch unit 40 is advanced. In this case, since the operation switch unit 40 has not returned to the normal state at the start of the next variable display cycle, the operation area expansion effect is not performed in the same variable display cycle, and Become. That is, even if a command to perform the operation area expansion effect is output from the main control device 162, an alternative effect to replace the operation area expansion effect is executed.

  After that, when the pressing operation is released at the timing of tb9, the return to the normal state of the operation switch unit 40 is executed at the timing of tb10 at which the push button member 320 returns to the maximum projecting position. The restriction on the operation area expansion effect in is canceled.

  As already described, as the operation-corresponding effect in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described operation area expansion effect, the flow of rough effects is similar to that of the operation area expansion effect, but the operation area is expanded. The normal operation corresponding rendering (one-shot operation corresponding rendering) is set. Here, with reference to FIG. 18A, this normal operation corresponding effect will be described.

  The normal operation correspondence presentation starts at the timing of ta1, and shifts to reach display at the timing of ta2. Thereafter, in the operation area expansion effect, the operation area is expanded at the timing of ta3, but in the normal operation corresponding effect, the operation area is not expanded and is maintained in the normal state. Note that the display content of the normal operation compatible effect and the display content of the operation area expansion effect are completely the same until at least the timing of ta3.

  At timing ta4, while the display prompting the operation of the expanded push button member 320 is displayed on the display screen 94a in the extended operation compatible rendering, the non-expanded (normal state) push button in the normal operation compatible rendering A display prompting the user to operate the member 320 is displayed on the display screen 94a. Moreover, after the timing of ta4, the content of the operation area expansion effect (a mode of reach display) and the content of a normal operation corresponding effect (a mode of reach display) are different. Thereafter, the contents of the effects performed by operating the push button member 320 are different in each effect.

  As described above, by combining the effect that the operation area does not expand and the effect that the operation area expands, the player determines whether the operation switch unit 40 is deformed (the operation area is expanded) with the progress of the effect. It will be played while paying attention. Therefore, the improvement of the attention to the operation switch unit 40 can be expected.

  In the present embodiment, as the effect using the operation switch unit 40, the continuous operation corresponding effect described above is adopted in addition to the operation area expansion effect. Therefore, the continuous operation corresponding rendering process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the process for the said continuous operation corresponding | compatible production is performed by about 4 msec period.

(Processing for continuous operation corresponding effects)
In the processing for continuous operation corresponding effect, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the variable display cycle in which the continuous operation corresponding effect is generated is being performed. If the variable display cycle is not in progress, the processing for the main continuous operation corresponding effect is ended as it is, and if the variable display cycle is in progress, the process proceeds to step S502. In addition, as already demonstrated, a continuous operation corresponding | compatible production | presentation becomes a combination of continuous operation and specific one-shot operation.

  In step S502, it is determined whether the suggestion of the repeated operation has been performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when starting the continuous operation corresponding effect, the image for continuous operation suggestion (image for continuous operation prompting) which urges the player to operate the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 repeatedly a plurality of times is a symbol It is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the display device 94. For example, as the image for continuous operation operation suggestion, a moving image is displayed such that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and a character such as "Please continuously hit a button." Is displayed. The suggestion of the repeated operation is not limited to the one on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, and may be performed on the sound output from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of the one on the display screen 94a. It is also good.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the indication of the repeated operation has not been made, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the suggestion of the continuous operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined timing after the change display mode of the symbols on the display screen 94a is switched from the normal change display to the reach display.

  When it is not the start timing of the suggestion of the continuous shooting operation, the processing for the continuous operation corresponding presentation is finished as it is. When it is the start timing of the suggestion of the continuous operation, in step S504, the setting processing of the continuous operation suggesting image is executed. Thereby, the image for continuous operation suggestion is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94. Note that the display of the image is continued for a predetermined suggestion period.

  In the subsequent step S505, setting processing for the continuous operation waiting state is executed. Specifically, the continuous operation waiting flag is stored in the continuous operation waiting flag storage area of the various flags storage area 425 in the RAM 414. Thereafter, the processing for presentation for continuous operation is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S502 that the indication of the continuous operation has been made, the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, it is determined whether or not the continuous operation waiting state is stored by determining whether the continuous operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414 is stored.

  If it is in the continuous operation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, it is determined whether the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 has been operated. The presence or absence of the operation of the push button member 320 is monitored by the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process in the MPU 412 as described above. In step S507, when the processing result of the monitoring processing is the processing result that the operation of the push button member 320 is generated (specifically, the operation flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 is operated If the presence flag is stored), the process advances to step S508 to execute setting processing of the operation acceptance image. As a result, an operation acceptance image is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94. As the display of the image, for example, a moving image is displayed such that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of the operation.

  After the process of step S508 is performed, the process proceeds to step S509, and it is determined whether the number of repeated operations has reached the defined number of operations determined in the command determination process. Specifically, the counter value of the continuous operation counter area 427 of the RAM 414 is configured to be incremented by one each time the positive determination is made in step S507, and this counter value and the prescribed operation frequency Make a judgment by comparison. The value of the continuous operation counter area 427 is initialized when the continuous operation waiting flag is cleared.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S509, the process advances to step S510 to perform setting processing of the image for continuous operation completion. As a result, on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94, an image for prompting the end of the continuous operation is displayed.

  After the process of step S510 is performed, the process proceeds to step S511, and the setting process of the specific one-shot operation waiting state is performed. Specifically, the specific one-shot operation waiting flag is stored in the specific one-shot operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414. That is, in the continuous operation corresponding rendering, the specific one-shot operation is permitted as the specific one-shot operation, on the condition that the multiple-shot operation has been completed.

  In the subsequent step S512, setting processing of a specific one-shot operation suggesting image is executed. By performing such processing, a specific one-time operation suggesting image (specific one-time operation prompting image) prompting the player to operate the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 once is the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94. Is displayed. For example, as the one-shot operation suggestion image, a moving image is displayed such that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and a character such as "Please press a push button" is displayed. The suggestion of the specific one-shot operation is not limited to that in the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94, and is performed to output the sound from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that in the display screen. It is also good.

  The image set by the setting process of the specific one-shot operation suggestion image is displayed at a timing after the continuous operation completion image is displayed for a predetermined period.

  If a negative determination is made in each process of step S507 and step S509, the process proceeds to step S513. In step S513, it is determined whether it is the reception completion timing of the continuous operation. Specifically, with reference to the value of the continuous operation accepting period counter provided in the timing counter area 426 of the RAM 414, it is determined whether or not the acceptance end timing has come. A predetermined value is input to the counter for the continuous operation accepting period, when setting processing for the continuous operation waiting state is performed, and the counter is updated each time a negative determination is made in step S513. Then, when the value of the continuous operation reception period counter reaches a predetermined value, an affirmative determination is made in step S513, and when the value does not reach a predetermined value, a negative determination is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S513, the processing for presentation effect corresponding to continuous operation ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S513, the process proceeds to step S514. In step S514, a setting process of an acceptance end suggestion image is performed. As a result, an image indicating that the reception period of the continuous operation has ended is displayed on the display screen 94a.

  After the process of step S514 or step S512 is performed, the process of releasing the continuous operation waiting state is performed in step S515, and the process for the continuous operation corresponding rendering is finished. In the release process of the continuous operation waiting state, the continuous operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 of the RAM 414 is erased.

  Returning to the description of step S506, if a negative determination is made in step S506, that is, if it is determined not to be in the continuous operation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S516. In step S516, it is determined whether it is in a state of waiting for a specific one-shot operation. Specifically, it is determined whether a specific one-shot operation waiting state is stored by determining whether a specific one-shot operation waiting flag is stored in the specific one-shot operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414.

  If it is in the state of waiting for the specific one-shot operation, the process proceeds to step S517. In step S517, it is determined whether the wait period has elapsed. When the setting process in the specific one-shot operation waiting state is performed, a predetermined value is input to the wait period counter in the timing counter area 426. The value of the wait period counter is updated (one by one) each time a negative determination is made in step S517, and the value is affirmed in step S517 when the value becomes a predetermined value (for example, "0"). It is judged. As described above, by setting the weight period, there is a period in which the pressing operation becomes invalid between the continuous shooting operation and the specific one-shot operation.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S517, that is, if it is determined that the wait period is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S518. In step S518, it is determined whether a specific one-shot operation has been performed, that is, whether the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 has been operated. The presence or absence of the operation of the push button member 320 is monitored by the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process in the MPU 412 as described above. In step S518, if the process result of the monitoring process is the process result that the operation of the push button member 320 is generated (specifically, the operation flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 is operated If the presence flag is stored (YES), the process proceeds to step S519. By executing the setting process of the operation acceptance image in step S519, the operation acceptance image is displayed on the display screen 94a. As the display of the image, for example, a moving image is displayed such that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of the operation.

  After the setting process of step S519 is performed, the process proceeds to step S520, and the release process of the specific one-shot operation waiting state is performed. Specifically, the specific one-shot operation waiting flag stored in the specific one-shot operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 is erased.

  Thereafter, in step S521, setting processing of the result display image is executed. By executing the process of step S521, the result display image is displayed on the display screen 94a. As the display of the image, for example, when the variable display time is a variable display time that a big hit state occurs, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of a big hit state. If the variable display cycle is a variable display cycle in which no jackpot state occurs, a moving image is displayed such that the display content of the character is the same as that before the operation suggestive image is started.

  After executing the processing of step S521, if a negative determination is made in steps S516 and S518, and if a negative determination is made in step S517, the process proceeds to step S522. In step S522, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display. If a negative determination is made in step S522, the processing for presentation effect corresponding to continuous operation is ended.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S523, that is, if it is an end timing of the variable display, a setting process of an end display image is executed in step S523, and the process for continuous operation corresponding to rendering is ended.

  In the setting process of the end display image in step S523, when the fluctuation display time is the fluctuation display time that the big hit state occurs, the display setting is performed so that the moving image display that the occurrence of the big hit state is decided is performed. . In this case, when the setting process of the result display image is being executed and the moving image display is set to correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot state in the setting process of the result display image, The setting of the moving image display is performed so as to be the moving image display and the series of contents. On the other hand, when the setting process of the operation uncompleted image is executed, the moving image display in which the operation uncompleted image is dramatically switched to the moving image display to the effect that the occurrence of the jackpot state is decided is interposed. .

  Here, the display content in the symbol display device 94 and the operation mode of the operation switch unit 40 when the continuous operation corresponding effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG.

  When the game run in which the continuous operation corresponding effect is executed is started at the timing of tc1, the variable display of each symbol row which has been stopped and displayed until then is started. After that, first, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed, and then the right symbol row is stopped and displayed at the timing of tc2. At this time, reach display is started by stopping and displaying the same symbol (symbol “3” in FIG. 18) on the above-mentioned effective line. After the reach display is started, the reach symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper part of the display screen 94a, and a character image imitating a girl is displayed in the central part of the display screen 94a. After that, at the timing tc3, a message (for example, “a series of strikes!”) Prompting a series of strikes of the push button member 320 is displayed on the display screen 94a, and at the same time, it switches to a state of waiting for a series operation.

  Thereafter, the pressing operation of the push button member 320 is repeated by the player, whereby the display of the operation acceptance number display unit 94b corresponding to the continuous operation arranged on the side of the display screen 94a is changed. Specifically, the number of times of operation is suggested to the player by switching the light-emitting body (LED) which has been turned off to the lighting state according to the number of times of operation. At the same time, an effect is displayed on the character image imitating a girl displayed on the display screen 94a so as to surround the character, and the effect is displayed so as to increase as the number of operations increases.

  Here, in the present embodiment, it is set such that the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is higher as the number of operations from the continuous operation being suggested to the operation completion increases. For this reason, it is assumed that the player performs the operation while expecting to be able to perform the pressing operation even once, and the attention degree to the pressing operation is improved.

  At the timing of tc5 when the number of times of operation by the repeated pressing operation has reached the preset specified number of operations, an image indicating that the continuous operation has been completed is displayed on the display screen 94a. At the timing of tc5, the pressing operation of the push button member 320 is temporarily invalidated, and thereafter, at the timing of tc6, the state is switched to a state in which the specific one-shot operation is accepted. At the same time, an image prompting a specific one-shot operation (one pressing operation) is displayed on the display screen 94a.

  When the push button member 320 is operated at timing tc7 after the image prompting the specific one-shot operation is displayed, the operation completed image is displayed according to the game result. Specifically, when the current game round is not a game round in which a jackpot state occurs, the display content before the display of the operation suggestion image is started, and the game round in which a jackpot state occurs in the current game round In this case, the display of an image corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of tc8, the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed, and the game result is clearly indicated. Specifically, the combination of symbols corresponding to the disconnection is stopped and displayed when the current game time is not a game time where a big hit state occurs, and the current game time is a game time where a big hit state occurs. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  According to the first embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The operation switch unit 40 as effect operation means is configured to be switchable between a normal state and an expanded state. When the game mode is switched to the expanded state, the operation area that the player can directly touch and operate (become accessible) is expanded. As described above, if the operation area is expanded according to the game situation, improvement in the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 40 can be expected. In particular, when the operation area expansion effect is executed, by changing the area which can be operated by touching directly, it is possible to strengthen the impact when the operation area is expanded and to improve the interest.

  Depending on the player, a game may be played with the hand always on the push button member 320 for the purpose of quickly operating the push button member 320 or the like. Here, with regard to the operation switch unit 40 shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with not only effects concerning sight and hearing but also effects concerning touch.

  In the game session where the operation area expansion effect is executed, there is a high possibility that a jackpot is won in the game session, so the player advances the game while expecting the operation switch unit 40 to operate. It can contribute to the improvement of the attention to the game.

  In the operation switch unit 40, the operable area in the normal state is included in the operable area in the expanded state. Compared with the case where the operation area in the normal state and the operation area in the extended state are provided independently, it is difficult for the player to be confused which part should be operated.

  With regard to the push button member 320, the upward projection is increased by switching from the normal state to the expanded state. As a result, not only the function to indicate that the expansion state has been made can be improved, but also the operation in the expansion state can be promoted by facilitating the operation.

  In the expanded state, the operation stroke of the push button member 320 is increased. The player can feel that the amount of displacement necessary for displacing the push button member 320 to the specific position has been changed by the hand operating the push button member 320 or the like. Therefore, by using the change in the operation amount of the push button member 320 as an effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game, it is possible to provide the player with not only visual or audible effects but also tactile effects.

  By restricting the movement of the push button member 320 in the projecting direction by the shutter member 330, the configuration for realizing the expansion of the operation area and the increase of the operation stroke described above is prevented from becoming complicated. There is. When the operation switch unit 40 is returned to the normal state, the shutter button 330 pushes the operation surface 322 of the push button member 320, whereby the push button member 320 can be moved in the retraction direction. Thereby, the complication of the structure concerning return is suppressed.

  In the configuration in which the operation area is changed using the movable shutter member 330, there is a possibility that the player's hand or the like may prevent the return. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the operation switch unit 40 is returned to the normal state on condition that the push button member 320 stands by at the maximum projecting position, that is, the push button member 320 is not pressed. Adopted the configuration. Thus, it is possible to prevent the return of the operation switch unit 40 to the normal state from being hindered by the player's hand or the like.

  In particular, when the operation area expansion effect is performed, the effect based on the pressing operation is performed on the condition that the push button member 320 is returned to the maximum projecting position. Thereby, it is suppressed that the push button member 320 is maintained in the pressed state, and it is easy to exhibit the return function to the normal state.

  The continuous operation compatible effect is adopted as the effect using the operation switch unit 40, and the player performs a repetitive operation (repeated operation of the specified number of times), whereby the specific single operation is prompted by the gaming machine. In this way, at least the execution of the continuous operation → the prompt operation of the specific one-shot operation is performed, so that when the push button member 320 is repeatedly operated aiming at reaching the prescribed number of times, the same operation may be given meaning to lead to the next operation. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to give an impression as if the repeated operation is wasted. Thereby, it can suppress that the attention degree to the operation switch unit 40 (specific operation) falls.

  Moreover, in continuous operation corresponding presentation, the structure in which a specific one-shot operation is possible is employ | adopted by performing the pressing operation of prescription | regulation frequency | count. The number of prescribed operations is set to increase according to the jackpot expectation degree of winning. For this reason, when repeatedly performing the operation (the continuous operation), the player performs the operation while expecting that the pressing operation is effectively accepted even once. Thus, the degree of attention to the pressing operation itself can be improved, and the player can be prevented from mechanically repeating the operation.

Second Embodiment
In the second embodiment, the configuration relating to the push button member as the operation means is different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, hereinafter, the configuration according to the push button member will be described based on FIGS. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front, FIG. 22 (a) is a plan view showing an upper bulging portion and a configuration related thereto, and FIG. 22 (b) is FIG. 23 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in FIG. 22 (a), and FIG. 23 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 22 (b). is there. In the following description, with respect to the configuration according to the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof is used to simplify or omit the description of the same configuration, and mainly the differences from the first embodiment are explained. Do.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the upper side bulging part 500 is provided with the upper tray 501 to which the function as a storage part which stores game balls is provided. As shown in FIG. 22A, the upper plate 501 has an upper plate main body 510 in which a bottom portion 511 and a peripheral wall portion 512 standing upward from the peripheral portion of the bottom portion 511 are formed. The upper tray main body 510 is in the form of a box opened upward as a whole (see FIG. 21), and a storage area RE of the game ball is defined by the upper tray main body 510.

  The peripheral wall portion 512 of the upper plate main body 510 is configured by a front side wall portion 513, a rear side wall portion 514, a right side wall portion 515, and a left side wall portion 516. The upper plate 501 and the frame body 20 are integrated by being fixed to each other. The game ball discharge port 521 communicating with the front door side upper plate passage 35 formed in the frame 20 is formed in the rear side wall portion 514, and the game ball paid out from the payout device 224 is on the front door side. The storage area RE is reached through the tray passage 35 → the game ball outlet 521.

  The front door side upper tray passage 35 is provided with a ball detection sensor 36 for detecting that the gaming ball has accumulated to a predetermined position on the front door side upper tray passage 35. The ball detection sensor 36 is electrically connected to the display control device 410. In the display control device 410, the upper tray 501 is full based on detection information (detection signal) from the ball detection sensor 36. It is configured to be able to understand that it is a tongue. That is, the ball detection sensor 36 is provided with a function as a full tank detection means for detecting that the upper tray 501 is full.

  At the central portion of the bottom portion 511, there is provided a partition portion 522 which has a wall shape rising upward from the bottom portion 511 and which divides the storage region RE back and forth. The front and rear width of the storage area RE is set so that a plurality of game balls can stand by in the front and back direction with respect to the area on the front side of the partition 522 and the area on the rear side of the partition 522 is The alignment passage 523 guides the game balls along the rear side wall portion 514 in a line. The front-rear width of the front region is larger than the front-rear width of the rear region.

  A gaming ball intake port 524 is formed in a portion of the rear side wall portion 514 which constitutes the most downstream portion of the alignment passage 523. The game balls that have flowed out into the storage area RE through the game ball discharge port 521 bypass the partition 522 from the front and flow into the alignment passage 523, and then move along the alignment passage 523 to play the game ball intake port 524 To reach. The game ball taken in from the game ball intake port 524 is guided to the ball feeding device 113 of the game ball firing mechanism 110.

  A part (more specifically, the front side wall 513) of the upper tray main body 510 described in detail above is covered by the cover 530 from the front of the gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 22B, the cover body 530 has a bottom plate portion 531 that faces the bottom portion 511 of the upper plate main body 510 from the lower side, and a ceiling that faces the bottom plate portion 531 with the front side wall portion 513 interposed therebetween. A plate portion 532 and a front plate portion 533 opposed to the front side wall portion 513 with a gap from the front of the gaming machine and connecting the two plate portions 531 and 532 are provided. And the frame 20, the bottom plate portion 531 is inserted into the slit 538 formed between the upper plate main body 510 and the frame 20 in more detail. By sandwiching the front side wall portion 513 vertically by the bottom plate portion 531 and the top plate portion 532, the upper plate main body 510 is attached in a state where sliding movement in the front and rear direction is allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, the slit 538 is also present at the left end of the upper plate 501, and the bottom plate portion 531 of the cover 530 is positioned between the upper plate main body 510 and the frame 20. It is movable. On the other hand, at the right end of the upper tray 501, the right wall portion 515 of the upper tray main body 510 enters the cover 530, thereby allowing the cover 530 to move rearward of the gaming machine (FIG. a) see).

  The upper tray 501 is provided with a stopper for preventing the cover body 530 from moving forward of the gaming machine. In this manner, the cover body 530 is prevented from coming off from the upper tray main body 510 by preventing the movement to the front of the gaming machine. The upper plate 501 is provided with a spring member (not shown) as biasing means for biasing the cover body 530 forward. Thus, the cover 530 is maintained in contact with the stopper. The position where the cover body 530 is in contact with the stopper from the rear of the gaming machine is the initial position.

  Further, at the back of the slit 538, a stopper device 540 for the cover which can be switched to a blocking state for blocking the sliding movement of the cover body 530 to the rear of the gaming machine and an allowance state for permitting sliding movement to the rear of the gaming machine. Is provided. In the blocking state, the stopper piece 541 of the cover stopper device 540 is inserted between the back wall 539 of the slit 538 and the rear end of the bottom plate 531, and one end of the stopper piece 541 abuts on the back wall 539 The rear end of the bottom plate portion 531 abuts on the other end, thereby blocking the rearward movement of the cover body 530. That is, movement of the cover body 530 from the initial position is blocked by the stopper / cover stopper device 540.

  In a region sandwiched by the front plate portion 533 of the cover body 530 and the front side wall portion 513 of the upper plate main body 510, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped push button member 550 is disposed. The push button member 550 is sandwiched by the top plate portion 532 and the bottom plate portion 531 of the cover body 530, and the upper and lower positions are defined by the both plate portions 531 and 532.

  An opening 534 is formed on the cover 530 so as to straddle the front plate 533 and the top 532, and a portion of the push button member 550 is exposed to the front side of the gaming machine through the opening 534. It has become. Thereby, access to the push button member 550 from the front side of the gaming machine is permitted.

  Further, the push button member 550 is disposed so that the player can operate the cover body 530 with his / her hand in a state where the hand is put on the cover body 530. According to this configuration, even if there are a plurality of operation targets of the cover body 530 and the push button member 550, it is not necessary to move the hand largely at each operation, and it is possible to suppress the operation becoming complicated.

  On both left and right sides of the push button member 550 (the opening 534), contact portions 536 that contact the push button member 550 from the side are formed. The contact portion 536 is constituted by a pair of plate-like portions opposed to each other, and when the push button member 550 abuts on the contact portion 536, movement of the push button member 550 to the left and right is restricted. ing. The contact portion 536 is formed so as to straddle each of the plate portions 531 to 533, and has a function as a reinforcing portion for reinforcing the cover body 530. In particular, the holding strength of the push button member 550 and the like tend to be reduced around the opening 534. This causes distortion or the like of the cover body 530 and causes the movement of the push button member 550 to be hindered. In this regard, in the present embodiment, a decrease in operability of the push button member 550 is suppressed by providing the contact portion 536 with a reinforcing function.

  In addition, the push button member 550 is formed such that the rear surface thereof faces the front side wall portion 513 with a gap therebetween, and a movement path in the front-rear direction is secured. Thus, the push button member 550 is movable in the same direction as the sliding direction of the cover 530.

  The front part of the push button member 550 is formed slightly larger than the opening 534, and the left and right ends of the front part are in contact with the front plate 533 of the cover 530 from the rear. . Thereby, the dropout of the push button member 550 from the opening 534 is avoided.

  A button spring member 555 as biasing means for biasing the push button member 550 forward is provided between the push button member 550 and the front side wall 513. By being biased by the button spring member 555, the push button member 550 is in a state of being pressed against the front plate portion 533 of the cover body 530. The position where the cover body 530 is in contact with the front plate portion 533 in the standby state at the initial position is the initial position of the push button member 550.

  When the cover body 530 slides to the rear of the gaming machine, the push button member 550 moves backward following the cover body 530. More specifically, when the cover body 530 slides rearward, the push button member 550 is pushed backward by the front plate portion 533 of the cover body 530, and the push button against the biasing force of the button spring member 555 The member 550 will move rearward. That is, with respect to the push button member 550, two movement patterns of single backward movement and backward movement following the cover 530 are permitted.

  The front side wall 513 of the upper tray main body 510 is a button that can be switched between a blocking state that blocks sliding movement of the push button member 550 to the rear of the gaming machine and an allowance state that permits sliding movement to the rear of the gaming machine A stopper device 560 is provided (see FIG. 23 (b)). The button stopper device 560 is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and switches from the allowed state to the blocked state when a drive signal is input from the display control device 410. The button stopper device 560 is normally maintained in the permitted state, and is controlled to be switched to the blocked state (specifically, when a predetermined condition is established) in accordance with the game situation.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the button stopper device 560 is in the blocking state, the stopper piece 561 of the button stopper device 560 is a front surface of the front side wall 513 and a rear surface of the push button member 550. The one end of the stopper piece 561 abuts against the front surface of the front side wall 513 and the other end abuts against the rear surface of the push button member 550, thereby blocking the rearward movement of the cover body 530. . By adopting such a configuration, the stress generated when the push button member 550 is pressed in the blocked state can be transmitted to the front side wall portion 513 through the stopper piece 561, and the stress is dispersed.

  The cover body 530, the cover spring member, the push button member 550, the button spring member 555, and the stopper devices 540 and 560, which are described in detail above, constitute an operation switch mechanism 502 corresponding to the operation switch unit 40.

  Here, the relationship between the upper plate main body 510 and the cover body 530 will be supplementarily described. The cover body 530 is configured such that the rear end portion of the top plate portion 532 does not protrude rearward (toward the storage region RE) than the front side wall portion 513 in a state of waiting at the initial position. When the cover body 530 is moved backward, the top plate portion 532 protrudes toward the storage area RE as indicated by the one-dotted chain line in FIG. Thus, when standing by at the initial position, the protrusion to the storage area RE side is avoided, and when the pressing operation to the rear is performed, the top plate portion 532 protrudes to the storage area RE side The above is a device for realizing stabilization of the holding posture of the cover body 530 by the front side wall portion 513 and avoidance of compression of the storage area RE caused by securing the movement area of the cover body 530.

  However, when the top plate portion 532 protrudes to the storage area RE side, there is a possibility that the movement of the top plate portion 532 may be hindered or the movement of the gaming ball may be hindered by the game balls existing in the storage region RE. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, one of the features is that a device for suppressing the occurrence of various problems is provided. Hereinafter, the configuration according to the feature will be described with reference to FIG.

  The storage area RE is divided into the front and back by the above-described partition part 522. For this reason, even if the gaming ball currently stored by the top plate portion 532 (hereinafter referred to as “reserved ball”) is pushed backward, pressure is transmitted to the stored spheres in the alignment passage 523 To make it less likely to cause the inconvenience of stopping the supply of the game balls when the game balls are fired.

  Thus, when the configuration for securing the game ball taking-in function by the partition 522 is adopted, although the influence of the movement of the cover body 530 can be prevented from reaching the alignment passage 523, in the storage area RE In the front side area, the influence of the movement of the cover body 530 becomes more likely. Then, various devices for suppressing such an influence are given to the partition part 522 and the top plate part 532.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, the top plate portion 532 is positioned above the upper end portion of the partition portion 522, and the top plate portion 532 with respect to the bottom portion 511 and the upper end portion of the partition portion 522 The height difference H is set to be larger than the diameter dimension of the gaming ball. Thereby, even when the top plate portion 532 slides rearward, the disadvantage that the storage sphere pushed backward by the top plate portion 532 can be held between the partition portion 522 is suppressed.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), the portion positioned in front of the partition 522 at the rear end of the top plate 532 has a linear shape extending laterally, whereas the partition The front surface of the surface 522 has a curved surface convex toward the front of the gaming machine, and the distance between the rear end of the top plate 532 and the front surface of the partition 522 gradually increases in the lateral direction. More specifically, the distance dimension between the rear end portion of the top plate 532 and the front surface of the partition 522 is gradually increased toward the upstream side (the game ball outlet 521 side) in the storage area RE.

  Therefore, even if the storage ball is caught between the top plate portion 532 and the partition portion 522 due to the rearward movement of the top plate portion 532, the game ball is along the front surface of the partition portion 522. It will be induced in the side, that is, in the direction intersecting with the moving direction of the top 532. This makes it possible to prevent the movement of the top plate 532 from being impeded. Furthermore, the gaming ball moving along the front surface of the partition 522 is pushed to the upstream side of the storage area RE, and it is possible to suppress transmission of the pressing force to the gaming ball on the downstream side.

(Operation mode of operation switch mechanism 502)
In the present embodiment, the operation mode of the operation switch mechanism 502 is changed according to the game situation. Therefore, the operation mode of the operation switch mechanism 502 will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic view showing an operation mode of the operation switch mechanism 502. As shown in FIG.

  First, the operation mode in the normal state of the operation switch mechanism 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 24A, when the operation switch mechanism 502 is in the normal state, the stopper piece 541 of the cover stopper device 540 stands by at the blocking position, and the pushing operation of the cover body 530 is performed. It is regulated. On the other hand, since the stopper piece 541 of the button stopper device 560 stands by at the allowable position, the pushing operation of the push button member 550 is permitted.

  When a portion of the push button member 550 exposed from the opening 534 is pushed to the rear of the gaming machine, the push button member 550 is a spring member 555 for the button as shown in FIG. Slide backward against the biasing force of. Then, when the rear surface of the push button member 550 abuts on the front side wall 513 of the upper tray main body 510, the further pressing operation is restricted. When the push button member 550 reaches the maximum pressing position where it abuts on the front side wall 513, the push button member 550 is detected by the detection sensor 557 (see FIG. 23B), and the detection sensor 557 sends a display control device 410 A detection signal is output. Thereafter, by releasing the hand from the push button member 550, the urging force of the button spring member 555 causes the push button member 550 to return to the position before movement (initial position).

  Next, the case where the operation of the cover body 530 is permitted will be described. When the preset condition is satisfied, the normal state is switched to the expanded state in which the operation area in the operation switch mechanism 502 is expanded. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24A to FIG. 24C, the stopper piece 541 of the cover stopper device 540 moves from the blocking position to the permitting position, and the movement restriction of the cover body 530 is released. Thus, the operation area is changed from the push button member 550 to the push button member 550 + the cover body 530.

  As shown in FIG. 24C to FIG. 24D, when the cover body 530 is pushed rearward of the gaming machine, the cover body 530 slides rearward against the biasing force of the cover spring member. Then, when the bottom plate portion 531 of the cover body 530 abuts on the back wall 539 of the slit 538, the further pressing operation is restricted.

  At this time, the push button member 550 is pushed by the front plate portion 533 of the cover body 530, and the push button member 550 also moves backward following the cover body 530, and the bottom plate portion 531 of the cover body 530 Simultaneously with the contact, the push button member 550 contacts the front side wall 513 of the upper tray main body 510. The movement of the cover body 530 (movement of the push button member 550) is detected by the detection sensor 557 by reaching the maximum pressing position where the push button member 550 abuts on the front side wall portion 513, and the display control device 410 The detection signal is output to

  Thereafter, by releasing the hand from the cover body 530, the cover body 530 returns to the position (initial position) before the operation by the biasing force of the cover spring member, and the biasing force of the button spring member 555 for the push button member 550 as well. To return to the position before the operation (initial position). Thus, after the cover body 530 and the push button member 550 respectively return to the initial positions, the cover stopper device 540 is in the blocking state as shown in FIG. 22 (d) → FIG. 22 (a). The movement of the cover body 530 is blocked by this. That is, the operation switch mechanism 502 switches from the expanded state to the normal state.

  In the normal state and the expanded state described in detail above, at least the operation of the push button member 550 and the cover body 530 is permitted. On the other hand, it is possible to switch to a state in which the operation of the push button member 550 and the cover body 530 is disabled, ie, a reduction state in which the operation area is reduced more than in the normal state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22 (a) → FIG. 22 (e), a drive signal is output from the display control device 410 to the button stopper device 560 (see FIG. 23 (b)). The stopper piece 561 of the button stopper device 560 is disposed at the blocking position. Thereby, the pressing operation of the push button member 550 is restricted. In this state, both the pressing operation of the push button member 550 and the pressing operation of the cover 530 are restricted.

  Thereafter, when the output of the drive signal to the button stopper device 560 is stopped as the game progresses, the stopper piece 561 of the button stopper device 560 moves to the allowable position as shown in FIG. Returning, the operation restriction of the push button member 550 is released.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

  On the input side of the display control device 410 (specifically, the MPU 412), positions for the ball detection sensor 36 disposed in the front door side upper counter passage 35 of the frame 20 and the push button member 550 provided in the operation switch mechanism 502 Detection means are connected.

  Based on detection information from the ball detection sensor 36, it is possible to determine whether the upper tray 501 is full.

  The position detection means detects the detection sensor 557A which outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the display control device 410 when the push button member 550 exists at the maximum pressing position, and the push button member 550 exists at the initial position. And a detection sensor 557B that outputs predetermined detection information (detection signal) to the display control device 410 when it is set.

  Stopper devices 540 and 560 provided on the operation switch mechanism 502 are connected to the output side of the MPU 412. The stopper devices 540 and 560 operate in response to the drive signal output from the display control device 410.

  Next, among the various types of processing performed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410, various types of processing related to setting of the operation corresponding to the operation switch mechanism 502 will be described.

  First, command determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(Command judgment processing)
In the command determination process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a change start command is input. The various commands input from the audio lamp control device 143 are stored in a command storage area provided in the RAM 414, and are erased by being read out in the command determination process.

  If a change start command has been input, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the change start command includes information related to a continuous operation corresponding effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 included in the fluctuation start command is included in the information of the value group for continuous operation compatible effect stored in the ROM 413.

  When the information concerning the continuous operation corresponding presentation is included, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the upper tray 501 is full. Specifically, based on the detection information from the ball detection sensor 36, it is determined whether the upper tray 501 is full.

  If a negative determination is made in step S603, that is, if it is determined that the upper tray 501 is not full, in step S604, a specific process for the first continuous operation compatible effect is executed. In the specific process for the first continuous operation compatible effect, of the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414, the first continuous operation compatible effect flag is stored in the first continuous operation compatible effect flag storage area.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S603, that is, when it is determined that the upper tray 501 is full, in step S605, a specific process for the second continuous operation corresponding presentation is executed. In the specific process for the second continuous operation corresponding effect, the second continuous operation corresponding effect flag is stored in the second continuous operation corresponding effect flag storage area among the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the cover body 530 of the upper tray 501 is used as the operation means, it is not preferable that the pushing operation of the cover body 530 is hindered by the game balls stored in the upper tray 501. Therefore, in step S603, if the upper tray 501 is full, the first continuous operation corresponding presentation corresponding to the expansion of the operation area is not performed, that is, the second continuous operation corresponding as an alternative presentation By performing the effect, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  In the identification process of steps S604 and S605, the following process is executed along with storage of the continuous operation corresponding effect flag. That is, based on the random number generated by the MPU 412, the reference number determination table (refer to FIG. 16B) stored in the various table storage areas 421 of the ROM 413, and the presence or absence of the occurrence of the big hit Perform the process of determining the number of times. In this determination process, when the jackpot is won, the reference number of times is likely to be greater than when the jackpot is not won. The reference number of times is determined within a range that can be substantially achieved within the continuous operation corresponding rendering execution period, taking into consideration the return speed of the push button member to the standby position, the reading timing of the detection information, and the like.

  If it is determined in step S602 that the information regarding the continuous operation corresponding presentation is not included, or after the identification process of steps S604 and S605 is performed, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, a specific process for variable display is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S601 that the change start command is not input, the process proceeds to step S607, and after this other specific process is executed, the present command determination process is ended.

  The processes of steps S606 and S607 are the same as the processes of steps S306 and S307 in the first embodiment, and thus the description will be used.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, when the continuous operation corresponding effect is executed, the first continuous operation corresponding effect and the first continuous operation corresponding effect are performed depending on whether or not the upper plate 501 is full. Either of the two continuous operation corresponding effects is selected. As for both continuous operation compatible rendering, although performing a single-shot operation is common in that a specific one-shot operation thereafter is validated, the aspect of the continuous-shot operation → specific one-shot operation is different.

  Specifically, for the second continuous operation compatible effect, when the number of operations of the push button member 550 reaches the prescribed number of operations, the operation of the same push button member 550 is validated as a specific one-shot operation. On the other hand, with regard to the first continuous operation compatible effect, when the number of operations of the push button member 550 reaches the prescribed number of operations, the operation of the cover body 530 is validated as a specific one-shot operation. In other words, although there is no change in the operation area in the continuous operation → specific one-shot operation in the second continuous operation corresponding effect, the operation area is expanded in the continuous operation → specific one-shot operation in the first continuous operation corresponding effect It is different.

  The second continuous operation corresponding effect is the same as the continuous operation corresponding effect shown in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 19 and 20), so the description is omitted and the process for the first continuous operation corresponding effect is described. Do.

(Process for production for the first continuous operation)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 26, in the process for producing the first continuous operation, first, at step S701, it is determined whether or not the variable display cycle in which the first continuous production corresponding to the operation is generated. If the variable display cycle is not in progress, the process for the first continuous operation corresponding presentation is ended as it is. If the variable display cycle is in progress, the process proceeds to step S702.

  In step S702, it is determined whether the suggestion of the repeated operation has been performed. If it is determined in step S702 that the suggestion of the repetitive operation is not performed, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the suggestion of the continuous operation. When it is not the start timing of the suggestion of the continuous shooting operation, the processing for presentation effect corresponding to the continuous operation is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is the start timing of the suggestion of the continuous operation, in step S704, the setting processing of the continuous operation suggesting image is executed. In the subsequent step S505, setting processing for the continuous operation waiting state is executed.

  The processes of steps S702 to S705 are the same as the processes of steps S502 to S505 in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  If it is determined in step S702 that the continuous operation has been suggested, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not the continuous operation waiting state is set. If it is in the continuous shooting operation waiting state, the process advances to step S 707 to determine whether the push button member 550 of the operation switch mechanism 502 is operated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, processing for setting an operation acceptance image is performed in step S708, and the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, it is determined whether the number of repeated operations has reached the prescribed number of operations determined in the command determination process. If an affirmative determination is made in step S709, the process advances to step S710 to perform setting processing of the image for continuous operation completion.

  In addition, since each process of step S706-S710 is the same as each process of step S506-S510 shown in 1st Embodiment, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the subsequent step S711, processing for setting a specific one-shot operation suggestion image is executed. By performing such processing, a specific one-shot operation suggesting image for prompting the player to operate the push button member 550 of the operation switch mechanism 502 once is displayed on the display screen 94 a. For example, as the one-shot operation suggestion image, a moving image is displayed such that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and a character such as "Please operate the push button" is displayed. The suggestion of the specific one-shot operation is not limited to that in the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94, and is performed to output the sound from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that in the display screen. It is also good. In addition, about the image set by the setting process of the suggestion image for specific one-shot operation, the image for continuous operation completion is displayed at the timing after being displayed over a predetermined period.

  After the process of step S711 is performed, the process proceeds to step S712, in which it is determined whether or not the current variable display cycle is a variable display cycle corresponding to the big hit. When an affirmative determination is made in step S712, the process proceeds to step S713, and movement restriction release processing of the cover body 530 is performed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the cover stopper device 540 to switch the cover stopper device 540 to the permitted state. Thereby, the pressing operation of the cover body 530 is permitted, and the operation area is expanded from the push button member 550 to the push button member 550 + the cover body 530.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S712, that is, if it is determined that the current variable display cycle is a shift display cycle corresponding to deviating, the process proceeds to step S714. In step S714, movement restriction processing of the push button member 550 is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to the button stopper device 560 to switch the button stopper device 560 to the blocking state. Thereby, the pressing operation of the push button member 550 is restricted, and the operation area is reduced to no push button member 550.

  When driving processing of the stopper devices 540 and 560 is performed in steps S713 and S714, the stopper device 540 is displayed after the continuous operation completion image is displayed and the specific one-time operation suggestion image is displayed. The output timing of the drive signal is set so as to complete the state switching of.

  After the process of step S713 or step S714 is performed, the process proceeds to step S715, and the setting process of the specific one-shot operation waiting state is performed. Then, after the release process of the continuous operation waiting state is performed in the subsequent step S716, the process for the first continuous operation compatible effect is ended. The processes in steps S715 and S716 are the same as the processes in steps S511 and S515 in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S 707 and S 709, that is, if the continuous operation is not performed or if the number of times does not reach the operation prescribed number even if the continuous operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S 717. It progresses and it is determined whether it is the reception completion timing of a repetition operation. Specifically, with reference to the value of the continuous operation accepting period counter provided in the timing counter area 426 of the RAM 414, it is determined whether or not the acceptance end timing has come. A predetermined value is input when the setting process of the continuous operation waiting state is performed for the counter for the continuous operation accepting period, and the determination process of step S 707 is performed or updated (“1” is subtracted by one. ). Then, if this value becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S513, and if it does not become “0”, a negative determination is made.

  If the negative determination is made in step S717, the processing for the first consecutive operation corresponding to rendering is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S717, the process advances to step S718 to execute setting processing of an acceptance end suggestion image. As a result, an image indicating that the reception period of the continuous operation has ended is displayed on the display screen 94a. Thereafter, the release process of step S716 is performed, and the process for the first continuous operation corresponding to rendering is finished.

  Returning to the description of step S706 again, if a negative determination is made in step S706, that is, if it is determined not to be in the continuous operation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S719. In step S719, it is determined whether or not a specific one-shot operation waiting state is set. If it is in the state of waiting for the specific one-shot operation, the process proceeds to step S720. In step S720, it is determined whether the wait period has elapsed.

  The processes of steps S719 and S720 are the same as the processes of steps S516 and S517 of the continuous operation corresponding rendering process in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description will be omitted.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S720, that is, if it is determined that the wait period is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S721. In step S 721, it is determined whether or not the specific one-shot operation has been performed, that is, whether or not the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 has been operated, and the movement of the push button member 550 is restricted. Whether or not the operation waiting period has elapsed is determined. If it is determined that the specific one-shot operation has been performed, or if it is determined that the operation waiting period has elapsed in the reduction state, the process proceeds to step S722.

  The presence or absence of the specific one-shot operation is monitored in the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process in the MPU 412 as described above. In step S 721, when the process result of the monitoring process is the process result that the operation of the push button member 320 is generated (specifically, the operation flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 is operated If the presence flag is stored (YES), the process proceeds to step S722.

  In step S722, the release process of the specific one-shot operation waiting state is executed. Specifically, the specific one-shot operation waiting flag stored in the specific one-shot operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414 is erased.

  Thereafter, in step S723, processing for setting a result display image is performed. By executing the process of step S723, the result display image is displayed on the display screen 94a. As the display of the image, for example, when the variable display time is a variable display time that a big hit state occurs, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of a big hit state. If the variable display cycle is a variable display cycle in which no jackpot state occurs, a moving image is displayed such that the display content of the character is the same as that before the operation suggestive image is started.

  After the process of step S723 is performed, or when a negative determination is made in any of steps S719, S720, and S721, the process proceeds to step S724. In step S 724, it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display. If the negative determination is made in step S724, the processing for the first consecutive operation corresponding to rendering is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S724, that is, if it is the end timing of the variable display, the setting process of the end display image is executed in step S725, and the processing for the present first continuous operation compatible effect is ended. .

  In the setting process of the end display image in step S725, when the variable display time is the variable display time that the big hit state occurs, the display setting is performed so that the moving image display that the occurrence of the big hit state is decided is performed. . In this case, when the setting process of the result display image is being executed and the moving image display is set to correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot state in the setting process of the result display image, The setting of the moving image display is performed so as to be the moving image display and the series of contents. On the other hand, when the setting process of the operation uncompleted image is executed, the moving image display in which the operation uncompleted image is dramatically switched to the moving image display to the effect that the occurrence of the jackpot state is decided is interposed. .

  After the process of step S725 is performed, the process for returning the operation switch mechanism 502 to the normal state is performed in step S726, and the process for the first continuous operation compatible effect is ended. In the return processing of step S 725, the return flag is stored in the return flag storage area in the various flag storage area 425. In the timer interrupt process described above, when the return flag is stored, a process for returning the operation switch mechanism 502 to the normal state is performed. In the process for return, it is determined whether it is time after the game result is displayed, and if it is determined that it is the time after the game result is displayed, the following process is performed.

  First, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 557A, it is determined whether the push button member 550 and the cover body 530 have returned to the maximum projecting position. If it is determined that the push button member 320 and the cover body 530 have not returned to the maximum projecting position, the return processing is ended as it is. That is, when the player continues the pressing operation by putting his hand on the push button member 550 or the cover body 530, the return to the normal state is avoided.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the push button member 550 and the cover body 530 are returned to the maximum projecting position, the output of the drive signal to the stopper devices 540, 560 is stopped, and the button stopper device 560 is permitted. The stopper device 540 is put in the blocking state. Thereby, the pressing operation of the cover body 530 is restricted. After the output stop process of the drive signal is executed, the recovery flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 is erased, and the recovery process is ended.

  When the return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 425, the operation area expansion effect is restricted, and when the continuous operation corresponding effect is executed, the first continuous operation corresponding effect is replaced with the first. 2 Continuous operation corresponding presentation will be executed. However, when the game cycle in which the operation area expansion effect is performed is ended and the pressing operation is not performed again until the next game cycle is started, the next game cycle is started The recovery process is set to complete. Therefore, when the return processing is completed as it is after the game result is displayed, the operation area expansion effect is not restricted in the next game round.

  Here, the flow of the first continuous operation corresponding effect will be briefly described focusing on the difference from the continuous operation corresponding effect in the first embodiment.

  At a predetermined timing after the variable display of the symbol is started and the reach display is shifted, a message indicating a continuous shooting operation is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94. In accordance with this, the operation of the push button member 550 is validated. When the push button member 550 is repeatedly operated, the display modes of the operation acceptance number display unit 94b and the display screen 94a change in accordance with the number of operations. When the number of operations reaches the specified number of operations, an image prompting the specific one-shot operation is displayed on the display screen 94a. However, as the number of specified operations increases, the generation expectation of the jackpot becomes higher. The operation will be repeated expecting to be able to perform many operations.

  After the image prompting the specific one-shot operation is displayed, when the jackpot is won, the operation of the cover body 530 becomes possible, and when the jackpot is not won, the operation of the cover body 530 is considered impossible. Become. In these two cases, since there is no difference in appearance, the player can not determine whether or not the jackpot has been won until the cover body 530 is actually operated. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot has been won by the touch transmitted to the hand when the operation of the cover body 530 is attempted. When the specific one-shot operation is performed, or when the reception period of the specific one-shot operation has elapsed, the result is clearly displayed on the display screen 94a.

  Then, when the operation area is expanded, the return processing is executed on condition that the cover body 530 is returned to the position before the operation.

  In the second embodiment described above, the following effects can be expected in addition to the effects shown in the first embodiment. That is, the player can acquire the right to operate the specific one-shot operation (cover body 530) by performing the continuous operation. At this time, whether or not the specific one-shot operation is possible is suggested depending on how many times the repeated operation satisfies the specified number of times. As a result, the player's attention to the repetitive operation can be suitably improved.

  Furthermore, whether or not the cover body 530 is moved can not be determined until the cover body 530 is actually pushed because there is no difference in appearance. This can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the specific one-shot operation.

Third Embodiment
In the third embodiment, the operation mode of the operation switch unit and the operation corresponding rendering concerning the operation switch unit are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration of operation switch unit 40A in the present embodiment and the operation thereof will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 (a) is a schematic outside plan view of the operation switch unit 40A, FIG. 27 (b) is an outline diagram showing the internal structure of the operation switch unit 40A, FIG. Is a graph showing the relationship of

  In the following description, with respect to the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be used to simplify or omit the description of the same configuration, and differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the first embodiment, the solenoid 340 is employed as a drive means for the shutter member 330. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a stepping motor 340A is employed as a drive means for the shutter member 330 (see FIG. 27B). Similar to the solenoid 340, the stepping motor 340A is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and the number of rotations and the rotation angle are controlled by the number of pulses of the drive signal input from the display control device 410. ing. By thus controlling the number of rotations and the rotation angle, it becomes possible to stop the shutter member 330 at any position (intermediate position) from the initial position (closed position) to the maximum expanded position (open position). There is. That is, by adopting the stepping motor 340A as the driving means, the position of the shutter member 330 can be switched in stages not only at the two positions of the initial position and the maximum expansion position but also at many positions including both positions. It is possible.

  Further, the shutter member 330 is a portion where the player's hand can easily touch at the time of operation or the like, and there is a concern that the position may be shifted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the shutter detection sensor 355A is employed as means for monitoring whether or not the shutter member 330 exists at the initial position, and the shutter member 330 is returned to the initial position, the stepping motor A configuration is adopted in which the output of the drive signal is stopped based on the detection signal from the shutter detection sensor 355A after the start of the output of the return drive signal to 340A. As a result, the movement of the shutter member 330 becomes abnormal at the time of expansion of the operation area AE, and the occurrence of a failure in the rendering function is suppressed.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the effect applied to the operation switch unit is different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, when the effect corresponding to the continuous operation is performed, the operation area is expanded each time the operation is effectively received in a state where the next operation is possible. As a result, it is suggested to the player that the operation has been accepted effectively and that the next operation is permitted. In this way, it is possible to perform not only visual indication but also tactile indication to the player by providing the operation of the operation switch unit 40A with an indication function that the next operation is permitted or the like. It has become. By exhibiting the visual and auditory suggestion function by the operation switch unit 40A, it is possible to improve the suggestion function while suppressing complication of the configuration. In the following description, an effect in which the operation area AE is expanded for each operation will be referred to as "continuous expansion effect".

  As already introduced, a large number of open positions of the shutter member 330 are set in the operation switch unit 40A such that the expansion of the operation area AE is in multiple stages. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 27C, the first open position, the second open position to the eighth open position, and the ninth open position are set in the entire movement range between the initial position and the maximum open position. The shutter member 330 moves to the next open position (the open position on the side where the operation area is enlarged) by effectively receiving the operation by the player in a state where the next operation is possible. Thereby, the expansion of the above-described stepwise operation area AE is realized.

  By thus increasing the operation area AE, access to the push button member 320 can be made easier. As a result, when the continuous expansion effect is performed, it is difficult to cause an inconvenience such as an operation corresponding effect ending halfway (incompletely ending) by making a mistake in the operation in the middle of the repeated operation.

  The amount of movement of the shutter member 330 is larger than the amount of movement between each position in the ninth opening position to the maximum opening position so as to be constant between the initial position to the ninth opening position. Is set as. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make the amount of movement between all positions, that is, the amount of expansion the same.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, the operation surface 322 of the push button member 320 has a spherical shape that is convex upward, and the shutter 330 is brought into contact with the operation surface 322, and the shutter 330 is also used. The protrusion of is regulated. Therefore, the operating stroke of the push button member 320 is increased by the movement of the shutter member 330 to change the position of contact with the operation surface 322 when the operation area AE is expanded. In this way, the increase in the operation stroke amount lengthens the time required for one operation, and the degree of attention to each one operation in the continuous operation is reached by reaching the specified number of times by the continuous operation left to the momentum It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  In particular, the rate of increase of the stroke accompanying the movement of the shutter member 330 is not constant, but increases near the maximum open position (see FIG. 27C). This enables quick operation with a small number of operations, but can increase the independence of each operation when the number of operations increases.

  The stepwise expansion of the operation area AE, which has been described in detail above, is executed in response to continuous operation. When performing such an effect, the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 selects the specified number of operations, thereby determining how many stages the expansion of the operation area AE described above will be. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 28, the structure concerning selection of the number of regular operations is demonstrated. FIG. 28 (a) is a schematic view showing a table for selecting a prescribed number of operations, FIG. 28 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a relation between a fluctuation display time and an effect mode, and FIG. 28 (c) is suggested by the prescribed number of operations and effect It is the schematic which shows the relationship of the expectation degree of the big hit result done.

  First, selection of the prescribed operation number will be described with reference to FIG. When selecting the prescribed number of operations, the value of the prescribed number selection counter provided in the other various counter areas 428 (see FIG. 12) of the RAM 414 of the display control device 410 and the operation prescription shown in FIG. Refer to the frequency selection table. The counter for selecting the specified number of times is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time update is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the value is updated within the range of “0” to “99” by being updated by the periodic process executed by the display control device 410.

  The specified operation frequency selection table is stored in various table storage areas 421 of the ROM 413 of the display control device 410, and the specified operation frequency is set corresponding to the value of the specified frequency selection counter. The MPU 412 of the display control device 410 compares the value of the specified count selection counter with the specified operation count selection table stored in the various table storage area 421 of the ROM 413 of the display control device 410 to obtain the specified number of operation (see below). The term "only specified number of times" is selected from the range of "one time" to "10 times".

  Further, in the prescribed operation number selection table, the selection mode is different according to the result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the table referred to is different when the lottery result is a big hit result and when the lottery result is a lost result. In FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), these two tables are collectively displayed for the convenience of description.

  In the specified operation number selection table for the jackpot result, a relatively large number is easily selected as the specified number, and in the specified operation number selection table for the out result, a relatively small number is easily selected. That is, when the jackpot result is obtained, it is easy to select a larger number of times as the specified number of times as compared to the case where the jackpot result is obtained. For example, if the value of the specified number of times selection counter is "60", "9 times" is selected as the specified number of times if the jackpot result is reached, and if the value is out of the range, it is determined as the specified number of times "3 times" is selected.

  By selecting the specified number in this way, a correlation is generated between the specified number at the time of effect execution and the jackpot expectation of winning, and a large number is obtained by selecting a large number as the specified number. A configuration in which the degree of expectation is high is realized. This is to encourage the player to perform many operations in vain when the occurrence probability of the jackpot is low, thereby giving the player an image of being bothersome and reducing attention to the operation (the operation switch unit 40A). It is a device to suppress.

  In the present embodiment, the relationship between the jackpot expectation and the prescribed number of times is not in proportion to the jackpot, and a configuration is employed in which the rate of increase in the degree of expectation increases at a specific number of times. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27C, the prescribed number of times is “one time” to “five times”, “five times” to “eight times”, and “eight times” to “nine times”. The rate of increase in the degree of expectation differs between “9 times” and “10 times”. Therefore, the player performs the operation in anticipation of reaching the "sixth" or the "ninth" in which the increase rate is large, and it can be expected to suppress the randomization of each operation.

  In addition, as for the expectation of the jackpot winning, “the ninth” is the largest, and by reaching “the tenth,” the expectation slightly decreases. As a result, the player performs the operation while expecting the continuous operation to be completed in the “9th time”, that is, not expecting to reach the “10th time”, and a little in the process of the continuous operation. However, the game is switched from the game of performing the operation in anticipation that many operations are accepted to the game of performing the operations in anticipation that no more operations can be accepted. This makes it possible to preferably give the player a sense of tension even at the time of the “ninth operation”.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 (b) and 28 (c), the relationship between the continuous operation and the effect performed on the symbol display device 94 (display screen 94a) will be described.

  As described in the first embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation display time is determined by the second fluctuation type counter CS2. The fluctuation display time is roughly classified into a first fluctuation display time, a second fluctuation display time longer than the first fluctuation display time, and a third fluctuation display time longer than the second fluctuation display time. The first variation display time completely deviates, the second variation display time corresponds to reach display (more specifically, normal reach display), and the third variation display time corresponds to reach display (more specifically, super reach display). The super reach display is more likely to occur at the time of jackpot winning than the normal reach display. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production expectancy degree of jackpot becomes high by generating a super reach display.

  The execution condition is determined so that the operation-relevant effect is executed at least in the variable display times that become reach display, and the specified number of operations set to be “once” to “ten times” are performed. It is determined according to the fluctuation display time whether to end in the normal reach or to end to develop into the super reach when the operation is completed or the acceptance valid period of the operation is ended. That is, when the second change display time is selected as the change display time, the change display cycle ends without progressing to the super reach as it is normal reach, and the third change display time is selected as the change display time. In the case of normal reach, it will develop from super reach and the variable display times will end.

  In particular, when “10 times” is selected as the specified number of times, the effect mode is partially different from the case where “1 time” to “9 times” is selected. If the fluctuation display time is the second fluctuation display time, the operation area is expanded so as to be maximized on the condition that it is the jackpot result, and the jackpot establishment effect is executed from the normal reach, and the outlier result As a condition, the operation area is reduced so as to be minimized, and at the same time, the normal reach out is determined. On the other hand, when the change display time is the third change display time, the operation area is maintained as it is, and the process shifts to the super reach. That is, the game result is not notified immediately but is notified at the end of the variable display cycle.

(Process for continuous expansion effect)
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29, the continuous expansion effect processing as the operation-corresponding effect performed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 will be described. The continuous expansion rendering process is a process for executing an effect of expanding the operation area AE of the operation switch unit 40A based on the above-described repetitive operation, and is executed in a cycle of about 4 msec.

  In the continuous expansion effect process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the variable display cycle in which the continuous expansion effect occurs is being performed. If the variable display cycle is not in progress, the processing for the continuous expansion effect is ended as it is, and if the variable display cycle is in progress, the process proceeds to step S802.

  In step S802, it is determined whether the suggestion of the repetitive operation has been performed. If it is determined in step S802 that the suggestion of the continuous operation is not performed, the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the suggestion of the continuous operation. When it is not the start timing of the suggestion of the continuous shooting operation, the processing for presentation effect corresponding to the continuous operation is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is the start timing of the suggestion of the continuous operation, in step S804, the setting processing of the image for continuous operation suggestion is executed. For example, a character image of a girl is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a and a character such as "Shot a button continuously!" At the same time, the left, middle, and right symbols displayed at the center of the display screen 94a are reduced and displayed at the top of the display screen 94a.

  The suggestion of the repeated operation is not limited to the one on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, and may be performed on the sound output from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of the one on the display screen 94a. It is also good.

  In the subsequent step S805, setting processing of the continuous operation waiting state is executed. Specifically, the continuous operation waiting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 425 of the RAM 414 of the display control device 410, and the processing for continuous expansion effect is ended. .

  Incidentally, since each process of step S802 to step S805 is the same as each process of step S502 to S505 in the first embodiment, detailed description will be omitted.

  Returning to the description of step S802, if an affirmative determination is made in step S802, that is, if it is determined that the continuous operation is suggested, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, it is determined whether or not the continuous operation waiting state is set. If it is in the continuous shooting operation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S 807, and it is determined whether the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40 A is operated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the value of the continuous operation counter area (that is, the operation number counter) 427 is updated in the subsequent step S808. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the continuous operation counter area. After performing the process of step S808, the process proceeds to step S809 to determine whether the number of operations has reached the specified number selected in the command determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the prescribed number determined with reference to the prescribed operation number selection table and the value of the continuous operation counter area 427 are the same.

  If a negative determination is made in step S809, processing for setting an operation acceptance image is performed in step S810, and the process proceeds to step S811. Then, after the operation area expansion process is executed in step S811, the process for the continuous expansion effect is ended.

  In the operation area expansion process, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 340A of the operation switch unit 40A is started. By operating the stepping motor 340A based on this drive signal, the shutter member 330 moves toward the opening direction, more specifically, to the adjacent open position, whereby the operation area AE is expanded and the operation stroke S is increased.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S809, that is, if it is determined that the number of operations matches the specified number, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, a setting process of the image for continuous operation completion is performed. For example, characters such as “COMPLETE!” Are displayed as the image for continuous operation completion, instead of the character and the image for indicating the number of operations. Note that the indication of the continuous operation completion is not limited to the one on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, and may be made to output the sound from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of the one on the display screen 94a. May be

  After the process of step S812 is performed, the process proceeds to step S813, and the release process of the continuous operation waiting state is performed. Specifically, the continuous operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 of the RAM 414 of the display control device 410 is erased.

  In the following step S 814, it is determined whether or not the prescribed operation number is the maximum prescribed number (“10 times”). If a negative determination is made in step S814, the transition processing to the normal reach display is performed in step S815, and the processing for the continuous expansion effect is ended. By performing the process of step S815, when it is a variable display cycle corresponding to the normal reach, the state shifts from the state in which the continuous operation suggestive image is displayed to the state in which the normal reach display is performed. Specifically, in the case of the variable display times corresponding to the normal reach, the message of the operation completion displayed at the center of the display screen 94a is not displayed, and each of the reduction display is performed at the top of the display screen 94a. The symbol returns to the center of the display screen 94a. Moreover, when it is the fluctuation | variation display time corresponding to super reach, it transfers to the state in which the super reach display is performed from the state in which the image for continuous operation suggestion is displayed. Specifically, the message of the operation completion displayed at the center of the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the character image is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S814, the process proceeds to step S816, and after the special setting process for the maximum prescribed number of times is performed, the process for the continuous expansion effect is ended. Here, the special setting process for the maximum prescribed number of times will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Special setting process for maximum specified number of times)
In the special setting process for the maximum prescribed number of times, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the final operation by the player corresponds to the operation area expansion. Specifically, it is determined whether the main variation display time corresponds to the jackpot result and the second variation display time is selected as the variation display time. When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, operation area maximum expansion processing is executed in the subsequent step S902.

  In the operation area maximum expansion process, a process for moving the shutter member 330 waiting at the ninth open position to the maximum open position is performed. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 340A is started, and the output of the drive signal is stopped at the timing when the shutter member 330 reaches the maximum open position. In step S811, the position management of the shutter member 330 is performed (the movement amount is defined) according to the number of steps of the drive signal. However, in this step S902, the position management of the shutter member 330 is different.

  After the process of step S902, the process of setting the jackpot result precedent display image is executed in the subsequent step S903, and the special setting process for the maximum prescribed number of times is ended. In the setting process of the jackpot result preceding display image, the setting process of an image (for example, a message such as “Congratulations!”) Indicating that the jackpot has been won is performed. The image set in this process is displayed on the display screen 94a immediately after the shutter member 330 reaches the maximum open position.

  When the operation area is expanded, movement of the shutter member 330 in the opening direction is less likely to be impeded even if the player holds his hand on the push button member 320, so the shutter member 330 is fully opened. It is difficult for the inconvenience that the above-mentioned big hit result leading display image is not displayed without reaching the position. Incidentally, when the shutter member 330 does not reach the maximum open position, the display of the jackpot result leading display image is canceled, but even in this case, the movement of the shutter member 330 is visually or tactilely the player It is possible to know that the player has won the jackpot by communicating with the player. That is, the advance notification function of jackpot occurrence is secured.

  Returning to the description of step S901, if a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether the final operation corresponds to the reduction of the operation area AE. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the main variation display cycle corresponds to the deviation result and the second variation display time is selected as the variation display time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, an operation area reduction process is performed in the subsequent step S905. In the operation area reduction process, a process for moving the shutter member 330 waiting at the ninth open position to the initial position is performed. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 340A is started, and the output of the drive signal is stopped at the timing when the shutter member 330 reaches the initial position.

  After the process of step S 905 is performed, a setting process of the out-of-order precedent display image is performed in the subsequent step S 906, and the special setting process for the maximum prescribed number of times is ended. In the setting process of the out-of-order result leading display image, the setting process of an image (for example, a message such as “sorry ...”) indicating that the jackpot has not been won is performed. The image set in this process is displayed on the display screen 94a immediately after the shutter member 330 reaches the initial position.

  As described above, when the second fluctuation display time is selected as the fluctuation display time and the maximum prescribed number of times (“10 times”) is selected as the regulation operation number, the result of the main fluctuation display time is the fluctuation display Expressed immediately after the operation is completed without waiting for the end of the cycle.

  Returning to the description of step S904 again, when a negative determination is made in step S904, the transition processing to the normal reach display is performed in step S907, and the special setting processing for the maximum prescribed number of times is ended. The process in step S 907 is similar to the process in step S 815, but it is determined that the variable display time is the third variable display time when the negative determination is repeated in steps S 901 and S 904. Do. For this reason, the transition to the reach display does not shift to the normal reach, but shifts to the super reach.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 29, if a negative determination is made in step S807, that is, if it is determined that the operation of the operation switch unit 40A is not performed, the process proceeds to step S817. In step S817, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the effective period of the continuous operation set in step S805. If a negative determination is made in step S817, the processing for regular extension performance is ended.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S817, that is, if the continuous operation is not performed, or if the number of times does not reach the specified number even if the continuous operation is performed, the continuous operation is performed in subsequent step S818. Execute the release process of the waiting state. Specifically, the continuous operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 of the RAM 414 is erased. Then, after the setting process of the continuous operation uncompleted image is performed in step S819, the process for the main continuous expansion effect is performed, and the main continuous expansion effect process is ended.

  By executing the setting process of the continuous operation incomplete image, a message (for example, “INCOMPLETE!”) Indicating that the valid period has ended while the continuous operation is not completed is displayed on the display screen 94 a.

  Returning to the description of step S806, if a negative determination is made in step S806, the process proceeds to step S820. In step S820, it is determined whether it is the display end timing of the operation completion image or the operation uncompleted image. When an affirmative determination is made in step S820, the processing for displaying an image set in each processing of steps S815, S903, S906, and S907 is performed, and the continuous expansion effect is ended. By executing the process of step S821, a character image or the like is displayed on the display screen 94a in place of the operation completed / uncompleted message.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S820, the process proceeds to step S822, and it is determined whether it is time to end the variable display. If a negative determination is made in step S822, the processing for regular extension performance is ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S822, that is, if it is an end timing of the variable display, an end display image setting process is executed in step S823. In the process of step S823, when the variable display time is a variable display time in which a big hit state occurs, display setting is performed so that a moving image display to the effect that a big hit result is made. In this case, the process of setting the result display image is being performed, and the setting process of the result display image sets the moving image display to correspond to the jackpot winning (occurrence of the special gaming state) in the setting process of the result display image. If it is present, the setting of the moving image display is performed so as to become the moving image display and the series of contents. On the other hand, when the setting process of the operation incomplete image is executed, the moving image display which dramatically switches from the operation incomplete image to the moving image display to the effect that the occurrence of the special gaming state is decided is interposed. Become.

  After the process of step S823 is performed, the process proceeds to step S824, the process for returning the operation switch unit 40A to the normal state is performed, and the process for continuous expansion effect is completed. In the return process of step S823, the return flag is stored in the return flag storage area in the various flag storage area 425. In the timer interrupt process described above, when the return flag is stored, a process for returning the operation switch unit 40A to the normal state is performed. In the process for return, it is determined whether it is time after the game result is displayed, and if it is determined that it is the time after the game result is displayed, the following process is performed.

  First, based on detection information from the position detection sensor 557A, it is determined whether the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum projecting position. If it is determined that the push button member 320 has not returned to the maximum projecting position, the return processing is ended as it is. That is, when the player continues the pressing operation by putting his hand on the push button member 320 or the like, the return to the normal state is avoided.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the push button member 320 has returned to the maximum projecting position, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 340A is started, and the output of the drive signal is continued until the shutter member 330 returns to the initial position. Will be continued. As a result, the shutter member 330 returns to the initial position. When the return of the shutter member 330 to the initial position is completed, the output of the drive signal is stopped, the return flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 is erased, and the return processing is completed.

  Here, the effect contents (display contents) in the symbol display device 94 when the continuous expansion effect (operation corresponding effect) is executed and the state change of the operation switch unit 40A, while referring to the time charts of FIGS. 31 and 32. explain. The mode of state change of the operation switch unit 40A differs depending on whether the maximum prescribed number of times is selected as the prescribed number of times of operation and the case where the maximum prescribed number of times is not selected. Therefore, in the following description, first, the case where the maximum specified number of times is not selected as the specified number of times of operation will be described, and then the maximum specified number of times specified as the maximum specified number of times The case where the number of times is selected will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the variable display cycle corresponding to the continuous operation corresponding effect is started at the timing of td1, each symbol row which has been stopped and displayed on the display screen 94a starts the variable display. After that, first, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed, and then the right symbol row is stopped and displayed at the timing of td2. At this time, when the same symbol (the symbol "3" in FIG. 31) is stopped and displayed on the above-mentioned effective line, the normal change display is shifted to the reach display.

  In the example of FIG. 31, since the continuous expansion effect is executed, the reach symbol is reduced and displayed at the top of the display screen 94a at the timing of td3 after the reach display is started, and the girl is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. A character image imitating is displayed. At a timing immediately after that, a message (for example, “a button is continuously hit!”) Prompting a continuous hit of the push button member 320 is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 94a, and the operation of the operation switch unit 40A is activated.

  Thereafter, the pressing operation of the push button member 320 by the player is repeated within the effective period of the continuous shooting operation, whereby the operation acceptance number display image etc. appearing in the lower part of the display screen 94a instead of the message is changed. Specifically, the light emitting portion of the meter unit constituting the operation acceptance count display image increases in accordance with the operation count, and the character image resembling a girl displayed on the display screen 94a is made to surround the character. Is displayed, and as the number of operations increases, the effect is displayed so as to increase.

  Further, each time the player performs a pressing operation on the operation switch unit 40, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S in the operation switch unit 40 are enlarged. The expansion of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S not only suggests that the operation of the operation switch unit 40 has been effectively accepted, but also suggests that the next operation is permitted. In the present embodiment, as the number of operations from the suggestion of the repetitive operation to the completion of the operation increases, the expectation for winning the jackpot is set to be higher. For this reason, it is assumed that the player performs the operation while expecting to be able to perform the pressing operation more than once. Therefore, an improvement in the degree of attention to the reaction (movement) of the operation switch unit 40 after the pressing operation can be expected.

  In the example of FIG. 31, "seven times" is selected as the prescribed operation number. Therefore, for example, when the “fourth” operation is performed at the timing of td5, the next operation is permitted, and therefore, immediately after the operation is accepted at the timing of td5 (almost simultaneous timing) The operation area AE and the operation stroke S are enlarged at step S5. At this time, if the player holds his / her hand on the operation switch unit 40A (specifically, the push button member 320 and the shutter member 330), expansion of the operation area AE can be promoted to grasp through tactile sense.

  More specifically, when the indication of acceptance on the display screen 94a is compared with the indication of acceptance on the operation switch unit 40A, the latter is executed at a slightly earlier timing than the former. Furthermore, while the function to indicate that the operation has been effectively accepted is added to the display screen 94a, the function to indicate that the next operation is permitted is not added. By differentiating the two functions in this manner, the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 40A is further improved.

  When the number of operations by the repeated pressing operation reaches the preset predetermined number of operations at the timing of td6, an image indicating that the continuous operation has been completed is displayed on the display screen 94a immediately after the final operation. . Specifically, the character image displayed at the center of the display screen 94a and the operation acceptance count display image displayed at the bottom of the display screen 94a are not displayed, and instead a message indicating the completion of the operation (details) “COMPLETE!” Is displayed. In addition, since the pressing operation of the push button member 320 is invalidated at the timing of td6, the operation of the push button member 320 is not accepted until the pressing operation is validated again thereafter.

  At the timing td7 after the timing td6, the display effect corresponding to the operation result is executed on the display screen 94a, but the contents of the display effect change according to the fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation display cycle.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation display time corresponds to the second fluctuation display time, transition to normal reach display is made at the timing of td7. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the symbol that has been reduced and displayed at the top of the display screen 94a is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. At this time, on the condition that the continuous operation is completed, the display shifts to the normal reach display for high speed fluctuation. After that, the variation display of the middle symbol is stopped at the timing of td8, and either of the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit and the symbol combination corresponding to the disappointment is displayed according to the game result, the present variation display cycle ends Do.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation display time corresponds to the third fluctuation display time, the transition to the super reach display is made at the timing of td7. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the character image is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a in accordance with this. At this time, on the condition that the continuous operation is completed, a girl in transformation is displayed as a character image. After that, when the jackpot is won, the image of the girl who succeeded in transformation is enlarged at the timing of td 9 and the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot is not won In this case, the girl fails to change at the timing of td9, and the image returned to the original state is displayed, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the disconnection is stopped and displayed, and the variable display cycle ends.

  When the continuous operation is not completed during the effective period, that is, when the operation is not performed and when the operation is performed but the number does not reach the specified number, the operation completion time is displayed on the display screen 94a. Different display effects are performed.

  Specifically, an image indicating that the continuous shooting operation has not been completed is first displayed on the display screen 94a at the timing of tdX when the valid period has ended. Specifically, the character image displayed at the center of the display screen 94a and the operation acceptance count display image displayed at the bottom of the display screen 94a are not displayed, and instead a message indicating that the operation has not been completed (for example, “INCOMPLETE Is displayed.

  At the timing of tdY after the timing of tdX, different display effects are executed according to the fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation display cycle.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation display time corresponds to the second fluctuation display time, transition to normal reach display is made at the timing of tdY. More specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and each symbol reduced and displayed on the upper side of the display screen 94a is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. At this time, on the condition that the continuous operation is not completed, the display shifts to the normal reach display corresponding to the low speed fluctuation. Thereafter, the variation display of the middle symbol is stopped at the timing of td8, and either the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol combination corresponding to the disconnection is displayed according to the game result.

  The normal reach corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation and the normal reach corresponding to the low-speed fluctuation described above are also executed in the variable display cycle in which the continuous expansion effect is not performed. The probability of being selected at the time of jackpot winning is higher in the normal reach corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation than the normal reach corresponding to the low-speed fluctuation, and the probability of selection at the time of falling is set low. Therefore, the expectation for winning the jackpot when the effect occurs is higher in the normal reach for high-speed fluctuation. If continuous operation is completed, it shifts to normal reach for high-speed fluctuation, and if continuous operation is not completed, it shifts to normal reach for low-speed fluctuation, so that the operation is apparently apparent at the time of operation completion. In order to increase the degree of expectation of, differentiation is aimed to be performed so that the less frequent appearance is executed.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation display time corresponds to the third fluctuation display time, the transition to the super reach display is made at the timing of tdY. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the character image is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. At this time, since the continuous operation is not completed, a girl moving across the bag as a character image is displayed. After that, when the jackpot is won, an image where the girl encounters the fairy is displayed at the timing of td9. When the jackpot is not won, the image where the girl continues moving at the timing of td9 is displayed. It will be displayed.

  In addition, also about the super reach concerning the transformation of a girl mentioned above, and the super reach concerning movement of a girl, it is performed by the variable display time in which continuous expansion production is not performed. In addition, the probability of being selected at the time of jackpot winning is higher in the case of super reach concerning transformation than in the case of super reaching concerning movement, and the probability of being selected at the time of departure is set low. For this reason, the jackpot winning expectation degree when the staging occurs is higher in the super reach concerning transformation. If continuous operation is completed, transition to super reach for transformation is performed, and if continuous operation is not completed, transition to super reach for movement is configured, so that the operation completion is apparently apparent. Differentiation is being made so that the degree of expectation of

  When the variable display cycle ends at the timing of td8 or the timing of td9, the operation switch unit 40A is returned to the initial state. In the present embodiment, when the continuous operation corresponding effect (operation area expansion effect) is executed, the subsequent continuous variable display times are performed until the operation switch unit 40A returns to the initial state (the state before the expansion). Operation corresponding production will be restricted.

  Next, a case where the maximum prescribed number of times is selected as the prescribed operation number will be described.

  As shown in the timing chart of FIG. 32, when the variable display cycle in which the continuous operation corresponding presentation is executed is started at the timing of te1, each symbol row which has been stopped and displayed on the display screen 94a is changed. Start the display. After that, first, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed, and then the right symbol row is stopped and displayed at the timing of te2. At this time, when the same symbol (the symbol "3" in FIG. 31) is stopped and displayed on the above-mentioned effective line, the normal change display is shifted to the reach display.

  In the example of FIG. 32, since the continuous expansion effect is executed, the reach symbol is reduced and displayed at the top of the display screen 94a at the timing of te3 after the reach display is started, and the girl is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. A character image imitating is displayed. At a timing immediately after that, a message (for example, “a button is continuously hit!”) Prompting a continuous hit of the push button member 320 is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 94a, and the operation of the operation switch unit 40A is activated.

  Thereafter, the pressing operation of the push button member 320 by the player is repeated within the effective period of the continuous shooting operation, whereby the operation acceptance number display image etc. appearing in the lower part of the display screen 94a instead of the message is changed. Specifically, the light emitting portion of the meter constituting the operation acceptance count display image increases in accordance with the operation count, and the character image resembling a girl displayed on the display screen 94a is surrounded by the effect so as to surround the character. As the number of operations is increased, the effect is displayed so as to increase.

  Further, each time the operation is performed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S in the operation switch unit 40 become large. The increase of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S not only suggests that the operation has been effectively accepted, but also suggests that the next operation is permitted. In the present embodiment, as the number of operations from the suggestion of the repetitive operation to the completion of the operation increases, the expectation for winning the jackpot is set to be higher. For this reason, it is assumed that the player performs the operation while expecting to be able to perform the pressing operation more than once. As a result, the degree of attention to the reaction (movement) of the operation switch unit 40 after the pressing operation is improved.

  In addition, the aspect of advancing of the display effect etc. at the timing of te1 to te4 is the same as the aspect of the progress of the display effect etc. at the timing of the above td1 to td4.

  In the example of FIG. 32, the maximum number of times: “10 times” is selected as the operation prescribed number of times. For this reason, when the "fourth" operation is performed at the timing of te5, the next operation is permitted, and the operation area is performed immediately after the operation is received at the timing of te5 (almost simultaneously). AE and the operation stroke S are enlarged. At this time, if the player holds his / her hand on the operation switch unit 40A (specifically, the push button member 320 or the shutter member 330), the expansion of the operation area AE can be grasped tactilely.

  More specifically, when the indication of acceptance on the display screen 94a is compared with the indication of acceptance on the operation switch unit 40A, the latter is executed at a slightly earlier timing than the former. Furthermore, while the function to indicate that the operation has been effectively accepted is added to the display screen 94a, the function to indicate that the next operation is permitted is not added. Thus, the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 40A is further improved.

  After that, when the number of operations by the repeated pressing operation reaches the “eighth” number, the probability of winning a jackpot is maximized when the operation prescribed number becomes the “nineth” number, so the player performs the next operation. The operation is performed in anticipation that the expansion of the operation area AE by (the ninth time) does not occur, that is, the deformation of the operation switch unit 40A does not occur.

  In the example of FIG. 32, since the maximum number of times: “10 times” is selected as the operation prescribed number of times, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are expanded by the “9th operation”. Since the game result can be immediately indicated when the "10th" operation is performed, the player who wants to know the result quickly performs the "10th" operation and the player who wants to postpone the specification of the result It is assumed that the "10th" operation is not performed.

  When the “tenth operation” is performed at the timing of te6, an image indicating that the continuous operation has been completed is displayed on the display screen 94a immediately after the operation. Specifically, the character image displayed at the center of the display screen 94a and the operation acceptance count display image displayed at the bottom of the display screen 94a are not displayed, and instead a message indicating the completion of the operation (details) “COMPLETE!” Is displayed. In addition, since the pressing operation of the push button member 320 is invalidated at the timing of te6, the operation of the push button member 320 is not accepted until the pressing operation is validated again thereafter.

  At the timing of te7 after the timing of te6, an effect corresponding to the operation result is executed, but the content of the effect changes according to the fluctuation display time of the present fluctuation display cycle.

  Specifically, in the case where the fluctuation display time of this fluctuation display cycle corresponds to the second fluctuation display time, the current game result is clearly indicated at the timing of te7. That is, if it is a variable display cycle corresponding to the jackpot result, a message (for example, “Congratulations!”) Indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the display screen 94a, and a variable display cycle corresponding to the outlier is displayed. In the display screen 94a, a message (for example, "Sorry ...") indicating that the jackpot has not been won is displayed.

  Also, slightly ahead of the timing of te7, the operation area AE is changed, that is, the operation switch unit 40A is deformed. Specifically, the operation area AE is expanded so as to be maximized when it is the variable display number corresponding to the jackpot result, and the operation area AE is minimized when it is the variable display number corresponding to the deviation result. To be reduced. That is, by putting a hand on the operation switch unit 40A, the game result is tactilely notified. Thereby, it is possible to urge the player to pay attention to the operation switch unit 40A and the movement thereof.

  At the timing of te8 after the game result is clearly indicated, the message is not displayed, and the symbol which has been reduced and displayed at the top of the display screen 94a is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. Then, the variation display of the middle symbol is stopped, and either of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot and the symbol combination corresponding to the disconnection is displayed according to the game result, and the present variation display cycle ends.

  It is configured to perform an immediate notification of the above result when the second fluctuation display time set relatively short among the second fluctuation display time and the third fluctuation display time corresponding to the reach display. Thus, it is avoided that the period from the notification timing to the end timing of the variable display cycle becomes excessively long. This is because, for example, the message corresponding to the out-of-place result may be displayed for an excessively long period, and may cause the player to feel uncomfortable if the transition to the next variable display cycle is not made. This is a device for suppressing the occurrence of such inconvenience.

  In addition, when the number of operations reaches the maximum specified number, the waiting period until the start of the next variable display cycle after the notification period or the notification is extended by performing the prior notification before the end of the variable display cycle. Can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation display time corresponds to the third fluctuation display time, the transition to the super reach display is made at the timing of te7. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the character image is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a in accordance with this. At this time, on the condition that the continuous operation is completed, a girl in transformation is displayed as a character image. After that, when the jackpot is won, the image that the girl succeeded in transformation and enlarged at the timing of te 9 is displayed and the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot is not won In this case, the girl fails to change at the timing of te 9 and the image returned to the original state is displayed, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the disconnection is stopped and displayed, and the variable display cycle ends.

  Here, in the variable display cycle corresponding to the second variable display time, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are expanded or reduced by the operation switch unit 40A being deformed with the completion of the operation, but the third variable display time There is no change in the operation area AE for the operation at the variable display times corresponding to. That is, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are maintained as they are.

  At the time when the player is performing the multi-shot operation, from the flow of the game etc. after the start of the variable display cycle, the current variable display cycle corresponds to any of the second variable display time and the third variable display time. It can not be determined. Therefore, when performing the "tenth operation", as a result, it can be grasped which of expansion (big hit confirmation), reduction (outlier confirmation), and current status maintenance (result notification pending). Can not. Therefore, the operation is performed while expecting that the reaction to the operation is the expansion or the maintenance of the current state, and the attention to the operation switch unit 40A can be suitably enhanced.

  When the continuous operation is not completed during the effective period, that is, when the operation is not performed and when the operation is performed but the number does not reach the specified number, the operation completion time is displayed on the display screen 94a. Different display effects are performed.

  Specifically, first, at the timing of teX at which the effective period ends, an image indicating that the continuous shooting operation has not been completed is displayed on the display screen 94a. Specifically, the character image displayed at the center of the display screen 94a and the operation acceptance count display image displayed at the bottom of the display screen 94a are not displayed, and instead a message indicating that the operation has not been completed (for example, “INCOMPLETE Is displayed.

  At the timing of teY after the timing of teX, different effects are executed according to the fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation display times.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation display time corresponds to the second fluctuation display time, the transition to the normal reach display is made at the timing of teY. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the symbol displayed in a reduced size at the upper part of the display screen 94a is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. At this time, on the condition that the continuous operation is not completed, the display shifts to the normal reach display corresponding to the low speed fluctuation. After that, the variation display of the middle symbol is stopped at the timing of te8, and either the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol combination corresponding to the disconnection is displayed according to the game result.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation display time of the main fluctuation display time corresponds to the third fluctuation display time, transition to the super reach display is made at the timing of teY. Specifically, the message displayed on the display screen 94a is not displayed, and the character image is displayed at the center of the display screen 94a. At this time, since the continuous operation is not completed, a girl moving across the bag as a character image is displayed. After that, when the jackpot is won, the image that the girl encounters the fairy is displayed at the timing of te 9 and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the display screen 94a, and the jackpot is not won In this case, an image in which the girl continues moving is displayed at the timing of te9, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the disconnection is displayed.

  When the variable display cycle ends at the timing of te8 or the timing of te9, the operation switch unit 40A is returned to the initial state. In the present embodiment, when the continuous operation corresponding effect (operation area expansion effect) is executed, the subsequent continuous variable display times are performed until the operation switch unit 40A returns to the initial state (the state before the expansion). Operation corresponding production will be restricted.

  According to the third embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a configuration is employed in which the portion of the operation switch unit 40A exposed to the player side (upper side) is deformed according to the game situation. Thus, by changing the operation switch unit 40A, the change of the operation switch unit 40A is visually and tactilely suggested to the player, and the player's attention to the operation switch unit 40A is improved. Can contribute.

  In the continuous expansion effect, a configuration is employed in which the above-described deformation of the operation switch unit 40A occurs by the operation of the player. Thus, by setting the operation of the player as a trigger for deformation, it is possible to urge the player to actively participate in the operation corresponding to the operation switch unit 40A.

  Depending on the player, a game may be played with the hand on the operation switch unit 40A (for example, the push button member 320) so that the operation can be performed immediately when the operation is suggested. In such a configuration, it is feared that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp even if the operation switch unit 40A is made to emit light. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the operation switch unit 40A "deforms", it is possible to transmit the change in appearance to the player not only as a visual change but also as a tactile change. This makes it difficult for the player to miss the change of the operation switch unit 40A.

  Furthermore, the deformation of the operation switch unit 40A is started at the timing when the push button member 320 reaches the maximum pressing position, that is, the operation detection position. As a result, compared to, for example, a configuration in which the deformation is started after returning to the position before the operation, the player has more chances of touching the player's hands during the deformation, and suggests the player the fact that the deformation is occurring. It can be exhibited more suitably.

  When the operation switch unit 40A is deformed, the shutter member 330 moves in the opening direction, and the operation area AE is expanded. In such a configuration, when the movement of the shutter member 330 is obstructed by the player's hand or the like, it may be difficult to exhibit the rendering function provided to the operation switch unit 40A. In particular, such a disadvantage may be noticeable when the operation switch unit 40A is deformed at a timing when the user has many chances of touching the operation switch unit 40A as described above. In this respect, in the present embodiment, when the shutter member 330 moves to the side where the operation area AE is expanded at the time of deformation, for example, as compared with the case where the shutter member 330 moves to the side where the operation area AE reduces. The movement of the shutter member 330 can be prevented from being disturbed by the hand. Thereby, the rendering function provided to the operation switch unit 40A can be suitably exhibited.

  Further, in the continuous expansion effect, the operation switch unit 40A is deformed based on the operation of the player to indicate that the next operation is permitted. In the continuous expansion effect, there is a correlation between the number of times of operation and the degree of expectation that has won the jackpot, and the number of times of operation is set so that the degree of expectation of having won the big jack is increased. Therefore, it is considered that the player performs the operation in anticipation that as many operations as possible are effective, that is, in anticipation that the next operation is permitted. Thus, the degree of attention to the deformation of the operation switch unit 40A can be suitably improved.

  In particular, when the largest number ("10 times") is selected as the prescribed number of times of operation, the expectation for winning the jackpot is the largest in the immediately preceding number ("9 times") It was set up. Thus, the player performs the operation while expecting the operation switch unit 40A to be deformed when the number of operations is "eight times" or less, while the operation switch unit 40A performs the "ninth" operation. It is assumed that the operation is performed while expecting that it does not deform. As a result, a game in which the operation is performed while expecting deformation of the operation switch unit 40A and a game in which the operation is performed while expecting that the deformation of the operation switch unit 40A does not occur are realized, and a series of continuous operations are performed. It can be suppressed that the effect becomes monotonous.

  In addition, when the "tenth" operation is performed, the game result is notified in advance (explicitly) based on the operation before the variable display time is completed, thereby providing attention to the final operation. You can improve the degree to the hand.

  However, when giving an advance notification of the game result in this way, it is a factor giving annoyance to the player that the period from the advance notification to the end of the variable display cycle becomes excessively long. It can be Such inconveniences are expected to be particularly noticeable in the case of prior notification of outliers. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prior notification is performed in the variable display cycle corresponding to the second variable display time in which the variable display period is set relatively short, and the third in which the variable display time is set relatively long By adopting a configuration in which the prior notification is not performed in the variable display cycle corresponding to the variable display time, it is avoided that the period from the prior notification to the end of the variable display cycle is extended, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience I

  In the operation switch unit 40A, the operation stroke S is expanded in accordance with the expansion of the operation area AE. Depending on how the hand is attached to the operation switch unit 40A, the outer edge of the operation area AE may not be touched, and the expansion of the operation area AE may not be grasped by touch. On the other hand, when the pressing operation is performed, it is necessary to touch the push button member 320 without fail. Here, not only the operation area AE but also a configuration in which the operation stroke S is expanded makes it easy to transmit tactile changes of the operation switch unit 40A to the player, and the hand to the operation switch unit 40A It is difficult to cause inconvenience that the suggestion function does not work well depending on the method of addition (method of operation).

  In particular, with regard to the push button member 320 of the operation switch unit 40A, as the operation stroke S increases, the amount of protrusion to the side (upward) opposite to the operation direction increases. This makes it easy to show the player a visual change as well as a tactile change based on the expansion of the operation stroke S, as compared with the case where the operation stroke S is expanded to the front side in the operation direction. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to more easily convey to the player the fact that the operation switch unit 40A is deformed.

  The amount of increase of the operation stroke S is set to increase as the number of operations increases. This is a device for making the above-mentioned change clearer in a state where the degree of expectation is increased.

Fourth Embodiment
In the third embodiment, when the continuous expansion effect is being executed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S based on the operation at least until the preset number of times of operation (except “10 times”) is reached. In the present embodiment, the function of temporarily stopping the expansion of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S is added. Hereinafter, a configuration for temporarily stopping the expansion of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S will be described based on FIG. FIG. 33 (a) is a diagram showing an expansion effect skip setting table, and FIG. 33 (b) is a graph showing the relationship between the number of operations and the operation area AE and the operation stroke S.

  In the following description, descriptions of matters common to the third embodiment will be omitted or simplified, and differences between the present embodiment and the third embodiment will be mainly described.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the continuous expansion effect is to be performed by the display control device 410, reactions to some operations during the continuous expansion effect are performed, that is, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S. It is determined whether or not the effect of restricting the enlargement of (hereinafter simply referred to as "skip") is to be performed. When the player reaches the preset number of times when the player repeats the pressing operation, the effect is expansion of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S even if the next operation is permitted. In the following description, it is also referred to simply as "skip effect".

  With regard to the skip determination / nonpermission determination of the skip effect and the skip mode in the case of performing the same skip effect, the skip setting table for expansion effect provided in the ROM 413 (specifically, various table storage areas 421) of the display control device 410 The value of the skip lottery counter provided in the counter area 428 is referred to.

  The skip lottery counter is updated every time periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is executed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 (more specifically, “1” is added to the previous value), and the value reaches the maximum value. It is a loop counter that returns to "0" later. Specifically, the value is updated in the range of “0” to “19”.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the skip setting table for expansion effect refers to the total number of operations that can be executed in the continuous expansion effect by referring to the specified number of operations, the presence or absence of jackpot winning and the value of the skip lottery counter. The configuration is such that it is determined which one of them is to be skipped.

  Specifically, the skip effect is avoided when the operation prescribed number of times is “1 time” to “6 times”, and the skip lottery counter is referred to when the operation prescribed number of times is “7 times” to “10 times”. Whether or not to perform the skip effect is determined, and further, in the case of performing the skip effect, the target range is determined. In the present embodiment, the first operation (the “first” operation) and the last operation (the predetermined operation number of operations) are excluded from the range to be skipped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33 (b), the aspect of the skip will be described. FIG. 33 (b) exemplifies a case where “eight times” is selected as the specified number of operations and the “sixth” operation is a target of skipping.

  When the continuous expansion effect is executed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are on condition that the next operation is permitted every time the operation is performed until the number of operations to be skipped is reached. It is expanded. In the example of FIG. 33B, in the “first” to “fifth” operations not to be skipped, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are enlarged for each operation. Then, when the "sixth" operation which is the target of the skip is performed, it is normally accepted as the "sixth" operation inside the gaming machine and the next operation is permitted, so that it is normal. If this is the case, although the expansion of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S occurs, the expansion of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S does not actually occur. Therefore, when the “sixth operation” is performed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are maintained in the state before the operation.

  Subsequently, when the “seventh” operation is performed, the “seventh” operation is not a target of the skip, so the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are enlarged again. This suggests that the "eighth" operation is permitted. When the "seventh operation" is performed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are expanded by adding a portion that should originally be expanded by the "sixth operation" to expand by the operation. Therefore, the change becomes noticeable.

(Setting process for continuous expansion effect)
Here, setting processing for continuous expansion effect performed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The setting process for the continuous expansion effect is a process executed in the command determination process in the MPU 412 of the display control device 410.

  In the setting process for the continuous expansion effect, first, in step S1001, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the continuous expansion effect. Specifically, when the second change display time or the third change display time is selected as the change display time, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the continuous expansion effect is to be performed. As a result of the lottery, when it is determined that it is not the variable display cycle corresponding to the continuous expansion effect, the setting process for the continuous expansion effect is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if an execution lottery for continuous expansion effect is won, the process proceeds to step S1002.

  In step S1002, a predetermined operation number setting process is performed. Specifically, the prescribed operation frequency is set with reference to the prescribed operation frequency selection table shown in FIG. 28A and the value of the prescribed frequency selection counter. In this case, depending on whether it is a jackpot result or an outlier result, a bias occurs in the number of selected operations selected. Specifically, in the case of the out result, the smaller number of times such as “1 time” or “2 times” is easily selected as the prescribed operation number, and in the case of the jackpot result “8 times” as the prescribed operation number. , "9 times", etc. are easy to be selected.

  After setting of the prescribed number of operations has been completed in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether the predetermined number of operations set in step S1002 is "seven times" to "ten times". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1004.

  In step S1004, a lottery process for skipping is executed. In the lottery process for skipping, whether to skip or not is to be skipped, with reference to the extended effect skip setting table shown in FIG. 33A and the value of the skip lottery counter. Determine the range.

  After the process of step S1004 is performed or when a negative determination is made in step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1005, and after the continuous expansion effect mode setting process is performed, the setting process for the main continuous effect is ended.

  In the continuous expansion effect mode setting process, various information such as the specified number of operations, the presence or absence of skip, the range in which the skip occurs, and the like are information referred to in the process of continuous expansion effect. It is stored in the counter area 428. The stored various information is referred to at the time of the processing for continuous expansion effect and the like, and is deleted at the end of the continuous expansion effect.

(Operation area expansion processing)
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34B, the operation area expansion process executed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 will be described. The operation area expansion process is a process executed as part of the continuous expansion effect process (see S811 in FIG. 29).

  In the operation area expansion processing, it is first determined in step S1101 whether the current operation is a skip target operation. Specifically, the skip flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 of the RAM 414 is referred to to grasp which operation cycle the skip should be generated, and then, whether or not the current operation falls under that. judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, an expansion amount carry over process is executed in the subsequent step S1102, and the operation area expansion process is ended as it is. As a result, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 340A is avoided, and the state before the main operation is performed is maintained as it is for the operation area AE and the operation stroke S.

  In the extension amount carry-over process, the drive output when the next operation is performed on the condition that the next operation is not equal to the prescribed operation number, that is, the last operation in the continuous expansion staging is not performed Execute signal addition processing. As a result, when the next operation is performed, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are expanded at once including the skipped amount.

  As described above, by adding the skip amount to the increase amount of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S, the change of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S is made more remarkable. For this reason, when giving the player an impression as if it had returned to a pseudo-operable state, it is possible to suppress such a change from being missed by enhancing its impact.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, that is, if it is determined to be a skip target operation cycle, the process advances to step S1103 to determine whether the current operation is an operation immediately after the skip.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, the process advances to step S1104 to execute drive signal output processing compatible with skip. In this process, the output period of the drive signal is corrected by adding the amount added in the operation time which has been the skip target to the output period (that is, the number of pulses) of the drive signal. By outputting the drive signal corrected (added or added) in this manner, the operation area AE and the operation stroke S are expanded at a stretch as described above (see FIG. 33B).

  On the other hand, when negative determination is carried out in step S1103, it progresses to step S1105. In step S1105, drive signal output processing not compatible with skip is executed. In this process, since the drive signal corresponding to the current operation is output, the amount of increase of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S becomes smaller as compared with the case where the process of step S1104 is performed.

  After the processes of step S1104 and step S1105 are performed, the operation area expansion process is ended.

  Next, the display effect to be executed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94 at the time of the main skip effect will be described. When the skip effect is executed, the suggestion effect for reception on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94 is avoided. That is, the process of step S810 is invalidated.

  As described above, when the number of operations reaches the specified number of operations, the operation completed image is displayed with a slight delay. As described above, avoiding the suggestion effects for acceptance is a device for giving the player an impression as if the specified number of operations have been reached by this operation, though temporarily. Such a configuration is adopted. So, it is difficult to instantly judge whether it is a skip effect or an operation completion.

  In the continuous expansion effect, a relatively small number of times is likely to be selected as the specified number of times of operation when there is an out result. For this reason, when continuous expansion rendering is performed, there is a high possibility that the prescribed number of operations will be reached immediately with a small number of operations. For this reason, there is room for further improvement in order to motivate the player to operate.

  In the present embodiment, even when the prescribed number of operations has been reached, the display screen 94a does not immediately notify that the operation has been completed, but the operation completion is notified from the operation completion. A short period of time (eg 3 seconds) occurs. Here, if the skip effect shown in the present embodiment is adopted, the case where the operation is completed and the case where the skip effect is performed are considered as cases where the enlargement of the operation area AE and the operation stroke S is not performed. It will exist. Therefore, it is considered that the player performs the operation in anticipation that the operation will be possible again even if the operation is completed. As described above, when the continuous expansion effect is set, attention to the operation switch unit 40A and the operation thereof can be further suitably improved.

Fifth Embodiment
In the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the operation switch unit 40 is deformed in accordance with the game situation. Also in this embodiment, a configuration in which the operation switch unit is deformed in accordance with the game situation is employed as in the first embodiment, but the configuration and the aspect of the deformation pertaining to the first embodiment Are different. Hereinafter, operation switch unit 600 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 (a) is a schematic view of the operation switch unit 600 as viewed from above, and FIG. 35 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of FIG. 35 (a).

  First, the basic configuration of the operation switch unit 600 will be described. As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the arrangement target of the operation switch unit 600 in the present embodiment is the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14 as in the first embodiment. A housing portion 28 c for housing the operation switch unit 600 is formed at the central portion of the upper bulging portion 28, and a part of the operation portion 601 of the operation switch unit 600 housed in the housing portion 28 c is an upper bulging. It is in a state of being exposed upward through a substantially circular opening 28 e formed in the upper surface 28 d of the protrusion 28.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the operation switch unit 600 is composed of the operation portion 601 and the holder portion 602 which holds the operation portion 601 movably, and the holder portion 602 is of the upper bulging portion 28. The operation switch unit 600 and the upper bulging portion 28 are integrated by being fixed to the upper surface portion 28 d and the like from the lower side.

  The operation unit 601 has operation members 610 and 620 which can be operated by the player directly touching and a base portion 630 which constitutes a mounting portion of the operation members 610 and 620. The base portion 630 is formed with a substantially hemispherical pedestal portion 631 formed so that the end face is directed upward, and the operation members 610 and 620 are assembled to the pedestal portion 631. The pedestal portion 631 is formed with a cylindrical portion 635 projecting on the side opposite to the side on which the operation members 610 and 620 are attached, that is, on the opposite side to the opening 28 e side of the upper bulging portion 28. On the other hand, the holder portion 602 is formed with an insertion portion 651 through which the cylindrical portion 635 is inserted.

  The insertion portion 651 is configured such that the inner surface is in contact with the outer surface of the cylindrical portion 635, and vertical movement of the cylindrical portion 635 along the insertion portion 651 is permitted. That is, the moving direction of the operation unit 601 is defined so as to increase or decrease the amount of protrusion of the operation unit 601 from the opening 28 e. Although an encircling section 652 is formed in the holder section 602 so as to surround the pedestal section 631 from the side, movement of the operation section 601 is permitted between the pedestal section 631 and the encircling section 652 A moving space is secured.

  A spring member 636 as biasing means is incorporated in the cylindrical portion 635, and the operation portion 601 is biased by the spring member 636 toward the side (upper side) projecting from the opening 28e. An opening flange 28 f is formed on the upper surface portion 28 d of the upper side bulging portion 28 so as to project downward from the opening 28 e. The upper end portion of the base portion 630 (specifically, the pedestal portion 631) abuts on the top end portion of the opening flange 28f from the lower side, thereby restricting further upward displacement. That is, the function as a stopper is given to the opening flange 28f, and the maximum projecting position of the operation portion 601 from the opening 28e is defined by the opening flange 28f.

  When the operation portion 601 is pressed downward, the operation portion 601 is moved downward against the biasing force of the spring member 636. Then, when the base portion 630 abuts on the surrounding portion 652 from above, further movement is restricted. As described above, the position at which the base portion 630 and the surrounding portion 652 vertically contact with each other is the maximum pressing position of the operation portion 601.

  The operation switch unit 600 is provided with a detection sensor 648 for detecting that the operation unit 601 is at the maximum projecting position, and a detection sensor 649 for detecting that the operation unit 601 is at the maximum pressing position. The detection sensors 648 and 649 are electrically connected to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 can grasp at which position the operation unit 601 exists based on detection signals (detection information) from the detection sensors 648 and 649.

  One of the features of the operation switch unit 600 according to the present embodiment is that a mechanism for deforming the operation switch unit 600 according to the game situation is adopted as described above. Therefore, the configuration according to the modification will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, an operation member 610 made of a resin material such as easily deformable rubber is fixed to the end face of the base portion 630. As shown in FIG. The operation member 610 has a substantially hemispherical shape like the pedestal 631. The virtual spherical surface G is formed by integrating the operation member 610 and the pedestal 631.

  The operation member 610 has transparency, and whether light from the light emitter 634 such as an LED embedded in the end face of the base portion 630 passes through the operation member 610 is as if the operation member 610 emits light It is possible to make it look like. A plurality of hemispherical recesses are formed on the surface of the operation member 610, and the light from the light emitter 634 described above is diffused by passing through the recesses.

  An operation member 620 which forms an outer shell of the operation portion 601 is provided outside the operation member 610, and the operation member 610 is covered by the operation member 620 from the upper side. Hereinafter, for convenience of description, the operation member 610 will be referred to as the “inner operation member 610” and the operation member 620 will be referred to as the “outer operation member 620”.

  The outer operation member 620 is a pair of left and right, and by combining them, it is configured to form a bowl shape along a virtual spherical surface G composed of the inner operation member 610 and the pedestal portion 631.

  The outer operation member 620 is provided with a shielding function for shielding light, and when the inner operation member 610 is covered by the outer operation member 620, the light from the light emitter 634 is out of the operation portion 601. It will not be injected. Further, the outer operation member 620 is formed of a resin material harder than the inner operation member 610, and the surface thereof has a smooth curved surface without unevenness. Thus, the touch differs between when the inner operation member 610 is touched and when the outer operation member 620 is touched.

  Here, the configuration of the base unit 630 will be supplementarily described. The base portion 630 has a substantially hemispherical inner base member 630X and a substantially bowl-shaped outer base member 630Y, and the inner base member 630X is integrated with the outer base member 630Y. There is. Here, a gap portion 632 opened upward is formed between the inner base member 630X and the outer base member 630Y, and the lower end portion of the outer operation member 620 is inserted into the gap portion 632 There is.

  The size of the gap portion 632 is set to be equal to the thickness dimension of the outer operation member 620, and the gap portion 632 secures a movable space of the outer operation member 620. In other words, the radial movement of the base portion 630 of the outer operation member 620 is restricted by the gap portion 632, and the movement path of the outer operation member 620 is determined.

  In the base portion 630, a drive for moving the outer operation member 620 between a closed position where the exposure of the inner operation member 610 is restricted by covering the inner operation member 610 and an open position where the exposure of the inner operation member 610 is allowed. A mechanism is provided. The drive mechanism includes a stepping motor 641 as a drive unit, and a pinion 642 as transmission means for transmitting the power from the stepping motor 641 to the outer operation member 620. On the other hand, on the inner surface of the outer operation member 620, a rack portion 621 having a plurality of teeth and engaged with the pinion 642 is formed.

  The stepping motor 641 is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and operates based on a drive signal input from the display control device 410. When the stepping motor 641 rotates and power is transmitted from the pinion 642 to the rack portion 621, the outer operation member 620 moves from the closed position to the open position.

  Further, the pedestal portion 631 is provided with a stopper piece 645 that abuts against the outer operation member 620 from the open position side (lower side) when the outer operation member 620 stands by at the closed position. The stopper piece 645 is provided movably between a blocking position projecting to a position overlapping the movement path of the outer operation member 620 to block the movement of the outer operation member 620 and an allowance position allowing movement of the outer operation member 620. And is always biased to the contact position by a biasing member (not shown). By waiting at the blocking position by the biasing force of the biasing member, the movement of the outer operating member 620 to the open position is blocked.

  Further, the stopper piece 645 is connected to a movable shaft of a solenoid 646 electrically connected to the display control device 410. The solenoid 646 receives the drive signal from the display control device 410 and moves the stopper piece 645 from the blocking position to the permitting position against the biasing force of the biasing member. Therefore, the stopper piece 645 is maintained at the allowable position at least while the drive signal is being output, and the movement of the outer operation member 620 to the open position is permitted.

  Here, a modification of the operation switch unit 600 will be described with reference to the schematic view of FIG.

  The operation switch unit 600 is in a normal state in which the exposure of the inner operation member 610 is avoided by the outer operation member 620 (see FIG. 36A). When the display controller 410 outputs a drive signal to the solenoid 646, the stopper 645 moves from the blocking position to the permitting position. Thereby, the movement from the closed position of the outer operation member 620 is permitted. After the movement restriction is released in this manner, a drive signal is input to the stepping motor 641 so that the outer operation member 620 passes between the inner operation member 610 and the opening flange 28f to form a gap. Move to the far side of 632

  In the present embodiment, the outer operation members 620 are disposed in a left-right pair, and both outer operation members 620 rotate in opposite directions by the operation of the stepping motor 641. Specifically, the left outer operation member 620 pivots counterclockwise around the central portion of the base portion 630 (specifically, a hemispherical portion), and the right outer operation member 620 rotates the central portion of the base portion 630. Rotate clockwise as the center. Focusing on such movement, it can be said that the outer operation member 620 is provided with a function as a shutter.

  When the outer operation member 620 reaches the deepest position (that is, the open position) of the gap portion 632, the output of the drive signal to the stepping motor 641 and the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 646 are stopped. In this state, when the end of the outer operation member 620 abuts against the back wall of the gap portion 632, the further movement of the outer operation member 620 is blocked.

  When the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 646 is stopped, the stopper piece 645 tries to move to the blocking position by the biasing force of the biasing member, but the outer operation member 620 exists on the moving path Therefore, the stopper piece 645 is stopped in a state of being in contact with the inner surface of the outer operation member 620. When the outer operation member 620 reaches the open position as described above, the inner operation member 610 is exposed (see FIG. 36B). Hereinafter, this state is referred to as a deformed state.

  In the deformed state, exposure of the outer operation member 620 is avoided, whereby the operation target is substantially switched from the outer operation member 620 to the inner operation member 610. However, even when the operation target (the pressing target) is switched, the mode of displacement of the operation unit 601 based on the pressing operation is the same, and there is no change in the mode of the operation detection. That is, in the normal state and the deformed state, the operation is detected by the same configuration (detection sensor 649).

  When switching from the normal state shown in FIG. 36A to the deformed state shown in FIG. 36B is performed, the amount of exposure of the inner operation member 610 increases as the outer operation member 620 moves. By reducing the shielding range by the outer operation member 620 to which the light shielding function is added, the light from the light emitter 634 is emitted out of the operation unit 601 and the amount increases. This makes the visual change when switching from the normal state to the deformation state is made more noticeable. In order to realize such a change in the light emission range, since it is not necessary to perform light emission control such as adjusting the light emission range, it is possible to suppress an increase in control load.

  Further, the inner operation member 610 is formed of a resin material softer than the outer operation member 620, and the touch when touched is different. As a result, the touch when the operating unit 601 is touched changes in the normal state.

  Furthermore, while the surface of the outer operation member 620 has a smooth curved surface (spherical shape), a plurality of recesses 611 are formed on the surface of the inner operation member 610. As a result, not only the diffusion of light from the light emitter 634 described above is performed, but also the tactile sense between the normal state and the deformed state is made larger.

  When returning from the deformed state to the normal state as shown in FIG. 36 (b) → FIG. 36 (a), the display control device 410 outputs a drive signal to the stepping motor 641. As a result, the outer operation member 620 moves to the closed position. When the outer operating member 620 reaches the closed position, the stopper piece 645 which has been prevented from moving to the blocking position by the outer operating member 620 moves to the blocking position by the biasing force of the biasing member. As a result, the return to the normal state is completed, and the operation target moves from the inner operation member 610 to the outer operation member 620.

  By returning to the normal state, the light from the light emitting body 634 is blocked by the outer operation member 620, and the operation portion 601 is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, not only the pressing operation in the normal state is permitted as shown in FIG. 36 (a) → FIG. 36 (c) but also FIG. 36 (b) → FIG. 36 (d) The pressing operation in the deformed state is also permitted as shown in FIG. More specifically, in the deformed state, the same operation stroke as that in the normal state is secured, and movement to the maximum pressing position is permitted.

  The effects using the operation switch unit 600 described in detail above are roughly divided into the following three items.

(1) Normal effect in which switching to the deformed state does not occur In this effect, an image prompting the user to operate the operation switch unit 600 is first displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94, and is predetermined by the player. When an operation is performed within the period, a specific display effect is performed on the display screen 94 a based on the operation.

(2) A specific effect that switching from the normal state to the deformed state occurs at a preset timing regardless of the operation of the player In this effect, an image prompting the operation of the operation switch unit 600 on the display screen 94a Is displayed, and the operation switch unit 600 is switched to the deformed state. Thereafter, when the operation of the operation switch unit 600 is performed within a predetermined period by the player, a specific display effect is executed on the display screen 94a based on the operation.

(3) Specific Effect that Switching from the Normal State to the Deformed State Occurs Based on the Operation of the Player In this effect, first, an image prompting the operation of the operation switch unit 600 is displayed on the display screen 94a. When the operation of the operation switch unit 600 is performed within a predetermined time period, the operation switch unit 600 is switched to the deformed state based on the operation. Then, an image prompting the operation is displayed again on the display screen 94a, and when the operation is performed within a predetermined period by the player, a specific effect is performed based on the operation.

  In the effects (1) to (3), the probability of being selected as the effect when the big hit results in the order of (1) <(2) <(3) is high, (3) <(2) The probability of being selected as an effect when the result is out in the order of <) (1) is high. As a result, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot when the effect occurs is configured to increase in the order of (1) <(2) <(3).

  By setting the expectation of the effect of (1) and the effect of (2) as described above, it is assumed that the player plays a game while expecting the effect of (2) to occur. That is, it is assumed that the player plays a game while conscious of whether or not the operation switch unit 600 is deformed. Thereby, an improvement in the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 600 can be expected.

  Also, by using the effects of (1) and (3) in combination, the player can expect the operation switch unit 600 to be switched to the deformed state when the operation suggestion is performed on the display screen 94a. It is assumed that the operation of unit 600 is performed. Therefore, an improvement in the degree of attention to the reaction (operation) at the time of operation of the operation switch unit 600 can be expected.

(Processing for operation switch form change effect)
Here, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 37, of the processing for various effects executed by the MPU 412 of the display control device 410, the processing according to the above (3) (hereinafter referred to as “operation switch type change presentation”) The process is illustrated. The operation switch type change effect processing is executed in a cycle of about 4 msec.

  In the operation switch type change effect processing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a change display cycle (operation during game play) in which an operation switch type change effect occurs is generated. If the variable display cycle is not in progress, the process for the operation switch type change presentation is ended as it is. If the variable display cycle is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1202.

  In step S1202, it is determined whether it is after the suggestion of the first one-shot operation has been performed. When negative determination is carried out in step S1202, it progresses to step S1203. In step S1203, a process of setting a first one-shot operation suggesting image is performed. As a result, a pressing operation indication image (pressing operation prompting image) prompting the player to press the operation switch unit 600 is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94. For example, as the pressing operation suggesting image, a moving image is displayed such that the display content of the character corresponds to the suggestion, and a character such as "Press the button!" Is displayed on the display screen 94a. In addition, about the display of the said image, it is complete | finished when progress of a suggestion period defined beforehand or pressing operation is performed.

  Incidentally, the suggestion of the pressing operation is not limited to that in the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94, and is performed by the output of sound from the speaker unit 27 in addition to or instead of that in the display screen 94 a Alternatively, the push button member 320 may emit light. Furthermore, these various suggestion patterns may be used in combination.

  After the process of step S1203 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1204 and the setting process of the first one-shot operation waiting state is performed. In the setting process of the first one-shot operation waiting state, the first one-shot operation waiting flag is stored in the first one-shot operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414. Thereafter, the process for the present operation switch form change presentation is ended.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, that is, if it is determined that the first one-shot operation has been suggested, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, it is determined whether the first one-shot operation waiting flag is stored in the first one-shot operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414, thereby determining whether it is after the suggestion of the first one-shot operation.

  If the first one-shot operation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, it is determined whether the pressing operation of the operation unit 601 (specifically, the outer operation member 620) has been performed. Specifically, the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 interrupts the normal processing periodically (for example, 2 msec) in addition to the normal processing in which the command determination processing and the operation switch type change presentation processing are repeatedly executed. The timer interrupt process activated by is set. In the timer interrupt process, a sensor monitoring process for monitoring a detection signal (detection information) from the detection sensor 649 of the operation switch unit 40 is performed. Then, in step S1205, the presence or absence of the first one-shot operation is determined based on the result of the sensor monitoring process, that is, based on whether or not the operation unit 601 has reached the maximum pressing position.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, the process advances to step S1207 to execute setting processing of a first one-shot operation completion image. As a result, on the display screen 94a, an operation completion image (for example, a message such as "COMPLETE!") Is displayed instead of the operation suggestion image.

  In the subsequent step S1207, setting processing of the form change timing of the operation switch unit is performed. In the present embodiment, it is one of the features to provide a plurality of timings to change the form and to diversify the form change timing at the time of effect execution. Specifically, at which timing after the first single-shot operation is performed in this process, it is selected from among a plurality of preset patterns at which timing the form change of the operation switch unit is to be performed. More specifically, three timings are stored as the above-mentioned timing at the same time as the first one-shot operation, 0.5 seconds after the first one-shot operation, and 1.0 seconds after the first one-shot operation. Is selected by

  When a hand is placed on the operation unit 601 (more specifically, the outer operation member 620) when a form change occurs, the fact that the form change is occurring can be transmitted to the player as a tactile change. . If attention is paid to this point, it is preferable to cause the form change at the same time when the first one-shot operation is performed. However, if it is attempted to cause a form change simultaneously with the first single-shot operation every time, if the operation unit 601 is continuously hit, the second single-shot operation to be described later is effectively accepted and the impact of the form change is immediately received. Is concerned that Therefore, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that a slight interval may occur between the first single-shot operation and the occurrence of the form change. As a result, the player is prevented from being repeatedly hit the operating unit 601 unconsciously. Thereby, while suppressing random operation, attention to operation switch unit 600 can be raised suitably. In addition, it is possible to contribute to securing the durability of the operation switch unit 600 to which the form change function is given.

  Returning to the description of step S1206, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, that is, if it is determined that the first one-shot operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, it is determined whether it is time to finish accepting the first one-shot operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined acceptance valid period has elapsed since the process of step S1204 is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1209, the process for the present operation switch form change effect is ended as it is.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, a setting process of the acceptance termination image is executed. As a result, on the display screen 94 a, the suggestion image (“press a button!”) Is not displayed, and instead, an acceptance termination image (for example, a message such as “INCOMPLETE!”) Is displayed.

  After the process of step S1210 or step S1208 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1211, and after the release process of the first one-shot operation waiting state is performed, the process for the present operation switch form change presentation is ended. In the release process of the first one-shot operation waiting state, the first one-shot operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 of the RAM 414 is erased. As a result, the subsequent first one-shot operation is invalidated.

  Returning to the description of step S1205, if a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if it is determined not to be in the first one-shot operation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, it is determined whether it is time to start changing the form of the operation switch unit. Specifically, it is determined whether the timing set by the process of step S1211 has come.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, the process advances to step S1213 to execute form change processing. Here, the form change processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the form change process, first, the light emission start process is executed in step S1301. In the light emission start process, the supply of power to the light emitter 634 incorporated in the operation switch unit 600 is started. As a result, light is emitted from the light emitter 634 to the inner operation member 610. However, at the timing when light emission is started in this manner, the inner operation member 610 is covered by the outer operation member 620, and the emission of light to the outside of the operation unit 601 is restricted. It can not be confirmed.

  After the process of step S1301 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1302, and the movement restriction release process of the outer operation member 620 is performed. In the movement restriction release process, the output of the drive signal to the solenoid 646 is started. As a result, the solenoid 646 is excited during a preset period (in the present embodiment, a period equivalent to the period required for the outer operation member 620 to reach the open position). By energizing the solenoid 646, the stopper piece 645 moves from the blocking position to the permissible position, and the movement restriction of the outer operation member 620 is released.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1304, and the process of switching the outer operation member 620 to the open state is performed. In the processing, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 641. Thereby, the outer operation member 620 moves to the open position. The output of the drive signal is stopped when the outer operation member 620 reaches the open position.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 37 again, after executing the processing of step S1213, the processing proceeds to step S1214 to perform setting processing of a second one-shot operation suggestion image. By executing the process, an image (for example, a message such as "Press again!") Is suggested on the display screen 94a.

  Thereafter, in step S1214, the setting process of the second one-shot operation waiting state is executed, and the process for the present operation switch form change presentation is ended. In the setting process of the second one-shot operation waiting state, the second one-shot operation waiting flag is stored in the second one-shot operation waiting flag storage area of the various flag storage area 425 in the RAM 414.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the detection sensor 649 rises from the LOW level to the HI level when the operation unit 601 reaches the maximum pressing position, and the operation is performed by this rise. It is configured to understand the effect. For this reason, even if the operation unit 601 is kept pressed to the maximum pressing position by the first operation, it is not determined that the second operation has been performed. That is, in order to be able to effectively receive the second operation, it is necessary to move the operation unit 601 from the maximum pressing position, for example, to the initial position after performing the first operation. Thus, the mode of the operation detection is different from the first embodiment and the like.

  Returning to the description of step S 1212, if a negative determination is made in step S 1212, that is, if it is determined that it is not the form change timing of the operation switch unit, the process proceeds to step S 1216. In step S1216, it is determined whether or not the second single-shot operation waiting state is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second one-shot operation waiting flag is stored in the second one-shot operation waiting flag storage area of the RAM 414.

  When an affirmation judging is carried out at Step S1216, it progresses to processing for the 2nd one-shot operation of Step S1217. Here, the second one-shot operation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the second one-shot operation process, first, at step S1401, it is determined whether a second one-shot operation (pressing operation) of the operation unit 601 (specifically, the inner operation member 610) has been performed. Specifically, in the MPU 412 of the display control device 410, in addition to the normal processing in which the command determination processing and the processing for operation area expansion effect processing are repeatedly executed, the normal processing is interrupted and executed periodically (for example, 2 msec) Timer interrupt processing is set. In the timer interrupt process, a sensor monitoring process for monitoring a detection signal (detection information) from the detection sensor 649 of the operation switch unit 40 is performed. Then, in step S1205, the presence or absence of the second one-shot operation is determined based on the result of the sensor monitoring process.

  In the present embodiment, the same detection sensor is used in both the case where the outer operation member 620 is pressed in the first single operation and the case where the inner operation member 610 is pressed in the second single operation. Detection is performed. This is a device for suppressing the complication of the configuration resulting from it while showing that the operation mode is diversified by adopting the inner and outer operation members 610 and 620.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the process advances to step S1402 to execute setting processing of a second one-shot operation completion image. As a result, on the display screen 94a, an operation completion image (for example, a message such as "COMPLETE!") Is displayed instead of the operation suggestion image. After the process of step S1402 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1403, and a process of setting a result display image is performed.

  By executing the processing of step S1402, a result display image is displayed on the display screen 94a of the symbol display device 94. As the display of the image, for example, when the variable display time is a variable display time that a big hit state occurs, a moving image is displayed so that the display content of the character corresponds to the occurrence of a big hit state. If the variable display cycle is a variable display cycle in which no jackpot state occurs, a moving image is displayed such that the display content of the character is the same as that before the operation suggestive image is started. In the setting process of the result display image, when the operation completed image is displayed, the process for displaying the result display image corresponding to the operation completed is executed, and the operation incomplete image is displayed. In the process, the process for displaying the result display image corresponding to the incomplete operation is performed. That is, different images are displayed when the operation is completed and when the operation is not completed.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, the process advances to step S1404 to determine whether it is time to finish accepting the second one-shot operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined effective period has passed since the process of step S1215 is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S 1404, the second one-shot operation processing ends.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S 1404, setting processing of an acceptance termination image is executed. As a result, on the display screen 94 a, the suggestion image (“press a button!”) Is not displayed, and instead, an acceptance termination image (for example, a message such as “INCOMPLETE!”) Is displayed.

  After the process of step S1405 or step S1403 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1406, and after the release process of the second one-shot operation waiting state is performed, the process for the second one-shot operation is ended. In the release process of the second one-shot operation waiting state, the second one-shot operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 of the RAM 414 is erased. Thereby, the second one-shot operation thereafter is invalidated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 37 again, after the second one-shot operation processing of step S1217 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S1216, the process proceeds to step S1218. In step S1218, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display. When it is not the end timing of the variable display, the processing for the present operation switch type change presentation is ended as it is.

  If it is the end timing of the variable display, the process of setting the end display image is executed in step S 1219, and the process of returning from the deformed state to the normal state is executed in step S 1220. Finish.

  In the setting process of the end display image in step S 1219, when the fluctuation display time is the fluctuation display time that the big hit state occurs, the display setting is performed so that the moving image display that the occurrence of the big hit state is decided is performed. . In this case, when the setting process of the result display image is being executed and the moving image display is set to correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot state in the setting process of the result display image, The setting of the moving image display is performed so as to be the moving image display and the series of contents. On the other hand, when the setting process of the operation uncompleted image is executed, the moving image display in which the operation uncompleted image is dramatically switched to the moving image display to the effect that the occurrence of the jackpot state is decided is interposed. .

  In the return processing in step S 1220, the return flag is stored in the return flag storage area in the various flag storage area 425. In the timer interrupt process described above, when the return flag is stored, a process for returning the operation switch unit 600 to the normal state is performed. In the return processing, it is determined whether it is time after the game result is displayed, and if it is determined that it is the time after the game result is displayed, the following process is performed.

  First, based on detection information from the position detection sensor 648, it is determined whether the operation unit 601 has returned to the maximum protruding position. If it is determined that the operation unit 601 has not returned to the maximum protruding position, the return processing is ended as it is. That is, when the player continues the pressing operation by putting his hand on the operation unit 601 or the like, the return to the normal state is avoided.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation unit 601 has returned to the maximum protruding position, a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 641. Thereby, the outer operation member 620 moves to the closed position, and the return from the deformed state to the normal state is completed. After the output stop process of the drive signal is executed, the recovery flag stored in the various flag storage area 425 is erased, and the recovery process is ended.

  When the return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 425, the operation switch form change presentation is restricted, and in the variable display cycle in which the operation switch form change presentation is executed, alternative presentation (for example, The effect (1) above will be executed. By the way, when the fluctuation display cycle in which the operation area expansion effect is performed is ended and the second pressing operation is not performed while the next fluctuation display cycle is started, the next fluctuation display cycle is started. It is set to complete the return from the extended state to the normal state by the time it is done. Therefore, when the return processing is completed as it is after the game result is displayed, the operation area expansion effect is not restricted in the next game round.

  According to the fifth embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the portion of the operation switch unit 600 exposed to the player side (upper side) is deformed according to the game situation. Thus, by changing the operation switch unit 600, the change of the operation switch unit 600 is visually or tactilely suggested to the player, and the player's attention to the operation switch unit 600 is improved. Can contribute to

  In the operation switch mode change effect, the above deformation of the operation switch unit 600 is generated by the operation of the player. Thus, by setting the operation of the player as a trigger for deformation, it is possible to urge the player to actively participate in the operation corresponding to the operation switch unit 600.

  Some players may play a game with their hands on the operation switch unit 600 (for example, the operation unit 601) so that an operation can be performed immediately when an operation suggestion is performed. In such a configuration, it is feared that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp even if the operation switch unit is made to emit light. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the operation switch unit 600 is “deformed”, it is possible to transmit the change in appearance to the player as a visual change as well as the tactile change. This makes it difficult for the player to miss a change in the operation switch unit 600.

  Furthermore, the deformation of the operation switch unit 600 is started at the timing when the operation unit 601 reaches the maximum pressing position, that is, the operation detection position. As a result, compared to, for example, a configuration in which the deformation is started after returning to the position before the operation, the player has more chances of touching the player's hands during the deformation, and suggests the player the fact that the deformation is occurring. It can be exhibited more suitably.

  When the inner operation member 610 and the outer operation member 620 are used in combination and the textures (hardness and surface shape) of the two are different, the movement of the outer operation member 620, that is, the deformation of the operation portion 601 is overlooked. Even when the player touches the operation unit 601, it can be suitably suggested to the player that some change has occurred in the operation unit 601.

  When the configuration in which the inner operation member 610 is covered by the outer operation member 620 is adopted, it is assumed that chatter or the like at the time of operation is likely to occur because the outer operation member 620 is movable and it is difficult to secure the holding combination. . In this respect, in the present embodiment, by making the inner operation member 610 made of a material softer than the outer operation member 620 abut against the outer operation member 620 from the inside, the chattering of the outer operation member 620 is realized. It is possible to provide a vibration control function to suppress and the like. Further, by bringing the inner operation member 610 into contact with the outer operation member 620, it is possible to disperse the load when the outer operation member 620 is pressed through the entire operation portion 601 through the inner operation member 610. There is. Thereby, the outer operation member 620 is protected.

  The outer operation member 620 is configured to have a hemispherical appearance, and is configured to rotate along the virtual spherical surface G when switching from the normal state to the deformed state. The stress when the outer operation member 620 is pressed is dispersed into a force directed to the center of the imaginary spherical surface G and a force directed in the rotational direction. Thereby, concentration of stress on the stopper piece 645 is avoided.

  In particular, the outer operating member 620 is formed to have a smoother surface as compared to the inner operating member 610. Therefore, even if the stress in the rotation direction acts, the hand pressing the outer operation member 620 slides on the surface of the outer operation member 620, that is, the friction between the outer operation member 620 and the hand is suppressed. It is possible to reduce the stress acting substantially in the rotational direction. This contributes to the improvement of the durability of the operation switch unit 600.

  With regard to the outer operation member 620 in the present embodiment, movement to the maximum open position is obtained regardless of where the operation portion 601 is located between the maximum projecting position (initial position) and the maximum pressing position. Acceptable configurations are employed. Thereby, restrictions such as movable timing at the time of switching from the normal state to the deformed state are less likely to occur, and it is possible to suitably enhance the application freedom to the game effect of the form change (deformation) of the operation switch unit 600 It has become.

Sixth Embodiment
In the fifth embodiment, the number of operation targets in the normal state (more specifically, the number of portions which can be operated by the player and displaced independently of the portion based on the operation) and the operation targets in the deformed state However, the number of operation targets in each state is different for the operation switch unit 600A in the present embodiment. Specifically, by switching (deforming) from the normal state to the deformed state, the operation targets increase from one operation target to three operation targets. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 39, the configuration of operation switch unit 600A in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 39 (a) is an outline diagram showing the internal structure of the operation switch unit 600A, and FIG. 39 (b) is a schematic view showing the electrical configuration of the operation switch unit 600A. The operation switch unit 600A in the present embodiment has most of the same configuration as the operation switch unit 600 in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, the description of the fifth embodiment is incorporated for these common configurations, and differences from the fifth embodiment will be mainly described.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, the operation switch unit 600A has a pair of outer operation members 620. The arrangement of the outer operation members 620 is different from that of the fifth embodiment. Specifically, while the outer operation members 620 are arranged side by side in the fifth embodiment, the outer operation members 620 are arranged in the front and rear direction in the present embodiment. 39 (a) corresponds to a partial cross-sectional view taken along line FF of FIG. 35 (a), but for the boundary between the outer operation members 620, see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 35 (a). I want to be

  The inner operation member 610A is a button member provided so as to be movable up and down. Specifically, an insertion hole 633A for the inner operation member 610A opened upward is provided on the end face of the base portion 630A (specifically, the pedestal portion 631A), and the inner operation member with respect to the insertion hole 633A 610A is fitted. In the insertion hole 633A, a partition 634A is formed so as to divide the area in the insertion hole 633A into three front and rear areas. A spring member 637A for biasing the inner operation member 610A to the side (upper side) protruding from the insertion hole 633A is disposed in the front area and the rear area among the three areas partitioned by the partition 634A. ing.

  The insertion hole 633A is formed with a stopper (not shown) for restricting the upward displacement of the inner operation member 610A by coming into contact with the inner operation member 610A from the upper side. Detachment from 633A is avoided. The inner operation member 610A is pressed against the stopper portion by the biasing force of the spring member 637A, and the operation surface portion 611A of the inner operation member 610A is pressed from above, so that the inner operation member 610A is spring-loaded. It is configured to be retracted into the insertion hole 633A against the biasing force of the member 637A.

  The inner operation member 610A is covered by the outer operation member 620 in a normal state, and the exposure of the inner operation member 610A is suppressed. Therefore, in the normal state, the operation by the player is substantially disabled. On the other hand, in the case of transition to the deformed state, the outer operation member 620 is accommodated in the gap portion 632, whereby access to the inner operation member 610A is permitted. Here, a plurality (three in detail) of the inner operation members 610A are arranged side by side, and the inner operation members 610A are configured to be displaced independently of one another. According to this configuration, by switching from the normal state to the deformed state, the operation target is changed from a single to a plurality.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 39 (b), a configuration relating to operation detection when the outer operation member 620 is pressed and when each inner operation member 610A is pressed will be described.

  In the holder portion 602A in the present embodiment, a detection sensor 655A constituting an operation detection means is disposed. The detection sensor 655A is an optical sensor (photosensor) including a light emitting element 656A and a light receiving element 657A, and is electrically connected to the display control device 410.

  A through hole 638A penetrating to the left and right is formed in the base portion 630A of the operation portion 601A, and the elements 656A and 657A are disposed with the through hole 638A interposed therebetween. The light emitted from the light emitting element 656A passes through the through hole 638A and reaches the light receiving element 657A when the operation unit 601 has not reached the maximum pressing position. On the other hand, when the operation portion 601A has reached the maximum pressing position, the light from the light emitting element 656A is blocked by the outer wall of the base portion 630 and does not reach the light receiving element 657A. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether or not the operation unit 601A has been operated by the display control device 410, and more specifically, whether or not the outer operation member 620 has been pressed.

  The through hole 638A communicates with the insertion hole 633A for the inner operation member 610A (more specifically, the central region defined by the partition 634A), and the inner operation member 610A reaches the maximum pressing position. The through hole 638A is cut by the inner operation member 610A.

  Here, since the inner operation member 610A is configured not to allow the passage of light, light from the light emitting element 656A does not reach the light receiving element 657A in a state where the through hole 638A is broken (see FIG. 39 (b), two dotted lines).

  Furthermore, in the insertion portion 651 of the holder portion 602A, a lock device 660A that can switch between a locked state in which movement of the operation portion 601A from the initial position to the maximum pressing position is not possible and an unlocked state in which the movement is permitted. Is provided. The lock device 660A is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and is configured to be switched between the locked state and the unlocked state based on the drive signal from the display control device 410.

  More specifically, when the operation switch unit 600 is in the normal state, the lock device 660A is maintained in the unlocked state, and when switching from the normal state to the deformed state is performed, the lock device 660A is released from the unlocked state. It will be switched to the locked state. This makes it impossible to move the entire operation unit 601A to the maximum pressing position. In other words, the locked state prevents the outer wall of the base portion 630A from blocking the arrival of light from the light emitting element 656A to the light receiving element 657A.

  On the other hand, in the case of the locked state, the operation target moves from the outer operation member 620 to the inner operation member 610A. Therefore, the transmission and reception of the light can be blocked by the inner operation member 610A.

  The configuration corresponding to the lock device 660A is not necessarily an essential configuration. At least in the deformed state, it is sufficient if the operation of the inner operation member 610A is secured, for example, the urging force of each spring member 636A is set sufficiently smaller than the urging force of the spring member 636 for the entire operation portion 601A. A configuration may be adopted by which the movement of the entire operation unit 601A in the pressing direction is avoided by operating the inner operation member 610A. Further, as for the lock device 660A, the detailed arrangement is optional as long as the function is secured, and the lock device 660A need not necessarily be arranged in the insertion portion 651.

  In the configuration described in detail above, the electrical configuration (sensors and signal lines) related to the operation detection is shared in both the normal state and the deformed state. Here, although the operation target apparently increases to a plurality in this manner, an operation corresponding rendering using a configuration in which the operation system is substantially limited to one will be briefly described.

  In the case of performing the operation corresponding rendering, a message indicating an operation is displayed on the display screen 94 a at a timing after the change display is changed to the reach display. Thereafter, when the operation of the operation unit 601A by the player is performed within the reception valid period set in advance, the process for switching the operation switch unit 600A from the normal state to the deformed state is triggered by the operation. To be executed. As a result, the operation target moves from the outer operation member 620 to the inner operation member 610A. Here, on the display screen 94a, an image imitating a reel of the reeling type gaming machine is displayed. That is, the moving picture is displayed as if the left pattern row, the middle pattern row, and the right pattern row are individually variably displayed.

  Here, a message prompting the user to operate the left inner operation member 610AL (for example, “press the left button to stop the design!”) Is displayed on the display screen 94a. When the player operates the left inner operation member 610AL, the operation is detected by the detection sensor 655A, and the left pattern row variably displayed on the display screen 94a is stopped and displayed based on the operation. That is, the inner operation member 610AL functions as a stop operation means for stopping the variable display of the pattern row.

  The symbols stopped and displayed based on the operation of the player are the symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot result (for example, "Heart Mark", "Heart Mark", "Heart") when the game result of this variation display cycle is a jackpot result In the case of an out result, it becomes a pattern constituting a combination of pictures (for example, "heart mark", "heart mark", "star mark") corresponding to the out result. That is, the player's operation is only a trigger for the timing to stop the pattern, and the pattern actually displayed for stop is determined in advance according to the game result.

  After the left pattern is stopped and displayed, a message prompting the user to operate the inner operation member 610AM is displayed on the display screen 94a. When the player operates the inner inner operation member 610AM, the operation is detected by the detection sensor 655A, and the middle pattern row variably displayed on the display screen 94a is stopped and displayed based on the operation.

  After the middle pattern is stopped and displayed, a message prompting the user to operate the right inner operation member 610AM is displayed on the display screen 94a. When the player operates the right inner operation member 610AR, the operation is detected by the detection sensor 655A, and based on this operation, the right symbol row variably displayed on the display screen 94a is stopped and displayed.

  The stop mode of the pattern based on the operation of the inner operation members 610AM and 610AR corresponding to the middle pattern and the left pattern is the same as the stop mode of the pattern based on the operation of the left inner operation member 610AL, and thus detailed. I omit explanation.

  According to the sixth embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  By switching the operation switch unit 600A from the normal state to the deformed state, the number of operation targets is increased. As described above, if the number of accessible operation targets is increased according to the game situation, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the attention to the operation switch unit 600A.

  When many operation targets are adopted, although the effect of improving the attention degree can be expected, there is a concern that the configuration concerning electrical control becomes complicated. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, by sharing the configuration related to the operation detection, it is possible to simplify the electrical configuration and the electrical control related thereto.

  In particular, simplification of the above configuration is made easy by making the operation directions the same as when the outer operation member 620 is the operation target and when the inner operation member 610A is the operation target. .

  Although the transmission systems of signals from a plurality of operation targets are unified, in the display effect on the display screen 94a, it is simulated as if the signals from each operation target are handled separately. Thereby, while using a simple structure, the obsolescence of the presentation accompanying it is avoided in fact.

  In general, in the roll-to-play type gaming machine, the player can arbitrarily select in which order of the plurality of stop operation buttons the stop operation is to be performed. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the transmission system of the electric signal is made common, it can not be specified which of the plurality of inner operation members 610A corresponding to the stop operation button is operated. Therefore, on the display screen 94a, the subject to be operated is clearly indicated (assisted), and the subject that the player will operate is guided to a predetermined one, so that the number of transmission systems of electric signals is small. Overcoming.

Seventh Embodiment
In the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the operation switch unit 40 is deformed in accordance with the game situation. Also in this embodiment, a configuration in which the operation switch unit is deformed in accordance with the game situation is employed as in the first embodiment, but the configuration and the aspect of the deformation pertaining to the first embodiment Are different. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 40, operation switch unit 700 in the present embodiment will be described. Fig.40 (a) is the schematic which looked at operation switch unit 700 from upper direction, FIG.40 (b) is the GG sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 40 (a).

  First, the basic configuration of the operation switch unit 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the arrangement target of the operation switch unit 700 in this embodiment is the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14 as in the first embodiment. A housing portion 28 c for housing the operation switch unit 600 is formed at the central portion of the upper bulging portion 28, and a part of the operation portion 701 of the operation switch unit 700 housed in the housing portion 28 c is an upper bulging. It is in a state of being exposed upward through a substantially circular opening 28 e formed in the upper surface 28 d of the protrusion 28.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the operation switch unit 700 is composed of the operation unit 701 and a holder unit 702 which holds the operation unit 701 movably, and the holder unit 702 is an upper bulging portion 28. The operation switch unit 700 and the upper bulging portion 28 are integrated by being fixed to each other.

  The operation unit 701 has a button member 720 projecting from a central opening 711 formed in the holder unit 702. The button member 720 has a hollow shape opened to the back side of the holder portion 702, and the open portion is closed by a lid 730 fixed to the button member 720.

  The lid body 730 is formed with a plurality of cylindrical portions 731 standing on the opposite side to the button member 720 side, and a projection 713 formed on the bottom portion 712 of the holder portion 702 with respect to each of these cylindrical portions 731 It is inserted. The outer peripheral surface of the protrusion 713 is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 731 so that the movement direction of the operation portion 701 is defined to be the vertical direction.

  Further, a spring member 741 is disposed in a space surrounded by the cylindrical portion 731. By the biasing force of the spring member 741, the operation portion 701 is biased in a direction (upward) which protrudes from the central opening 711.

  The holder portion 702 is provided with a contact portion 714 that contacts the flange portion 721 formed on the button member 720 from the front side (upper side) in the projecting direction, and the flange portion 721 contacts the contact portion 714 The further protrusion is regulated. That is, the contact portion 714 has a function of defining the maximum projecting position of the operation portion 701.

  When the operation unit 701 is pressed, the operation unit 701 moves backward against the biasing force of the spring member 741, whereby the tip end portion of the cylindrical portion 731 is against the bottom portion 712 of the holder portion 702. Further movement is restricted by abutting. That is, the position at which the end of the cylindrical portion 731 abuts on the bottom 712 is the maximum pressing position of the operation portion 701.

  Also in operation switch unit 700 in the present embodiment, position detection sensor 708 which detects that operation portion 701 is positioned at the maximum projecting position, and position detection sensor 709 which detects that it is positioned at the maximum pressing position. And. Each of the position detection sensors 708 and 709 is electrically connected to the display control device 410, and in the display control device 410, it is determined that the operation has been performed based on the detection signal from the position detection sensor 709. It is configured to detect.

  Next, a configuration for realizing the deformation of the operation switch unit 700 (the operation unit 701) will be described.

  On the upper surface portion 722 of the button member 720, a plurality of horizontally elongated slits 723 are provided in parallel. In the slits 723, rising portions 724 extending in the inner direction (downward) of the operation portion 701 are integrally formed, and the rising portions 724 face each other with the slits 723 interposed therebetween.

  A movable member 750 is incorporated in the operation unit 701. The movable member 750 includes a plate-like base portion 751 facing the lid 730, and a projection portion 752 projecting from the base portion 751 and exposed to the outside of the operation portion 701 through a gap between the rising portions 724 and the slit 723. There is. The projecting portion 752 abuts on the opposing surfaces in the rising portion 724, and movement in the same direction as the direction (vertical direction) in which the rising portion 724 extends is permitted, but in a direction intersecting with it. Movement is regulated. That is, the rising portion 724 forms a movement passage of the protrusion 752.

  The lid member 730 is provided with a spring member 761 as biasing means for biasing the movable member 750 upward. The base portion 751 of the movable member 750 is pressed against the tip of the rising portion 724 by the biasing force of the spring member 761, and the further upward movement is restricted.

  The protruding portion 752 of the movable member 750 is formed such that the tip end portion 753 of the protruding portion 752 is positioned on the same plane as the upper surface portion 722 of the button member 720 in a state in which the upward movement is restricted. There is. That is, the operation surface portion 705 is formed by the distal end portion 753 of the movable member 750 (projecting portion 752) and the upper surface portion 722 of the button member 720.

  The ratio (occupancy ratio) occupied by the upper surface 722 of the button member 720 in the operation surface 705 is set larger than the ratio occupied by the distal end 753 of the movable member 750 (see FIG. 40A). It is done. That is, what mainly constitutes the operation unit 701 (to be operated by the player) is the button member 720, and the movable member 750 is attached to the button member 720.

  Here, the relationship between the top surface portion 722 and the tip end portion 753 constituting the operation surface portion 705 will be supplementarily described. Both arrangement patterns are set such that when the player touches the operation surface 705 with a finger, both the upper surface 722 and the tip 753 are included in the contact range. Therefore, when the player presses the operation surface 705 with a finger, the finger contacts both the upper surface 722 and the tip 753. This is a device for preventing the player from missing that there is a difference in the operation sense (feeling of touching) in the normal state and the deformed state of the operation switch unit 700.

  In addition to the movable member 750 and the spring member 761, a solenoid 770 electrically connected to the display control device 410 is disposed inside the operation unit 701. The solenoid 770 is disposed such that its movable shaft is connected to the movable member 750, and the movable member 750 is attached to the spring member 761 by the operation of the solenoid 770 based on the drive signal from the display control device 410. Move against the power.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of modes of effects using the operation switch unit 700 are set. Specifically, the movable member based on the normal effect without the movement of the movable member 750, the first special effect that the movable member 750 operates at predetermined timing regardless of the operation of the player, and the operation of the player A second special effect for operating 750 is set. Therefore, with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 41, the modification of the operation switch unit 700 and the mode of the display effect performed on the display screen 94a when executing the operation corresponding rendering using the operation switch unit 700 are exemplified below. Do. In each of the above effects, the expectation for winning the jackpot when the effect is executed is set so that the normal effect <first special effect / second special effect.

  First, normal presentation will be described. In the normal rendering, as shown in FIG. 41A, on the display screen 94a under the situation where the operation unit 701 exists at the maximum projecting position and the operation surface 705 is formed by the button member 720 and the movable member 750. When the variable display of the symbol is started, a message indicating the operation of the operation switch unit 700 is displayed on the display screen 94a at a predetermined timing (for example, at a timing after shifting to the reach display).

  Thereafter, when the operation switch unit 700 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 41 (a) → FIG. 41 (b), the operation unit 701 reaches the maximum pressing position, thereby effectively accepting the operation. After the message indicating that the operation has been effectively received is displayed on the display screen 94a, a display effect (for example, super reach) corresponding to the operation is executed on the display screen 94a.

  In the process of performing a series of effects and operations, the movable member 750 stands by at a position where the operation surface 705 is formed together with the button member 720.

  Next, the first special effect will be described. In the first special effect, as shown in FIG. 41A, the display screen is displayed under the situation where the operation unit 701 is at the maximum projecting position and the operation surface 705 is formed by the button member 720 and the movable member 750. When the variable display of symbols is started at 94a, the movable member 750 moves to the retracted position at a predetermined timing (for example, at a timing after shifting to the reach display). Specifically, as a drive signal is output from the display control device 410 to the solenoid 770, the movable member 750 moves as shown in FIG. Irregularities will occur.

  After the retraction of the movable member 750 is completed, a message indicating the operation of the operation switch unit 700 is displayed on the display screen 94a. Then, when the operation switch unit 700 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 41 (c) → FIG. 41 (d), the operation is effectively accepted by the operation unit 701 reaching the maximum pressing position. After the message indicating that the operation has been effectively received is displayed on the display screen 94a, a display effect (for example, super reach) corresponding to the operation is executed on the display screen 94a.

  The player touches the operation surface 705 when performing the operation to change the smooth operation surface 705 from a smooth curved surface to an uneven shape, that is, a touch that the operation switch unit 700 (the operation unit 701) is deformed. Can be grasped. As a result, it is suggested to the player that the variable display times are highly likely to correspond to the jackpot result.

  As described above, by using the normal effect and the first special effect in combination, the operation unit 701 is branched at the timing after the transition to the reach display when the operation unit 701 is deformed or not deformed. In these two cases, since the degree of expectation which is a big hit result is different, the player who wants to predict the result of the variable display times more quickly and accurately concerning the reach display concerned pay attention to the movement of the operation unit 701. It will pay. This can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the operation switch unit 700.

  In the second special effect, as shown in FIG. 41A, under the situation where the operation unit 701 is at the maximum projecting position and the operation surface 705 is formed by the button member 720 and the movable member 750, the display screen 94a The variable display of the symbol is started at. Thereafter, a message indicating the operation of the operation switch unit 700 is displayed on the display screen 94a at a predetermined timing (for example, at a timing after transition to reach display).

  When the operation switch unit 700 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 41 (a) → FIG. 41 (b), when the operation unit 701 reaches the maximum pressing position, the operation is effectively accepted, After a message indicating that the operation has been effectively received is displayed on the display screen 94a, a display effect (for example, super reach) corresponding to the operation is executed on the display screen 94a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41D, when the movable member 750 starts retreating at the timing when the operation portion 701 reaches the maximum pressing position, the operation portion 701 is deformed. At this timing, it is assumed that the player's hand is likely to touch the operation unit 701, and the player's hand touching the operation unit 701 causes the operation surface 705 to change from a smooth curved surface to an uneven shape. It is possible to tactilely grasp what has been done, that is, that the operation switch unit 700 (the operation unit 701) has been deformed. As a result, it is suggested to the player that the variable display times are highly likely to correspond to the jackpot result.

  When the operation surface 705 is formed by the button member 720 and the movable member 750, it has a curved surface shape which is convex upward as a whole. Therefore, when the movable member 750 retracts and unevenness is generated in the operation surface 705, a slight level difference is generated in the operation surface 705. By causing the operation surface portion 705 to have a level difference in this manner, it becomes easy to grasp that a difference occurs before and after deformation when the operation surface portion 705 is touched.

  According to the seventh embodiment described above in detail, by adopting the configuration in which the deformation of the operation unit 701 occurs, the operation unit 701 constituting the “operation means” is formed as in the other embodiments. It is possible to suitably increase the attention level of each player. For example, when the operation of the operation unit 701 is performed or not performed, the deformation of the operation unit 701 can occur, so that the state of the operation unit 701 can be easily noticed.

  The movable member 750 constituting the operation unit 701 can start retreating at the timing when the operation unit 701 reaches the maximum pressing position. In such a configuration, it is highly possible that the player's hand still touches the operation unit 701 as compared with the configuration in which the deformation is performed after the operation unit 701 returns to the maximum projection position. It is possible to expect the effect that the deformation of 701 can be easily transmitted to the player tactilely.

  However, if it is attempted to move the movable member 750 at a timing when the player's hand is likely to be touched, the movement of the movable member 750 may be hindered by the player's hand. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the movable member 750 is retracted relative to the top surface portion 722 of the button member 720, and such a problem does not occur. Further, since the deformation in the pressing direction does not cause a load on the player's hand due to the deformation, it is possible to preferably avoid that the deformation hinders the operation.

  Furthermore, since the movable member 750 moves to the side away from the player's hand, even if the moving speed of the movable member 750 is set high, the player's hand is not pressed. Thereby, the period which a deformation | transformation requires can be shortened and the smoothening of the presentation using the operation switch unit 700 can be achieved.

  Further, in the operation unit 701, the pressing operation is permitted in any state before, during, and after deformation. For this reason, the inconvenience such as the continuous hitting of the operation unit 701 is not limited due to the addition of the deformation function. This makes it possible to achieve both the deformation function and the operability.

  The proportion of the operation surface portion 705 is set so that the button member 720 is larger than the movable member. For this reason, it is suppressed that the operativity of the operation part 701 falls due to the deformation of the operation part 701.

  The movable member 750 is not fixed at that position when the movable member 750 and the button member 720 form a series of operation surface portions 705, but is held at the same position by the biasing force of the spring member 761. Therefore, when a large load is applied to the movable member 750 when the player performs a pressing operation, the movable member 750 retreats against the biasing force of the spring member 761 to absorb the same load. It will be done. Thus, not only the protection of the movable member 750 but also the protection of the operation unit 701 are realized.

Eighth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, the operation switch mechanism 502 (the cover body 530, the push button member 550, etc.) shown in the second embodiment is provided as operation means, and structural features related to the operation Although the second embodiment is similar to the second embodiment, the aspect of the effect (operation-corresponding effect) using the operation switch mechanism 502 is different from that of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration according to the operation corresponding rendering will be described focusing on the difference from the second embodiment.

  First, the electrical configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 42, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the structure (for example, delivery control apparatus 242 grade | etc.,) With a thin relation with the operation corresponding | compatible production.

  An MPU 802 is mounted on an audio lamp control board 801 provided in the audio lamp control device 800. The MPU 802 is a ROM 803 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 802 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 803 is executed. A certain RAM 804 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated.

  The MPU 802 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 802, and a position detection sensor 557 as an operation detection unit provided in the operation switch mechanism 502 is connected. When the operation switch mechanism 502 (the cover body 530 or the push button member 550) is operated, the detection information (detection signal) is input to the sound lamp control device 800, and operated by the MPU 802 of the sound lamp control device 800. It is possible to understand the facts that were That is, the voice lamp control device 800 and the position detection sensor 557 have a function as a monitoring unit that monitors the presence or absence of the operation.

  When the display control device 410 is connected to the output side of the MPU 802 and the operation switch mechanism 502 is operated while the operation is valid, the operation is received by the sound lamp control device 800. The command indicating that is sent from the voice lamp control device 800 to the display control device 410. The MPU 802 of the display control device 410 recognizes that the operation has been performed by receiving the command.

  The stoppers 540 and 560 provided in the operation switch mechanism 502 are connected to the output side of the MPU 802. These stopper devices 540 and 560 are configured to be switched between the blocking state and the permitting state according to the presence or absence of the drive signal from the audio lamp control device 800.

  That is, in the second embodiment, the display stopper 410 is electrically connected to the cover stopper device 540 and the button stopper device 560 as the operation restricting means, and the position detection sensor 557 as the operation detection means. However, in the present embodiment, the various components 540, 557, and 560 are electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 800 (specifically, the audio lamp control board 801), and the electrical configuration according to the operation response presentation is The control subject is changed from the display control device 410 to the audio lamp control device 800.

  The MPU 802 receives presentation commands (variation start command, type command, stop display command, jackpot start command, jackpot end command, etc.) output from the main control device 162, and analyzes those commands or based on the commands A predetermined arithmetic processing is performed to execute various controls for presentation and notification.

  The MPU 802 uses various areas provided in the ROM 803 and the RAM 804 to execute various processes relating to the operation-corresponding effect.

  As various areas provided in the ROM 803, for example, various table storage areas 811 are set. The various table storage area 811 is an area in which a table or the like for determining whether or not to perform the operation corresponding to rendering based on the change start command and the hold command input from the main control device 162 is stored.

  As various areas provided in the RAM 804, a command storage area 821 for storing a command input from the main control device 162, various counter areas 822 for specifying the start / end timing of various effects, the number of operations, etc. It has various flag storage areas 823 for storing information etc. for specifying the effect pattern at each variable display time (each game time), and a hold information storage area 824 for storing hold information in time series. .

  The holding information storage area 824 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to be able to store one piece of holding information for each area. The hold information stored in each of the areas Rc1 to Rc8 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when the game play is started. Specifically, the data of the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the second area Rc2 → the first area Rc1, the third area Rc3 → the second area Rc2, the fourth area Rc4 → the third area Rc3 ... eighth Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the holding ball storage area of the main controller 162, the upper operation opening storage area and the lower operation opening storage area are provided separately, but in the holding information storage area 824 of the voice lamp control device 800. The hold information is collectively stored in time series regardless of the place of entry.

  In the present embodiment, in accordance with the contents of the hold information corresponding to the game times to be executed later, whether or not the operation corresponding to the operation is determined is determined. Here, first, the process according to the operation corresponding presentation performed by the main control device 162 will be described. The various processes executed by main controller 162 are basically the same as the processes described in the first embodiment and the like, and the description of these similar processes will be used.

  In step S104 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) of the main controller 162, the winning process for the operation opening is performed. Hereinafter, the winning process for the operation opening will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Prize process for operation port>
In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) in the upper actuation opening 83a based on whether or not a prize detection flag for the upper actuation opening is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM 404. The prize detection flag is a flag stored in the various flag storage area when a prize for the upper operation port 83a is detected in the monitoring process of step S101.

  If it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, if a detection signal indicating that a winning has occurred in the upper operation port 83a is received, the process proceeds to step S1502, and three payouts of gaming balls are paid out to the payout device 224 Set the prize ball command to get it out.

  In the subsequent step S1503, external signal setting processing is performed to output information indicating that the gaming ball has won in the upper operation opening 83a to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side. Thus, the hole computer HC recognizes that a winning on the upper operation port 83a has occurred.

  After that, in step S1504, the value stored in the pending number storage area of the pending area for the upper actuation port is read out, and the number of start pending storages pending and stored in the pending area is set. Also called the number of pending storage). Thereafter, in step S1505, information acquisition processing for storing the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the like is performed, and the present winning processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that the gaming ball has not won the upper actuation opening 83a, the process proceeds to step S1506. In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the winning detection flag for the lower operation port is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 404. The prize detection flag is a flag that is stored in the various flag storage area when a prize for the lower operation port 83b is detected in the monitoring process of step S101.

  If it is determined that the same prize detection flag is stored, that is, if the gaming ball receives a detection signal indicating that a winning has occurred in the lower operation opening 83b, the process proceeds to step S1507, and the payout device 224 receives the gaming ball. Set the winning ball command to pay out 4 pieces. The prize ball command set in steps S1502 and S1507 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process (see FIG. 15) of the normal process.

  In the subsequent step S1508, external signal setting processing is performed to output information indicating that the gaming ball has won in the lower operation opening 83b to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side. Thus, the hole computer HC recognizes that a winning on the lower operation port 83b has occurred.

  After that, in step S1509, the value stored in the pending number storage area of the pending area for the lower actuation port is read out, and the number of start pending storages pending and stored in the pending area is set. Also called the number of pending storage). Thereafter, information acquisition processing is performed in step S1505, and the present winning processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in both the processes of steps S1501 and S1506, that is, when it is determined that the gaming ball has not won in any of the upper operation opening 83a and the lower operation opening 83b, the actual winning process is performed as it is. Finish.

  Here, the information acquisition process of step S1505 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Information acquisition process>
In the information acquisition process, it is first determined in step S1601 whether or not the start pending storage number N set in step S1504 or step S1509 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). If the start pending storage number N has reached the upper limit value, the present information acquisition process is ended as it is. If the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the number of start pending storage numbers for the corresponding result display area pending in step S1602 While incrementing N by one, the value stored in the total reserve number storage area at step S1603 (hereinafter, referred to as the common reserve number CRN) is incremented by one.

  In the following step S1604, each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS, etc. updated in the above step S103 is used as a free storage area In the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages incremented by one in step S1602 described above.

  That is, when the number of start pending storages for the upper operation port is set, each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS updated in the step S103. Is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the pending area for the upper actuation port, that is, in the pending area corresponding to the number of start pending storages for the upper actuation port incremented by 1 in step S1602.

  In addition, when the number of start pending memories for the lower operation port is set, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS, etc. updated in step S103. Is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the reserve area for the lower operation port, that is, in the reserve area corresponding to the number of start reserve memories for the lower operation port incremented by 1 in step S1602.

  In the subsequent steps S1605 and S1606, the voice lamp control device 800 and the display control device 410, which are control devices on the sub side (secondary side), are made to recognize that winning has occurred in the upper operation port 83a or the lower operation port 83b. A confirmation process of hold information and a setting process of a hold command, which are processes for executing an operation-responsive effect (instruction effect) according to a hold notice to be described later, are executed. Thereafter, when the winning detection flag is stored, the flag is erased, and the information acquisition process is ended.

  Although the hold command set in the setting process of the hold command in step S1606 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 800 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (see FIG. 15) of the normal process, the hold command Contains information on which of the winnings on the upper operating opening 83a and the lower operating opening 83b is based on the winning on the operating opening, and the voice lamp control device 800 receives the hold command. As a result, processing is performed to change the display in the holding lamp units 98 and 99 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

<About the process concerning the operation corresponding production>
Next, a process according to the operation corresponding presentation (pending advance notice) will be described. The processing for confirming the hold information and the setting processing for the hold command are set as the process according to the operation corresponding presentation, and the configuration for executing these respective processes is performed at the timing at which the winning of the operation openings 83a and 83b occurs. It has become.

  Hereinafter, the confirmation process of the hold information will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Confirmation processing of pending information>
In the confirmation process of the hold information, the number of start hold memories stored in each hold area of the hold ball storage area and the common hold number CRN stored in the total hold number storage area of the same hold ball storage area in step S1701 Are stored in the register of the MPU 402. Thereafter, in steps S1702 to S1706, it is confirmed whether or not the on-hold information acquired by the current prize contains information on jackpot winning.

  Specifically, first, at step S1702, information for determining a jackpot among the suspension information acquired at step S1505 based on the current winning on the upper operation port 83a or the lower operation port 83b, ie, the acquired jackpot random number counter Understand the value of C1.

  In the following step S1703, it is determined whether the low probability mode is set. Specifically, by determining whether the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 404, it is determined whether the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. If the mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1704, and the information for determining the big hit (value of the big hit random number counter C1) determined in step S1702 with reference to the pass / fail table for low probability mode Identify if it is included in the group. In the case of the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1705, and the information for the big hit determination (value of the big hit random number counter C1) determined in step S1702 is referred to as a big hit Identify if it is included in the configured information.

  After step S1704 or step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1706, and it is determined whether or not the information for determining the big hit (value of big hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S1702 corresponds to a big hit. If it is determined that the jackpot is won, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S1707, and the confirmation processing for the notice of the main suspension is ended.

  On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S1706, it progresses to Step S1708. In step S1708, out of the hold information acquired in step S1505 based on the current winning on the upper operation port 83a or the lower operation port 83b, information for out-of-reach determination, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 and the second The value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S1709, the reach determined in step S1708 is referred to with reference to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 403. It is specified whether information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the second variation type counter CS2) is included in the information set as reach winning.

  After the process of step S1709 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1710, and whether the information for reach determination (the value of reach random number counter C3 and the value of second variation type counter CS2) grasped at step S1708 corresponds to the reach occurrence It is determined whether or not. If it is possible to cope with the reach occurrence, the reach confirmation information is stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S1711, and then this confirmation processing is ended. On the other hand, when it does not correspond to reach | attainment generation | occurrence | production, this confirmation process is complete | finished as it is.

<Pending command setting process>
Next, the setting process of the hold command will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the setting process of the hold command, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, thereby determining the big hit in the confirmation process (FIG. 45) for the previous hold notification. It is determined whether the information has been identified as corresponding to a jackpot win. If the jackpot information is stored, the process advances to step S 1802 to set a jackpot handling hold command. The setting of the command and the setting of various commands described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 404.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1801, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot information is not stored in the register of the MPU 402, the process proceeds to step S1803, and whether reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 402 It is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is specified as corresponding to the reach occurrence in the confirmation process (FIG. 45) for the last notice for suspension by determining. If reach occurrence information is stored, an off-reach response hold command is set in step S1804. If reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete-off response hold command is set in step S1805.

  When setting the hold command in steps S1802, S1804 and S1805, the fluctuation display time is determined with reference to the stored value of the big hit type counter C2, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, etc., and the fluctuation display is performed. Information on time is stored in the pending command. The hold command set in this manner is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 800 and the display control device 410, and the control devices 410 and 800 can grasp the fluctuation display mode etc. of the symbol based on the hold command. .

  After executing the command setting process of any one of step S1802, step S1804 and step S1805, in step S1806, a process of setting information on the number of pending in the pending command is executed. As such processing, specifically, the information of the set suspension command is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and information indicating that itself is the suspension command or a suspension command for some of the bits In addition to information on the type of, information on the number of pending can be set. In this case, in step S1806, first, the information on the pending number stored in the register of the MPU 402 in step S1801 in the pending information confirmation process (FIG. 45) immediately before is read, and thereafter, in the pending command already set. Information on the read pending number is stored for the pending number of information bits by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. Thus, with respect to the hold command set in the process of any one of steps S1802, S1804 and S1805, information for specifying the number of the hold information corresponding to the hold command. Will be included. After the process of step S1806 described above in detail is executed, the pending command setting process is ended.

  The hold command including the information on the hold number in step S1806 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 800 by the external output process of step S201 in the next normal process (FIG. 15). The voice lamp control device 800 specifies that the hold information has increased by receiving the hold command.

  It should be noted that how to set the hold command is paraphrased such as whether or not the jackpot is won by the hold command in the voice lamp control device 800, the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot win, the presence or absence of reach when the jackpot is not won, etc. For example, it is optional as long as it can specify the variation display mode of the symbol. For example, the combination of the jackpot response hold command, the outreach reach hold command, and the completely outset hold command is individually set corresponding to each hold number, and in the hold command setting process, the hold information confirmation process (FIG. It is also possible to select one hold command according to the confirmation result in 45).

<Process on the hold notice performed by the MPU 802 of the voice lamp control device 800>
Next, the process concerning the suspension notice performed by the MPU 802 of the audio lamp control device 800 will be described. The processes executed by the MPU 802 of the audio lamp control device 800 are roughly classified into a hold command handling process and a process for an operation-ready effect (eg, setting process for command effect).

<Hold command handling process>
First, the pending command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the pending command handling process, it is first determined in step S1901 whether a pending command has been received from the main control device 162 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, this pending command handling process is ended.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S 1902, the received hold command is analyzed to specify the information on the hold number given to the hold command, and the specified information is used as the erase counter provided in the various counter areas 822 of the RAM 804. Set

  In the following step S1903, the hold information (specifically, pass / fail information, pattern) in the hold information storage area 824 of the RAM 804 (specifically, the youngest area among the areas where the hold information is not stored in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8) The variable display mode of, the stop display mode of the symbol, etc.) is set, and this pending command handling process is ended.

  As already described, the hold information storage area 824 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to be able to store 1 piece of hold information for each area. The hold information stored in each of the areas Rc1 to Rc8 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side by receiving a shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when the game play is started. Specifically, the data of the first area Rc1 is cleared, and the second area Rc2 → the first area Rc1, the third area Rc3 → the second area Rc2, the fourth area Rc4 → the third area Rc3 ... eighth Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. In the storage ball storage area of the main controller 162, the upper operation port storage area Ra and the lower operation port storage area Rb are separately provided, but the storage information storage area 824 of the voice lamp control device 800. In the above, the pending information is stored together in time series regardless of the entry destination.

  In the present embodiment, the operation response effect is executed based on the hold information specified in the hold command corresponding process. In this operation-responsive effect, the player is instructed to issue a command to execute a specific operation, and based on the fact that the operation is performed, the further operation-responsive effect is executed in the subsequent game rounds. It is one of the features. Hereinafter, the setting process for executing the command effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Setting processing for command effects>
In the command effect setting process, first, at step S2001, it is determined whether or not a change start command has been received from main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the setting processing for the main effect production is ended.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether or not an instruction effect is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the command effect execution flag is stored in the various flag storage area 823 of the RAM 804. The command effect execution flag is a flag stored in the various flag storage area 823 at the timing when the execution of the command effect is actually determined.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the setting process for the command effect is ended as it is in order to avoid duplication of the command effect. On the other hand, when negative determination is carried out at step S2002, it progresses to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether the fluctuation start command received this time is a jackpot-corresponding fluctuation start command. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the setting process for the main effect production is ended.

  On the other hand, when negative determination is carried out at step S2003, it progresses to step S2004. In step S2004, it is determined whether the fluctuation start command received this time corresponds to the super reach. If a negative determination is made in step S2004, that is, if it is determined that it is a game play that can not secure a sufficient variable display time to execute an instruction effect, the setting processing for this instruction effect is ended as it is .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot-compliant next-on hold information by referring to the hold information storage area 824 of the RAM 804.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, with reference to the hold information storage area 824, it is determined whether reach-ready hold information exists prior to the jackpot-ready hold information. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, the command effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2006, that is, if it is determined that there is no reach-ready hold information prior to the jackpot-ready hold information, then the jackpot-ready instruction effect lottery process is executed in step S2007. Do.

  In the jackpot-corresponding instruction effect lottery process, with reference to the lottery table for the jackpot-corresponding instruction effect stored in the various table storage areas 811 of the ROM 803 and the value of the lottery counter of the various counter areas 822 of the RAM 804, It is determined whether or not to perform command effects.

  Returning to the description of step S2005, if a negative determination is made in step S2005, that is, if it is determined that there is nothing corresponding to the jackpot in the subsequent hold information, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, it is determined whether there is only one reach response (more specifically, super reach response) in the subsequent hold information. In this process, referring to the hold information storage area 824 of the RAM 804, when there is a plurality of hold information corresponding to reach, a negative determination is made if there is no hold information corresponding to super reach, and this command as it is The effect setting process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009. In step S2009, the command effect drawing process corresponding to the deviation is executed.

  In the out-of-order corresponding instruction effect lottery process, the out-of-order corresponding selection lottery table stored in the various table storage area 811 of the ROM 803 and the value of the lottery counter of the various counter area 822 of the RAM 804 are referred to. , Decide whether or not to perform a command effect.

  After each lottery process of steps S2007 and S2009 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2010, and it is determined whether or not the player has won by the lottery of the instruction effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, that is, if a lottery for command effect is made, the setting processing for this command effect is ended.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2010, a setting process of a command effect period is performed in the following step S2011. In the setting process, first, the command effect preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 823 of the RAM 804. As a result, an effect corresponding to a repetitive operation to be described later is implemented.

  In the process of step S2011, referring to the effect period setting table stored in the various table storage area 811 of the ROM 803 in combination with the storage of the flag described above, which one of the subsequent game times is the target of the instruction effect Decide what to do.

  More specifically, when performing jackpot-corresponding instruction effects, all game times until reaching at least the jackpot-corresponding game times are targeted for instruction effects, but apparently they follow the suspension information of the jackpot corresponding Even in the game round according to the hold information to be displayed, display is made to make the player recognize as if it is the target of the instruction effect. In addition, when the command effect corresponding to the deviation is performed, all the game times until reaching the game times corresponding to the super reach are targeted for the command effect. Details of the setting of the effect period will be described later.

  After setting the command effect period in step S2011, the command updating process is executed in step S2012, and the setting process for the command effect is ended. Specifically, when executing the command effect, processing is performed to add information indicating that the command effect is to be performed and information regarding the execution period of the command effect to the fluctuation start command.

  In the display control device 410, by receiving the variation start command updated through the above processing, it is possible to grasp whether or not the command effect is performed and the execution period thereof.

  Here, the outline of the command effect performed in the present embodiment will be described. In the command effect, the player is urged to continuously hit the push button member 550 of the operation switch mechanism 502 until the predetermined number of times set in advance is reached at the game turn which triggers the command effect. Then, the player is given the right to challenge the operation of pressing the cover body 530 which constitutes the operation switch mechanism 502 in the subsequent game round by satisfying the operation condition. At this time, a message prompting the operation of the cover 530 is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94, and when the jackpot is won, the operation of the cover 530 is enabled. On the other hand, when the operation of the prescribed number of times is not performed in the game turn which is a trigger of the command effect, the command effect in the subsequent game turns is invalidated (cancelled).

  Hereinafter, various processes (processes corresponding to continuous operation and processes corresponding to specific one-shot operation) executed by the voice lamp control device 800 when the command effect is won will be described, and then the command effect including the display content on the display screen 94a will be supplementarily described. Do.

  First, the continuous operation handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The continuous operation handling process is a process that is executed at the start of a game run that triggers an instruction effect based on the determination that the instruction effect is to be performed in the setting process shown in FIG. 48. .

<Continuous operation handling process>
In the continuous operation handling process, it is first determined in step S2101 whether or not the current game play is a game play serving as a trigger for command effects. Specifically, it is determined whether the command effect preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 823 of the RAM 804. When a negative determination is made in step S2101, the continuous shooting operation handling process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmation judging is carried out at Step S2101, it progresses to Step S2102. In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the continuous operation waiting state is set. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a continuous operation waiting flag described later is stored in the continuous operation waiting flag storage area of the various flags storage area 823 in the RAM 804. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the preparation process of steps S2103 to S2105 is performed.

  In step S2103, it is determined whether it is the suggestion start timing of the continuous operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a predetermined timing after the change display mode of the symbols on the display screen 94a is switched from the normal change display to the reach display.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2103, the continuous shooting operation handling process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the process advances to step S2104 to perform setting processing of the continuous operation waiting state. Specifically, the continuous operation waiting flag is stored in the continuous operation waiting flag storage area of the various flags storage area 425 in the RAM 804. After that, the continuous shooting operation handling process is finished.

  After performing the process of step S2104, the setting process for the continuous operation suggestion (for continuous operation prompting) is executed in the subsequent step S2105, and the continuous operation handling process is ended. In the setting process for the continuous operation suggestion, a process for outputting a continuous operation suggesting voice (continuous operation prompting voice) is executed. As a result, the speaker unit 27 outputs a voice (for example, “pressing a button repeatedly!”) Indicating (prompting) the continuous operation.

  Although the sound lamp control device 800 is configured to suggest a continuous operation by sound, the display control device 410 repeatedly operates the operation switch mechanism 502 (specifically, the push button member 550) a plurality of times. Thus, the display control is performed so that the image for suggesting the continuous operation (image for requesting the continuous operation) for prompting the player is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94. For example, the character image displayed at the center of the screen is changed so as to correspond to the indication of the continuous operation, and a character such as "Please continuously hit the button" is displayed as the continuous operation suggestion image. Ru.

  Returning to the description of step S2102, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2012, that is, if it is determined that the user is in a continuous operation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, it is determined based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 557 whether or not the push button member 550 has been operated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the continuous-shot operation handling process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the process advances to step S2107 to execute operation acceptance suggesting processing. By executing the operation acceptance suggestion process, a sound effect is output from the speaker unit 27 indicating that the operation has been accepted.

  After executing the process of step S2107, the process advances to step S2108 to set a continuous operation reception command. The display control device 410 can grasp that the operation of the push button member 550 has been effectively accepted by receiving the continuous operation accepting command.

  Although the voice lamp control device 800 is configured to indicate that the operation has been effectively received by voice, the display control device 410 has effectively received the operation along with the suggestion by the voice. Display control is performed such that an image to be suggested is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94.

  In the following step S2109, the number of times the operation of the push button member 550 performed during the effective period is received (hereinafter referred to as the number of operation receptions or the number of operations) is a predetermined number set in advance (10 in this embodiment) It is determined whether it has reached). Specifically, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2106 described above, the value of the operation number counter provided in the various counter areas 822 of the RAM 804 is updated ("1" is added one by one). In the process of step S2109, it is determined whether the number of operations has reached the specified number of times with reference to the value of the operation number counter. The operation number counter is reset (“0” clear) when the command effect is finished, not when the valid period is finished.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2109, that is, if the number of operations has reached the prescribed number, the process proceeds to step S2110. In step S2110, the command effect continuation flag is set in the various flag storage area 823 of the RAM 804. By setting this command effect continuation flag, a specific one-shot operation corresponding effect for the cover body 530 is executed in the subsequent game rounds.

  After the process of step S2110 is executed, the instruction effect preparation flag is erased in step S2111, and the process of canceling the continuous operation waiting state (erasing of the continuous operation waiting flag) is executed in step S2112, and this continuous operation is performed. End the response process.

  Returning to the description of step S2109, if a negative determination is made in step S2109, that is, if it is determined that the number of operations has not reached the specified number, the process proceeds to step S2113. In step S2113, it is determined whether it is the reception completion timing of the continuous operation. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the effective period of the operation. If a negative determination is made in step S2113, the continuous-shot operation handling process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2113, the process proceeds to step S2114. In step S2114, command effect cancellation processing is executed. In the command effect cancellation process, on the condition that the specified number of operations have not been performed, a process of invalidating the command effect which should have been executed in the subsequent game times is performed. Specifically, an instruction effect cancellation flag that forms a pair with the instruction effect continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 823 of the RAM 804. The command effect cancellation flag is held over the subsequent game rounds in which the command effect was originally intended to be executed, that is, over the period in which the command effect is supposed to be executed, and after the period has elapsed It is erased.

  While the command effect cancel flag is stored in the various flag storage area 823, the setting process for the command effect shown in FIG. 48 is canceled, and various conditions for performing the command effect (for example, various conditions of steps S2004 to S2009) Even in the case where the above can be satisfied, the command effect is not executed.

  After the process of step S2114 is executed, the instruction effect preparation flag and the continuous operation waiting flag are erased in each process of step S2111 and step S2112, and the continuous operation corresponding process is finished.

  When the continuation condition of the instruction effect is satisfied by the player's repetitive operation in the repetitive operation corresponding process described above, the effect according to the specific one-shot operation is executed in the subsequent game round.

  Next, the specific one-shot operation handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Specific single operation handling process>
In the specific one-shot operation handling process, first, in the process of step S2201, it is determined whether or not it is a game round concerning command effects. Specifically, the determination is performed based on whether or not the command effect continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 823 of the RAM 804.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present specified single-operation handling process is ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202. In step S2202, it is determined whether it is time to start a suggestion (prompt) of a specific one-shot operation.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, the process advances to step S2203 to execute setting processing for specific one-shot suggestion. In the setting process for the specific one-shot operation suggestion, a process for outputting a sound (for example, “press a plate!”) To the effect that the specific one-shot operation is suggested from the speaker unit 27 is performed.

  Note that the display control device 410 is also configured to monitor whether or not the suggestion start timing is reached, and when the suggestion start timing is reached, a message suggesting a specific one-shot operation on the display screen 94a ( For example, display control is executed such that an image such as "Push the plate!" Is displayed.

  These voice or image messages are output until a preset suggestion period is over in game times in which the specific one-shot operation is permitted, or until the specific one-shot operation by the player is completed, and the specific one-shot operation is permitted. The game times that have not been played will be output until the preset suggestion period has passed.

  After the process of step S2203 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2204, and it is determined whether the game time is a game time for which a specific one-shot operation is permitted. If a negative determination is made in step S2204, this means that it is a game run in which the specific one-shot operation can not actually be performed, and the present specified one-shot operation handling processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205, and movement restriction release processing of the cover body 530 is executed. Specifically, by outputting a drive signal to the cover stopper device 540 to move the stopper piece 541 to the release position, the movement restriction of the cover body 530 is released. As a result, the specific operation is permitted from then on over a predetermined operation valid period (a period in which the specific one-shot operation is suggested).

  Thereafter, in step S2206, a setting process in the specific one-shot operation waiting state is executed, and the specific one-shot operation handling process is ended. In the setting process of the specific one-shot operation waiting state, the specific one-shot operation waiting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 823 of the RAM 804. Thus, in the state where the specific one-shot operation waiting flag is stored, the specific one-shot operation is permitted, and such a state is continued until the effective period of the specific one-shot operation has elapsed.

  Returning to the description of step S2202, if a negative determination is made in step S2202, that is, if it is determined that it is not a suggestion start timing of a specific one-shot operation, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether or not a specific one-shot operation waiting state is set. That is, it is determined whether the specific one-shot operation waiting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 823 of the RAM 804 or not.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2207, the present specified single-operation handling process is ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, the process advances to step S2208, and it is determined based on detection information from the position detection sensor 557 whether a specific one-shot operation has been performed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, that is, if it is determined that the specific one-shot operation has been performed within the effective period, the process proceeds to step S2209. In step S2209, an operation acceptance suggestion process is executed. Specifically, processing for outputting a sound effect indicating that a specific one-shot operation has been received from the speaker unit 27 is executed.

  Then, in step S2210, a specific one-shot operation reception command is set. The specific one-shot operation reception command set in this manner is transmitted to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 can recognize that the specific one-shot operation has been performed by receiving the specific one-shot operation reception command, and by receiving the command, the fact that the operation has been effectively received on the display screen 94 a Processing for displaying a message (for example, “COMPLETE!”) Of

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, if it is determined that a specific one-shot operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S2211. In step S2211, it is determined whether it is time to finish accepting a specific one-shot operation. If a negative determination is made in step S2211, the specific one-time operation handling process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2211, or after a specific one-shot operation reception command is set in step S2210, the process proceeds to step S2212. In step S2212, processing is performed to restore the operation switch mechanism 502 to the normal state. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the cover stopper device 540 is stopped. As a result, the cover stopper device 540 is switched from the release state to the blocking state. Although illustration is omitted, after the return processing is executed in step S2212, the specific one-shot operation waiting flag is erased, and the present specified one-shot operation correspondence processing is ended. And when the said game time is the last game time concerning instruction production, it erase | eliminates also about the said instruction production continuation flag.

<Display mode when executing command effect>
Here, with reference to FIG. 51, a display mode on the display screen 94a at the time of executing the command effect will be described. FIG. 51 is a schematic view showing a display mode on the display screen 94a.

  When a game run serving as a trigger for command effect starts, first, as shown in FIG. 51A, each symbol row starts fluctuating display at the central position of the display screen 94a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the variable display of the left and right symbol rows is stopped and the display shifts to reach display. The development to super reach is decided in the game session which becomes the opportunity of command production, the character image (in the present embodiment, the character image imitating the girl) corresponding to the super reach is displayed in the center of the display screen 94a. While being displayed, the symbol row which has been displayed at the center of the display screen 94a is reduced and displayed at the top of the display screen 94a (see FIG. 51 (c)). About the display mode to this, it is the same as that at the time of the normal super reach execution in which instruction production is not performed.

  Thereafter, below the character image, a message prompting continuous hitting of the push button member 550 (specifically, “double pressing a button!”) Is displayed. In addition to this, the speaker unit 27 outputs a sound for prompting the same operation.

  Thereafter, the pressing operation of the push button member 320 by the player is repeated within the effective period of the continuous shooting operation, whereby the operation acceptance number display image etc. appearing in the lower part of the display screen 94a instead of the message is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (e), the light emitting portion of the meter unit constituting the operation acceptance frequency display image increases in accordance with the operation frequency, and the character image displayed on the display screen 94a is displayed. An effect is added so as to surround the character, and as the number of operations increases, the effect changes so as to increase.

  The continuous shooting operation is valid until the timing immediately before the end of the game run, and the number of times of operation reaches a predetermined number set in advance, so that the player at the next game play is in the center of the display screen 94a. The command to be executed is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51 (f), a message indicating that the operation of the cover body 530 should be completed within a predetermined number of times in the subsequent game rounds (for example, "I hit a jack if I pressed the dish within 4 turns") Is displayed. The number of trials specified by this message is determined in accordance with the number of hold information stored at the start of the game number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (f) → FIG. 51 (g), after the variable display of all the symbol rows is finished and the symbol combination corresponding to the out result is displayed, it shifts to the next game time, The variation display of all symbol rows is started again.

  Here, on the condition that the number of times of operation of the push button member 550 relating to the continuous hitting effect mentioned above has reached the specified number, a message (for example, Is displayed, and in addition to this, the speaker unit 27 also outputs an audio prompting the user to operate the cover body 530.

  When the player who has heard and listened to this message tries to operate the cover body 530, the cover body 530 can be pushed down if the game is actually permitted to operate. However, the cover body 530 can not always be pushed in, and the game body does not move even if the cover body 530 is pressed in the game time when the operation of the cover body 530 is not permitted. That is, it can not be known until the user tries to operate by touching the cover 530 as to whether or not the cover 530 can actually be pushed.

  As described above, the cover stopper device 540 for determining whether to operate the cover body 530 is built in the upper bulging portion 500 and can not be viewed at least from the front of the gaming machine. For this reason, it is impossible for the player to grasp the availability of the operation from the appearance of the operation switch mechanism 502 when the operation of the cover body 530 is prompted.

  When the end timing of the operation suggestion in the game turn comes without the cover body 530 moving, a message (for example, “Yet more!”) Indicating that the instruction effect is continued in the next game turn is displayed. Ru.

  After repeating such a garbled effect, when the game time corresponding to the big hit is reached, the operation of the cover body 530 by the player is permitted, and the cover body 530 moves to the operation completion position, and the display screen 94a is displayed. A message (for example, "COMPLETE!") Indicating that the operation has been accepted effectively is displayed. Thus, the player is notified that the jackpot has been won, and thereafter, when the variable display of all the symbols is stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot is displayed.

  In addition, about the message which urges operation of the cover body 530, it is the structure displayed while all the symbols are continuing the fluctuation display, ie, before the presence or absence of the transition to a reach display is decided. This gives the player the impression that the possibility of winning a jackpot is low even if the user is urged to operate the cover body 530 when it is decided not to shift to reach display, and the same player It is a device for suppressing having an image that it is only useless to challenge the operation.

  Next, the relationship between the instruction effect and the hold information will be described. As for the instruction effect, the execution conditions are different between the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot exists and the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot does not exist. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, a case where command effect is executed and a case where command effect is avoided will be illustrated. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram for explaining the case where the instruction effect is executed under the situation where the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot exists, and FIG. 53 is the situation where the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot does not exist 54 is a schematic diagram for explaining the case where the command effect is executed, and FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram for explaining the case where the command effect is avoided.

<Example of when the command effect is performed and when it is avoided>
First, with reference to FIG. 52, an example will be described in which the command effect is executed under the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is present.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52A, four hold information items are stored in the hold information storage area 824 of the RAM 804. Specifically, the hold information stored in the first area Rc1 of the hold information storage area 824 corresponds to the super reach (outlier result), and the hold is stored in the second area Rc2 and the third area Rc3. The information corresponds to complete omission (outlier result), and the hold information stored in the fourth area Rc4 corresponds to big hit (hit result).

  With regard to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot stored in the fourth area Rc4, when the game round concerning the hold information concerned is executed, reach display (it is unknown whether it is normal reach / super reach) is always executed Ru. Therefore, a plurality of pieces of information corresponding to reach display exist in the hold information, and the execution condition of the instruction effect is not satisfied. Then, the above execution condition is not satisfied until at least the hold information pertaining to the reach display stored earlier deviates from the hold information storage area 824.

  Further, the game times executed under the situation shown in FIG. 52 (a) correspond to complete removal. Therefore, there is no reason for the game play to trigger instruction production in the first place.

  When the game times corresponding to complete removal shown in FIG. 52 (a) are ended, the hold information stored in each of the areas Rc1 to Rc4 is shifted, and the hold information stored in the first area Rc1 before the shift is displayed. It will move to the execution area. The hold information transferred to the execution area corresponds to super reach. That is, in the game session, the period for starting the command effect (performing the continuous hitting effect) can be secured, and one of the execution conditions of the command effect is satisfied.

  At this time, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824 includes one hold information corresponding to the jackpot, and in addition, any hold information relating to reach indication (normal reach and super reach) is present. Not. Therefore, the stored hold information is also matched with the execution condition of the command effect. As a result, it is possible to make a lottery for determining whether or not to perform command effects. The following description exemplifies a case in which an instruction effect is won in this lottery.

  In the game time shown in FIG. 52 (b), a super reach is executed, but the operation of the push button member 550 is prompted so as to interrupt the same effect while the effect relating to the super reach is being executed. It will be done. Then, on the condition that the number of times the operation of the push button member 550 has been received during the operation prompting has reached the prescribed number, the continuation of the instruction effect in the subsequent game rounds is determined.

  In addition, about the continuous command effect, it is possible to perform a command effect not only for 1 game time but for a plurality of game times. Here, at the timing at which the above-described operation prompting is started, the target of execution of the instruction effect for the holding information stored in the holding information storage area 824 is selected.

  In FIG. 52 (b), before the prompting is performed, ball entry to the operation opening 83 occurs, and new hold information is stored in the fourth area Rc4 based on the ball entry. For this reason, the target of the command effect is to be the game time according to the hold information stored in the first area Rc1 to the third area Rc3 or the game according to the hold information stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 It will be selected whether it is the number of times. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 52, as a result of the above selection, the game times relating to the suspension information stored in each of the areas Rc1 to Rc4 are selected so as to be the target of the command effect.

  Note that, in practice, the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the third area Rc3, and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode before the play of the game in the fourth area Rc4 is performed. Thus, when it transfers to opening-and-closing execution mode, instruction production will be completed there. Therefore, although apparently the game times applied to all the areas Rc1 to Rc4 are displayed for the purpose of the command effect (see FIG. 51 (f)), they are actually stored in the fourth area Rc4. The command effect is not executed in the game time according to the hold information.

  The on-hold information stored in each of the areas Rc1 to Rc4 is shifted based on the end of the game round for super reach shown in FIG. 52 (b). As a result, the hold information corresponding to the complete removal, which has been stored in the first area Rc1 until then, moves to the execution area, and the game cycle for the complete removal starts (see FIG. 52C).

  In the game session completely disengaged, the operation of the cover body 530 is prompted while all symbol rows are displaying variable. However, for such a game session, the operation completely corresponds to the operation and the operation of the cover body 530 is not permitted. Therefore, even if the player attempts to operate the cover body 530, the cover body 530 is not displaced toward the operation completed position.

  When the game round corresponding to the complete removal shown in FIG. 52 (c) ends, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824 shifts again. As a result, the hold information corresponding to the complete removal, which has been stored in the first area Rc1 until then, moves to the execution area, and the game cycle for the complete removal starts again.

  Although the player is urged to operate the cover body 530 also in this game play, since the operation of the cover body 530 is not permitted, the player operates the cover body 530 in the same manner as the previous game play. Even if an attempt is made, the cover body 530 is not displaced toward the operation completion position.

  When the game round corresponding to the complete removal shown in FIG. 52 (d) ends, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824 shifts. As a result, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first area Rc1 until that time moves to the execution area, and the game round for the jackpot starts (see FIG. 52E).

  Also in this game session, the operation of the cover body 530 is prompted while all the symbol rows are performing variable display. That is, at the time when the request for the operation of the cover body 530 is performed, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the reach display, and thus the complete display shown in FIGS. 52 (c) and 52 (d) from the display content on the display screen 94a. It is difficult to distinguish it from the corresponding game times. This is a device for preventing the player's sense of expectation from being reduced prematurely by making it easy to grasp the propriety of each hold information immediately after the prompting when the instruction effect is executed.

  In addition, even in the game round concerning the suspension information corresponding to the big hit, it is possible to impress the player as if there is room for the prompting / permission to be performed as to the suspension information stored in the first area Rc1 as well. The player's sense of expectation can be suitably enhanced by leaving a room for winning the jackpot and allowing the operation of the cover body 530, even if it is other than the last game time required for the effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, an example will be described in which the command effect is executed under the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is present.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53 (a), four hold information are stored in the hold information storage area 824 of the RAM 804. Specifically, the hold information stored in the first area Rc1 and the fourth area Rc4 of the hold information storage area 824 corresponds to the super reach (disengagement result), and in the second area Rc2 and the third area Rc3. The stored hold information corresponds to a complete removal (a removal result).

  That is, in the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824, there exist a plurality of items corresponding to the reach display, and the execution condition of the instruction effect is not satisfied. Then, the above execution condition is not satisfied until at least the hold information pertaining to the reach display stored earlier deviates from the hold information storage area 824.

  Further, the game times executed under the situation shown in FIG. 53 (a) correspond to complete removal. Therefore, there is no reason for the game play to trigger instruction production in the first place.

  When the game times corresponding to complete removal shown in FIG. 53 (a) are ended, the hold information stored in each of the areas Rc1 to Rc4 is shifted, and the hold information stored in the first area Rc1 before the shift is displayed. It will move to the execution area. The hold information transferred to the execution area corresponds to super reach. That is, in the game session, the period for starting the command effect (performing the continuous hitting effect) can be secured, and one of the execution conditions of the command effect is satisfied.

  At this time, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824 includes one hold information corresponding to the super reach, and in addition, there is any hold information related to reach indication (normal reach and super reach). I did not. Therefore, the stored hold information is also matched with the execution condition of the command effect. As a result, it is possible to make a lottery for determining whether or not to perform command effects. The following description exemplifies a case in which an instruction effect is won in this lottery.

  In the game session shown in FIG. 53 (b), a super reach is executed, but the operation of the push button member 550 prompts the user to interrupt the same effect while the effect relating to the super reach is being executed. It will be done. Then, on the condition that the number of times of operation of the push button member 550 reaches the prescribed number during the period when the operation prompt is being performed, the continuation of the command effect in the subsequent game rounds is decided.

  In addition, about the continuous command effect, it is possible to perform a command effect not only for 1 game time but for a plurality of game times. Here, at the timing at which the above-described operation prompting is started, the target of execution of the instruction effect for the holding information stored in the holding information storage area 824 is selected.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (b), since the latest hold information corresponds to the super reach, there is no room for substantial selection, and the target of the command effect is the first area Rc1 to the third area Rc3. It is determined to be the game time according to the stored hold information.

  The hold information stored in each of the areas Rc1 to Rc3 is shifted based on the end of the game round for super reach shown in FIG. 53 (b). As a result, the hold information corresponding to the complete removal, which has been stored in the first area Rc1 until then, moves to the execution area, and the game cycle for the complete removal starts (see FIG. 53C).

  In the game session completely disengaged, the operation of the cover body 530 is prompted while all symbol rows are performing variable display. However, for such a game session, the operation completely corresponds to the operation and the operation of the cover body 530 is not permitted. Therefore, even if the player attempts to operate the cover body 530, the cover body 530 is not displaced to the operation completed position.

  When the game round corresponding to the complete removal shown in FIG. 53 (c) ends, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824 shifts again. As a result, the hold information corresponding to the complete removal, which has been stored in the first area Rc1 so far, moves to the execution area, and the game cycle for the complete removal is started again.

  Also in this gaming session, the player is prompted to operate the cover body 530, but the operation of the cover body 530 is not permitted. For this reason, even if the player attempts to operate the cover body 530, the cover body 530 is not displaced toward the operation completion position, as in the previous game.

  When the game round corresponding to the complete removal shown in FIG. 53 (d) ends, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824 shifts. As a result, the hold information corresponding to the super reach stored in the first area Rc1 until that time moves to the execution area, and the game round concerning the super reach is started (see FIG. 53 (e)).

  Also in this game session, the operation of the cover body 530 is prompted while all the symbol rows are performing variable display. At the time when the request for the operation of the cover body 530 is performed, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the reach display, so it is difficult to distinguish between completely out-of-play game times shown in FIGS. 52 (c) and 52 (d). It has become.

  However, even in this game play, the player is prompted to operate the cover body 530, but the operation of the cover body 530 is not permitted. Therefore, even if the player attempts to operate the cover body 530, the cover body 530 is not displaced toward the operation completion position, as in the previous game. That is, the command displayed on the display screen 94a is not completed, and a series of command effects are completed.

  If the winning of the jackpot is decided by the generation of the command effect, the game result becomes clear before the operation is performed, and even if the command effect is executed, the result can be easily specified. This can be a factor that hinders the player's desire to operate. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the instruction effect is executed both when there is an item corresponding to the jackpot in the withholding information stored in the withholding information storage area 824 and when there is no corresponding information. By making the configuration, it is avoided that the occurrence of command effect = jackpot is won. Accordingly, it is possible to give significance to trying the operation of the push button member 550 and the operation of the cover body 530 along the command effect, and it is possible to preferably improve the player's operating desire.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a case where the command effect is not performed will be illustrated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54A, three hold information items are stored in the hold information storage area 824 of the RAM 804. Specifically, the hold information stored in the first area Rc1 and the second area Rc2 of the hold information storage area 824 corresponds to complete removal (result) and the hold stored in the third area Rc3. The information corresponds to the super reach. That is, although there is nothing corresponding to the jackpot in the held information stored in the held information storage area 824, there is only one corresponding to the super reach, and the other held information corresponds to the reach display. Absent. Therefore, the stored holding information group satisfies the condition for executing the instruction effect.

  However, the game game corresponds to a big hit, and can not be a trigger for command effects. Therefore, among the conditions for executing the command effect, the condition concerning the game round serving as the execution opportunity is not satisfied, and the command effect is not executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54 (b), the pending information existing in the execution area corresponds to the super reach, and the conditions for triggering the command effect are satisfied.

  However, among the four pieces of hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824 of the RAM 804, the hold information stored in the second area Rc2 corresponds to the normal reach (outlier result) and is stored in the fourth area Rc4. The pending information corresponds to the jackpot. That is, the hold information corresponding to the normal reach exists prior to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot, and the condition for executing the command effect is not satisfied for the stored hold information group. Therefore, among the conditions for executing the command effect, the condition concerning the game round serving as the execution opportunity is not satisfied, and the command effect is not executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54 (c), four hold information items are stored in the hold information storage area 824 of the RAM 804. Specifically, the hold information stored in the first area Rc1 and the third area Rc3 of the hold information storage area 824 corresponds to complete removal (result) and the hold stored in the second area Rc2 The information corresponds to the normal reach (outlier result), and the hold information stored in the fourth area Rc4 corresponds to the super reach (outlier result). That is, although there is nothing corresponding to the jackpot in the held information stored in the held information storage area 824, there is only one corresponding to the super reach, but the held information corresponding to the super reach The pending information that exists prior to this corresponds to the normal reach. Therefore, the stored information group does not satisfy the condition for executing the command effect.

  In addition, about this game time completely corresponds, it can not become an opportunity of instruction production. Therefore, among the conditions for executing the command effect, the conditions concerning the game round serving as the execution opportunity are not satisfied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54 (d), three pieces of suspension information are stored in the suspension information storage area 824 of the RAM 804, and among the respective suspension information, only one suspension information corresponds to the super reach. Therefore, the stored holding information group satisfies the condition for executing the instruction effect.

  However, this game time corresponds to normal reach, and can not be a trigger for command effects. Therefore, among the conditions for executing the command effect, the condition concerning the game turn serving as the execution opportunity is not satisfied, and the command effect is not executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54 (e), as in the example shown in FIG. 54 (b), the pending information existing in the execution area corresponds to the super reach, and the conditions for triggering the command effect are ready. ing. However, as with the example shown in FIG. 54 (c), the stored holding information group does not satisfy the condition for executing the instruction effect. Therefore, the command effect is not executed.

  When the command effect is executed, the player can instantly grasp whether or not the cover body 530 moves from the touch when trying to operate the cover body 530. For this reason, it is immediately grasped | ascertained whether the game time which tried operation of the cover body 530 respond | corresponds to the big hit. As described above, when the game result becomes clear, the player's attention shifts from the game time to the next game time. For this reason, it is a factor that prevents the smooth progression of the command effect, that the game times for which the out-of-round result is fixed are delayed. Therefore, as described in each of the above-mentioned examples, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed by adding the absence of hold information corresponding to a plurality of reach displays in the hold information to various conditions concerning execution of the instruction effect. A smooth progression of instruction effects has been realized.

  In addition, when executing the command effect under the situation where the jackpot has not been won, the command effect is permitted on the condition that the game round executed at the end of the command effect corresponds to at least the super reach. Configuration. Thereby, the degree of expectation can be secured to a certain extent in at least the last game round corresponding to a series of command effects. As a result, even if the operation is performed according to the command effect, it is difficult to cause the inconvenience that the command effect is completed without increasing the expectation.

  In the configuration in which the command effect is performed in a plurality of subsequent game rounds based on the operation of the push button member 550, if the expectation is excessively concentrated on the last held information, the previous game is performed. It is assumed that the operation of the cover body 530 is difficult to be performed at one time. In the present embodiment, a device for suppressing the occurrence of such a problem is provided. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824 includes the one corresponding to the jackpot, and the execution of the command effect is determined. After the command effect is determined, the selection of the hold information to be the target of the command effect is performed.

  When the operation suggestion of the push button member 550 is performed, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the third area Rc3, and the hold information corresponding to the complete removal is stored in the fourth area Rc4.

  Here, whether the target of the command effect is to be the first area Rc1 to the third area Rc3 (see FIG. 55A) or the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 (see FIG. 55B) Is determined by lottery. That is, when the command effect is executed for a plurality of game times, it is possible to suppress that the expected degree in the last game time becomes extremely high compared to other game times. Thus, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by the possibility that all of the stored information stored at the time when the operation suggestion of the push button member 550 is performed can be the target of the command effect. ing.

  In the example shown in FIG. 55 (c), the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824 does not include the one corresponding to the jackpot. In this case, the selection of the target of the command effect is not performed.

  According to the embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

  By performing the repeated operation of the push button member 550 (hereinafter, referred to as “first specific operation”) until reaching the preset number of times, the specific one-shot operation of the cover body 530 in the later game round (hereinafter, “first 2) “specified operation” can be permitted. Thus, by using the first specific operation as a trigger for the second specific operation in the later game round, the relationship between the game rounds is strengthened through the operation switch mechanism 502, and integrated in a plurality of game rounds. It is possible to perform player participation type operation effects. This makes it possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous and draw the attention of the player across the game times.

  The restriction by the cover stopper device 540 is released based on the determination that the first specific operation has been performed, whereby the second specific operation is permitted. As described above, by making it possible to operate the target that can not be usually operated based on the first specific operation, the degree of attention to the operation itself can be suitably improved.

  More specifically, even if the first specific operation is performed, the second specific operation is not necessarily permitted, and it may be divided into a case where the second specific operation can be performed and a case where the second specific operation can not be performed. It is concealed so that it is difficult to judge from the appearance as to whether or not the second specific operation is permitted, so the player continues trying the second specific operation after the first specific operation (for example, the cover 530) Can not judge from the appearance whether the second specific operation is permitted or not. For this reason, the game of touching the cover body 530 and confirming whether or not the second specific operation is possible is realized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's sense of expectation for the second specific operation from being reduced prematurely, and it is possible to more preferably exhibit the attention level improvement effect described above.

  The second specific operation is permitted by performing the first specific operation. As a result, the displacement restriction of the cover body 530 is released, and it is possible to notify the player who actually attempted the second specific operation that a tactile change has occurred. By being able to operate the one whose operation has been structurally restricted up to that point, attention to the operation itself can be improved. Further, for example, as compared with a configuration in which the operation detection is restricted although the cover body 530 is displaced, attention to the operation itself can be easily increased.

  By performing the first specific operation, the second specific operation is permitted in the later game play. In this way, by using the first specific operation as a trigger for the second specific operation in the later game round, the relationship between the game rounds is strengthened through the operation means, and the player integrated in a plurality of game rounds It is possible to perform participatory operation effects. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to expect the effect of improving the player's attention level across the game times.

  Further, by performing the first specific operation and the second specific operation at different game times, a period required for the first specific operation, a period required for the second specific operation, a period for performing the switching, etc. It can be easily secured. In particular, considering that the first specific operation is performed in order to acquire the challenge right to the second specific operation, the first specific operation is given some degree of difficulty or complexity, and only if it is achieved. 2) It is preferable to be able to acquire the right of challenge to the specific operation. In this case, although the period required to complete the first specific operation is extended, even if such a period is secured by configuring the second specific operation to be performed in the later game round as described above, the second It is possible to avoid pressure on the period required for the specific operation and further the period for performing the switching.

  As described above, in the configuration where the second specifying operation in the subsequent game times may be permitted based on the first specifying operation, the first specifying operation is performed under a situation where it is not promised that the next game time will be executed. Even if the player performs the first specific operation, there is a high possibility that the player who has performed the first specific operation is not given the right to perform the second specific operation. This is harsh for the player who has performed the first identification operation in anticipation of the second identification operation.

  Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the first specific operation can be permitted under the condition that the hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 824 of the RAM 804, ie, the command effect can be executed. For example, it is possible to prevent the first specific operation from being completely wasted and to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  In addition, even if the first specific operation is performed under the situation where the suspension information is not stored, it is difficult to determine the jackpot at that time, so it becomes difficult to enhance the sense of expectation for the second specific operation . That is, it is possible to give the player an impression that it is useless only by trying the second specific operation. It is feared that this is a factor that reduces the attention to the first specific operation as well as the second specific operation.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, the first specific operation can be permitted when the hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 824. Therefore, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed and the operation is performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's attention to the switch mechanism 502 (or the operation itself).

  In addition, even when the player is replaced or the like, the second specifying operation is not permitted to the player who has not performed the first specifying operation. In this manner, by limiting the target to which the benefit (the permission of the second specifying operation) is given by performing the first specifying operation to the player who performed the first specifying operation, the player It is possible to secure the fairness between Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to give an impression that the second specific operation is permitted without performing the first specific operation, and to prevent the first specific operation from being performed.

  If the second specific operation is possible only when the jackpot is determined, the relationship between the second specific operation and the jackpot becomes unambiguous, and the second specific operation is not prompted after the first specific operation. In that case, the player's attention may be reduced at that time. In this case, it is easy to give the player an impression as if it was useless to perform the first specific operation, and it is feared that the first specific operation will be difficult to be performed.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first specific operation is performed, when the first specific operation is performed, the game time according to the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824 of the RAM 804 is used. By urging the second specific operation, the player can be guided to try at least the operation, and it becomes possible to play a game of confirming whether the second specific operation can be performed. Thereby, the above-mentioned inconvenience that the first specific operation is difficult to be performed can be less likely to occur.

  In the configuration in which the second specific operation and the transition to the open / close execution mode are associated, if the second specific operation can not be performed even if reach display is performed after the first specific operation, the special gaming state It gives the player the impression that the transition is not made to the player, and makes it easy to give the player an impression as if the reach display itself was executed needlessly. This makes it easy for the player's attention to the reach display to be reduced.

  In addition, even if the second specific operation is not actually performed even if the second specific operation is tried, it is preferable to move to the next game round immediately, but it is transitioned to reach display and the game time is unnecessarily prolonged. It is assumed that the player's attention is likely to be reduced.

  In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, in the case where the reach display is executed in the game times prior to the game times serving as the transition trigger to the open / close execution mode, the first specific operation, the second specific operation And, if the configuration is such that the prompting of each operation is restricted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience such as the unexpected reach display being performed wastefully and the interest being reduced.

  In the game display corresponding to the reach display, there is a high possibility of shifting to the open / close execution mode as compared with the game display not corresponding to the reach display. Therefore, when there is a reach display-compatible one of the stored hold information, the second specific operation is prompted until the reach display-compatible game, on condition that the first specific operation is performed. This makes it easy for the player to have a sense of anticipation that the second specific operation → open / close execution mode is made even if the game is not actually switched to the open / close execution mode.

  The push button member 550 is disposed at a position where it can be operated in a state where the hand is put on the cover body 530, and convenience is improved. The operation of the cover body 530 is normally disabled, and the displacement from the non-operation position is restricted. This makes it easy to exhibit the function as a pedestal for hanging a hand.

  In particular, in the configuration having the upper bulging portion 500 (upper plate 501) provided on the front face of the gaming machine, for example, the upper side of the hand is used for the purpose of checking remaining balls with a fingertip or avoiding ball clogging (leveling). A game may be played while being hooked to the bulging portion 500. The operation of the cover body 530 in the present embodiment is normally restricted, so that even if the cover body 530 is used as a manual placement, the hand of the cover body 530 is distorted and the hand position is shifted. Hard to produce

The Ninth Embodiment
In the eighth embodiment, the operation of the cover body 530 is permitted only at the game times corresponding to the jackpot, but in the present embodiment, the condition that the operation of the cover body 530 is permitted is the eighth. It differs from the embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration according to the command effect in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the eighth embodiment.

  In the voice lamp control device 800, the operation reception period for receiving the continuous operation is not always defined to be constant, but when the continuous operation is suggested, the holding information stored in the holding information storage area 824 is used. It changes according to the number and whether or not the thing corresponding to the big hit exists in the same hold information.

  First, the process of setting the continuous operation accepting period will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting processing of the continuous operation accepting period constitutes a part of the continuous operation handling process (see FIG. 49), and is executed until it is time to start the suggestion of the continuous operation.

<Processing for setting recurring user operation acceptance period>
In the process of setting the continuous shooting operation acceptance period, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the current command effect corresponds to a big hit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S 2302, a jackpot-corresponding period setting table provided in various table storage areas 811 of the ROM 803 is referred to. Then, in step S2303, setting processing of the acceptance period corresponding to the jackpot is executed. As for the jackpot-ready period setting table, if the number of pending information items stored in the pending information storage area 824 of the RAM 804 is large, a relatively long reception period is more easily selected than when the number of pending information items is too small. When the number of pending information items is small, a relatively short acceptance period is set to be more easily selected than when the number of pending information items is large. Therefore, as the number of the hold information increases, it becomes easier to operate the push button member 550 a prescribed number of times, and furthermore, it becomes easier to receive more operations.

  After executing the setting process of the reception period in step S2303, the process advances to step S2304 to set a reception period setting command, and the setting process of the continuous operation reception period is ended. The reception period setting command set in step S2304 includes information for specifying the reception period, and is configured to be transmitted to the display control device 410. In the display control device 410, by receiving the reception period setting command, the reception period in the current command effect is grasped, and an image such as a message suggesting an operation is displayed on the display screen 94a according to the reception period. Do.

  Returning to the description of step S2301, if a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, the period setting table corresponding to the deviation from the various table storage area 811 of the ROM 803 is referred to. Then, in step S2306, setting processing of the acceptance period corresponding to the deviation is executed. As for the jackpot-ready period setting table, if the number of pending information items stored in the pending information storage area 824 of the RAM 804 is large, a relatively long reception period is more easily selected than when the number of pending information items is too small. When the number of pending information items is small, a relatively short acceptance period is set to be more easily selected than when the number of pending information items is large.

  In addition, with respect to the period setting table corresponding to deviation, it is set such that a relatively short reception period is easily selected as compared with the period setting table corresponding to the above-mentioned big hit. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it becomes easier to operate the push button member 550 a prescribed number of times, and furthermore, it becomes easier to receive more operations.

  After executing the setting process of the reception period in step S2306, the process advances to step S2304 to set a reception period setting command, and the setting process of the continuous operation reception period is ended. The reception period setting command set in step S2304 includes information for specifying the reception period, and is configured to be transmitted to the display control device 410. In the display control device 410, by receiving the reception period setting command, the reception period in the current command effect is grasped, and an image such as a message suggesting an operation is displayed on the display screen 94a according to the reception period. Do.

  As described above in detail, in the present embodiment, the number of pieces of pending information stored in the pending information storage area 824 at the time of suggesting the repeated operation, or the same pending information has a thing corresponding to a big hit. The reception period is changed according to whether or not it is set, and the degree of difficulty when satisfying the execution condition of the command effect applied to the push button member 550 is changed. This makes it possible to suppress monotonization of the game.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of operations during the reception period (the number of operation receptions) reaches a prescribed number, the eighth point is that the continuation of the command effect is determined, that is, the effect of the operation of the cover 530 is determined. Is the same as the embodiment of FIG. However, in the present embodiment, the configuration is different from the eighth embodiment in the following points.

(1) When the number of times the operation acceptance of the push button member 550 reaches the specified number, the operation suggestion of the push button member 550 is not finished, but the operation suggestion continues until the set operation acceptance period elapses. Operation can be accepted even after reaching the specified number (2) Operation of the cover body 530 may be permitted in the game times before the game times corresponding to the jackpot (3) Number of times of operation acceptance of the push button member 550 Accordingly, the operation restriction of the cover body 530 is released, and the timing at which the operation of the cover body 530 is permitted is changed. Hereinafter, these different configurations will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the continuous operation handling process, FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing setting process of the regulation release timing, and FIG. 59 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the number of operation receptions at the big hit and the timing of regulation release.

  First, with reference to FIG. 57, the continuous operation handling process executed by the voice lamp control device 800 will be described.

<Continuous operation handling process>
In the continuous operation handling process, it is first determined in step S2401 whether or not the current game play is a game play serving as a trigger for instruction effects. Specifically, it is determined whether the command effect preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 823 of the RAM 804. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the continuous shooting operation handling process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the process proceeds to step S2402. In step S2402, it is determined whether or not the continuous operation waiting state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a continuous operation waiting flag described later is stored in the continuous operation waiting flag storage area of the various flags storage area 823 in the RAM 804.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, that is, if it is determined that the user is in the continuous operation waiting state, the process proceeds to step S2403. In step S 2403, it is determined based on detection information from the position detection sensor 557 whether the operation of the push button member 550 has been performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S 2403, the continuous shooting operation handling process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S 2403, the process advances to step S 2404 to execute operation acceptance suggesting processing. By executing the operation acceptance suggestion process, a sound effect is output from the speaker unit 27 indicating that the operation has been accepted.

  After executing the processing of step S2404, the process advances to step S2405 to set a continuous operation reception command. The display control device 410 can grasp that the operation of the push button member 550 has been effectively accepted by receiving the continuous operation accepting command.

  Although the voice lamp control device 800 is configured to indicate that the operation has been effectively received by voice, the display control device 410 also indicates that the operation has been effectively accepted. Display control is performed so that an image is displayed on the display screen 94 a of the symbol display device 94.

  In the following step S2406, it is determined whether or not the number of operations has reached a predetermined number of times (specifically, a third predetermined number of times described later). Specifically, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2106 described above, the value of the operation number counter provided in the various counter areas 822 of the RAM 804 is updated ("1" is added one by one). In the process of step S2109, the value of the operation number counter is referred to to determine whether or not the predetermined number has been reached. The operation number counter is reset (“0” clear) when the command effect is finished.

  In the present embodiment, the first predetermined number of times to the third predetermined number of times are provided as the predetermined number of times, and the magnitude relationship of the respective predetermined numbers of times is the first predetermined number of times> the second predetermined number of times> the third predetermined number of times It has become. Then, by reaching at least the third prescribed number of times among these three prescribed times, the continuation of the command effect in the subsequent game rounds is decided.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, the process advances to step S2406 to perform restriction release timing setting processing. Hereinafter, the setting process of the restriction release timing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Restriction release timing setting process>
In the restriction release timing setting process, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether it is a reception completion timing of the continuous operation. When negative determination is carried out in step S2501, the setting process of the said regulation cancellation timing is complete | finished. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the operation reception period, the reception of the operation is continued even when the number of operation receptions reaches the specified number. Therefore, at the end of the operation reception period, the number of operations received during the period is grasped, and when the operation reception period has not ended, all the following processes are avoided. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, it is determined whether the number of operations is equal to or greater than a first predetermined number (20 in the present embodiment). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, the process advances to step S2503 to execute restriction release timing selection processing when the first prescribed number of times is reached.

  In the restriction release timing selection process when reaching the first prescribed number of times, it is grasped whether or not there is a thing corresponding to the big hit among the hold information targeted for the command effect, and the hold information targeted for the command effect Understand the number of Then, based on the information grasped, the table for selecting the release timing at the time of reaching the first prescribed number of times is referred from the various table storage areas 811 of the ROM 803, and the timing for releasing the control of the cover 530 is selected by lottery. .

  Here, with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 59, the aspect of such selection will be supplementarily described.

  If the number of operations reaches the first prescribed number of times (20 times in the present embodiment) under the condition that the information corresponding to the big hit exists in the suspension information to be the target of the command effect, the command When the number of pieces of pending information targeted for presentation is one, the pending information corresponds to a big hit, so there is no room for selection, and the cover body 530 is always played for the first pending information. Operation restrictions will be released.

  In the case where the number of pieces of suspension information targeted for command effects is two and the second suspension information corresponds to a big hit, the game of the cover body 530 starts from the game time for the first suspension information. A ratio of 9: 1 corresponds to the case where the operation restriction is released and the case where the operation restriction on the cover body 530 is released in the game round according to the second hold information. For this reason, in fact, although the game times according to the second hold information correspond to the jackpot, in many cases, the restriction is released in the game times earlier than that. Then, once the operation restriction on the cover body 530 is released, the operation restriction on the cover body 530 is released in all the game rounds until reaching the game times corresponding to the jackpot, so the operation of the cover body 530 is There will be more opportunities for permission.

  In the case where the number of pieces of suspension information targeted for command effects is three, and the third suspension information corresponds to a big hit, the game of the cover body 530 starts from the game time for the first suspension information. The case where the operation restriction is released, the case where the operation restriction of the cover body 530 is released by the game time for the second hold information, and the case of the cover body 530 at the game time according to the third hold information The case where the operation restriction is released is a ratio of 7: 2: 1. For this reason, in fact, although the game times according to the third hold information correspond to the jackpot, in many cases, the restriction is released in the game times earlier than that.

  In the case where the number of pieces of suspension information targeted for command effects is four, and the fourth suspension information corresponds to a big hit, the game of the cover body 530 starts from the game time for the first suspension information. The case where the operation restriction is released, the case where the operation restriction of the cover body 530 is released by the game time for the second hold information, and the case of the cover body 530 at the game time according to the third hold information The case where the operation restriction is canceled and the case where the operation restriction of the cover body 530 is canceled in the game time according to the fourth hold information is a ratio of 4: 3: 2: 1. For this reason, in fact, although the game times according to the fourth hold information correspond to the jackpot, in many cases, the restriction is released in the game times earlier than that.

  As described above, when the number of the hold information stored in the hold information storage area 824 is large at the timing at which the operation of the push button member 550 is suggested, the operation reception period is likely to be set long. . For this reason, the number of times of operation is likely to be greater than the first prescribed number. This can be said to be a device for allowing the function of permitting the operation of the cover body 530 to be performed well at the game times prior to the game times corresponding to the jackpot.

  Referring back to FIG. 58, if a negative determination is made in step S2502, that is, if it is determined that the number of operations is smaller than the first prescribed number, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, it is determined whether the number of operations is equal to or greater than a second predetermined number (15 in the present embodiment). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, the process advances to step S2505 to execute restriction release timing selection processing when the second prescribed number of times is reached.

  In the restriction release timing selection process at the time of reaching the second prescribed number of times, it is grasped whether or not there is an item corresponding to the big hit among the suspension information targeted for the command effect, and the suspension information targeted for the command effect Understand the number of Then, based on the grasped information, the timing for releasing the restriction on the cover body 530 is selected by lottery with reference to the restriction release timing selection table at the second specified number of times from the various table storage areas 811 of the ROM 803. .

  In addition, in the table for restriction release timing selection at the second prescribed number of times, compared to the restriction release timing selection table at the time of reaching the first prescribed number of times, in the game times prior to the game times corresponding to the big wins. The rate at which the operation restriction on the cover body 530 is released is reduced. That is, when the number of operations during the reception period is small, there is a tendency that the opportunity for the operation of the cover 530 is also reduced (see FIG. 59).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2504, that is, if the number of times of operation is equal to or greater than the third prescribed number of times (10 in the present embodiment), the process proceeds to step S2506, and the restriction release timing when the third prescribed number of times is reached. Execute selection processing.

  In the restriction release timing selection process at the time of reaching the third prescribed number of times, it is grasped whether or not there is an item corresponding to the big hit among the suspension information targeted for the command effect, and the suspension information targeted for the command effect Understand the number of Then, based on the grasped information, the timing for releasing the restriction on the cover body 530 is selected by lottery with reference to the restriction release timing selection table at the time of reaching the third prescribed number from various table storage areas 811 of the ROM 803. .

  In addition, in the table for restriction release timing selection at the 3rd specified number of times, compared to the restriction release timing selection table at the 2nd specified number of times arrival mentioned above, in the game times prior to the game number corresponding to big hit The rate at which the operation restriction on the cover body 530 is released is reduced. That is, when the number of operations during the reception period is small, there is a tendency that the opportunity for the operation of the cover 530 is also reduced (see FIG. 59).

  Incidentally, even in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that there is no information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold information concerning the command effect. In such a case, since there is no need to release the restriction on the cover body 530 in the first place, the setting process of the restriction release timing is not performed.

  After the processes of steps S2503, S2505, and S2506 are performed, the process proceeds to step S2507. In step S2507, a release timing setting command is set. This command is transmitted to the display control device 410, and the display control device 410 can grasp the release timing by receiving the command.

  After the release timing setting command is set in step S2507, in the subsequent step S2508, release processing of the continuous operation waiting state is executed. In the release process of the continuous operation waiting state, the continuous operation waiting flag stored in the various flag storage area 823 of the RAM 804 is erased.

  Then, the command effect preparation flag is deleted from the various flag storage area 823 of the RAM 804 in the following step S2509, and the command effect continuation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 823 in step S2501. finish.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 57 again, if a negative determination is made in step S2406, that is, if it is determined that the number of operations has not reached the third prescribed number, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S2408, it is determined whether it is a reception completion timing of the continuous operation.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2408, the continuous shooting operation handling process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2408, the command effect cancellation processing of step S2409 and the release processing of the continuous operation waiting state in step S2410 are executed, and the continuous operation corresponding process is ended. The processes in steps S2409 and S2410 are the same as the processes in steps S2112 and S2114, and thus the description will be used.

  Returning to the description of step S2402, if a negative determination is made in step S2402, that is, if it is determined not to be in the continuous operation waiting state, each processing of steps S2411 to S2413 is executed, and then the continuous operation corresponding process is executed. finish. About each processing of these steps S2411 to S2413, since it is the same as each processing of the above-mentioned steps S2103 to S2105, explanation is used.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The specific one-shot operation of the cover body 530 (following, referred to as "first specific operation") is performed in a later game cycle when the push-button member 550 is repeatedly operated until the preset number of times is reached. Hereinafter, in the configuration in which “the second specific operation” may be permitted, the occurrence opportunity of the second specific operation excessively depends on the occurrence frequency of the first specific operation. Certainly, by increasing the chance of occurrence of the first specific operation, it is possible to increase the chance of occurrence of the second specific operation. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the first specific operation is likely to be mechanically performed by the player as the first specific operation frequently occurs and the degree of attention to the first specific operation decreases. .

  In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, if the second specific operation in a plurality of game times is permitted based on the first specific operation in one game time, the frequency of the first specific operation is increased. It is possible to increase the opportunity to carry out the second specific operation.

  If the second specific operation is permitted only in the game times in which the jackpot (transition to the open / close execution mode) is determined, the opportunity for the second specific operation to be permitted is reduced, and the second specific operation is performed. It makes it easier for the player to give the player the impression that he or she will not be able to operate it anyway. In this case, it is assumed that the player's attempt to perform the second specific operation is reduced and the rendering function of the operation switch mechanism 502 is not sufficiently exhibited.

  In order to eliminate such a disadvantage, if the second specific operation is possible even though the jackpot has not been determined, the connection between the switching to the open / close execution mode and the second specific operation is weakened. For this reason, as a result, the player is given the impression that the second specific operation has not been made to shift to the open / close execution mode, which makes it difficult to eliminate the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, the second specific operation can not be made possible only by the game times serving as the transition trigger to the opening / closing execution mode, but if the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is decided By having a configuration in which the second specific operation can be performed before the game time, there is an opportunity for the second specific operation to be possible while securing the connection between the second specific operation and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. It can be increased. As a result, the rendering function relating to the operation switch mechanism 502 can be easily exhibited.

  Under the condition that a plurality of holding information is stored when the first specifying operation is performed, a target for which the second specifying operation is permitted is selected among the gaming times according to the holding information. . According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress that the target for which the second specific operation is permitted to be uniform, and to diversify the permission pattern of the second specific operation. This can enhance the expectation of the second specific operation being permitted in each game play.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period is changed according to the number of suspension information stored in suspension information storage area 824, and the second specific operation is performed according to the number of operations performed during the operation acceptance period. A configuration is adopted in which the permission target of is changed. Thus, by diversifying the conditions of the first specific operation → the second specific operation, it is possible to suppress the mechanical operation of the first specific operation as a foothold to the second specific operation.

  As the number of stored pending information increases, there is a high probability that the first specific operation → second specific operation → transition to open / close execution mode, and the second specific operation is permitted. Will also increase. Therefore, it is assumed that the player plays a game in such a manner that the state in which even a large amount of hold information is stored can be maintained. As a result, the opportunity for the second specific operation to be permitted is also increased, and the rendering function provided to the operation switch mechanism 502 can be suitably exhibited.

  In addition, by storing even a large amount of suspension information, the chances of being able to execute the second specifying operation increase, so that the player who is interested in the second specifying operation continues the game (for example, the game To continue the firing operation of the ball). This can contribute to the improvement of the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  The completion condition of the first specific operation may be configured to reduce the number of operations (prescribed number of times) corresponding to the operation completion, for example, when the number of pending information items is large. However, in the configuration in which the prescribed number of times is changed, it is easy to give the impression that the possibility of shifting to the open / close execution mode is low when the operation is not completed with a small number of operations, (1) It is assumed that it becomes difficult to perform the specific operation, and as a result, the opportunity to perform the effect according to the second specific operation decreases.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period is extended by delaying the end timing of the operation acceptance period as the number of the hold information stored as described above increases, and the end timing is further concealed. It will be done. If the operation reception period is changed instead of changing the specified number as described above, it is possible to enjoy the operation itself, resulting in the inconvenience that it is mechanically operated as a mere trigger of the second specific operation. It can be difficult.

Tenth Embodiment
In each of the above embodiments, the description of the supporting mechanism for supporting the gaming machine main part 12 so as to be able to pivot forward to the gaming machine is partially omitted, but the characteristic structure of the supporting mechanism is also described. Have. Therefore, the configuration of the support mechanism will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the support mechanism 16 is configured by a lower hinge portion 16L and an upper hinge portion 16U provided on one side (end on the left side) of the pachinko machine 10. By securing the support span by separating the two hinge portions up and down, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the gaming machine main part 12 both at the time of opening and at the time of closing.

  As described above, the various configurations for constructing the support mechanism 16 are formed using a metal material, but the material of the support mechanism 16 is optional as long as it can ensure the support strength, for example, synthetic It is also possible to use a resin material.

  First, the lower hinge portion 16L will be described with reference to FIG. 2, FIG. 60 and FIG. Fig. 60 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure applied to the lower hinge portion 16L, Fig. 61 (a) is a plan view showing the lower hinge portion 16L, and Fig. 61 (b) is H-H of Fig. 61 (a). It is a line fragmentary sectional view. In FIGS. 60 and 61, for convenience of explanation, the configuration related to the gaming machine main part 12 is simplified, and the configuration is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

<Lower hinge portion 16L>
As shown in FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined area is secured between the lower frame portion 11a constituting the outer frame 11 and the lower end of the gaming machine main section 12, and the area is horizontally long A curtain plate 900 is provided. That is, a curtain board area is provided between the lower frame portion 11 a of the outer frame 11 and the lower end portion of the gaming machine main portion 12. The curtain plate 900 is formed using a colored opaque synthetic resin material, and the manufacturer name (not shown) of the pachinko machine 10 is described on the front surface thereof. The model name of the pachinko machine 10 may be described on the front of the curtain plate 900, and the manufacturer name and the model name may not be described.

  The lower frame portion 11a is in the form of a long plate extending in the width direction (left and right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, and is disposed so that the plate surface thereof is directed vertically. The curtain plate 900 has a front face 901 covering the front end of the lower frame 11a from the front of the gaming machine, and an upper face 902 extending rearward from the upper end of the front face 901 and covering the upper face of the lower frame 11a from above It has and extends in the same direction (the width direction of the pachinko machine 10, the left-right direction) as the lower frame 11a along the lower frame 11a. The front surface portion 901 and the upper surface portion 902 are in contact with the front end surface and the upper surface of the lower frame portion 11a (see FIG. 61 (b)), and the front surface portion 901 is fixed to the lower frame portion 11a by a fastener such as a screw. Are integrated with the outer frame 11.

  The lower support fitting 18 is disposed at a position closer to the left end of the curtain plate 900. The lower support bracket 18 has a substantially flat support base 911 and a reinforcement bead 912 formed by indenting the support base 911 downward, and the plate surface of the support base 911 is directed upward. It is arranged.

  The portion where the reinforcing bead portion 912 is formed on the lower surface of the support base 911 is lower than the peripheral portion, and a groove-like step is formed. Thereby, the strength of the support base 911 is improved.

  The support base 911 is mounted on the upper surface portion 902 such that the lower surface of the reinforcing bead portion 912 abuts on the upper surface portion 902 of the curtain plate 900. A through hole penetrating in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the support base 911 is formed in the bottom of the reinforcing bead portion 912, and a communication hole communicating with the through hole is formed in the upper surface portion 902 of the curtain plate 900. (Not shown). A screw 920 is inserted into the through hole and the communication hole from the upper side of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower support fitting 18 is fixed to the outer frame 11 by screwing the inserted screw 920 into the lower frame portion 11a. It is integrated against.

  Here, an extension portion 915 extending rearward is formed at the left end portion of the support base 911, and the extension portion 915 is in contact with the inner surface of the left frame portion 11 b. More specifically, the support base 911 is in contact with the left frame portion 11 b on the side of the fixed position by the screw 920. As a result, when the game machine main portion 12 is rotated, the lower support bracket 18 is rotated due to friction or the like generated between the shaft pin 914 and the bearing portion 933, and more specifically, the fixed portion by the screw 920 It is possible to suppress the rotation.

  The head portion 921 of the screw 920 is accommodated in a groove-like portion (hereinafter referred to as a groove portion 912a) defined by the reinforcing bead portion 912, and protrudes from the groove portion 912a. Protrusion above the upper surface is avoided.

  The support base 911 has a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer peripheral flange portion 913 is formed on the outer peripheral portion thereof so as to stand downward. The erecting amount of the outer peripheral flange portion 913 is set to be substantially the same as the depth dimension of the groove portion 912a in the reinforcing bead portion 912, and contributes to the improvement of the strength of the lower support bracket 18 similarly to the groove portion 912a. There is.

  On the other hand, the lower inner frame fitting 72 provided at the bottom of the inner frame 13 has a flat plate-like counter plate 931 facing the support base 911 of the lower support bracket 18 from the upper side, and It has a plate-like mounting portion 932 that stands up and faces the back surface of the resin base 60. The mounting portion 932 is integrated with the inner frame 13 by being screwed to the resin base 60.

  When the opposing plate portion 931 of the lower inner frame fitting 72 is mounted on the support base 911 of the lower support bracket 18, the lower inner support bracket 18 is supported by the lower support bracket 18 by surface contact. It has become.

  The support base 911 of the lower support bracket 18 protrudes forward relative to the curtain plate 900, and a shaft pin 914 extending in the vertical direction is provided at a position closer to the front end of the support base 911. Is attached. The shaft pin 914 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the support base 911 and a bearing 933 into which the shaft pin 914 is inserted is formed in the opposing plate portion 931 of the lower inner frame fitting 72. .

  When assembling the gaming machine main unit 12 to the outer frame 11, the lower inner frame fitting 72 is superimposed on the lower support fitting 18 from above (that is, placed on the support base 911), and the shaft pin 914 is a bearing By being inserted into the portion 933, the gaming machine main portion 12 is rotatably supported about the pivot pin 914.

  As described in detail above, focusing on the fact that the inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the lower support bracket 18 and the lower inner frame fitting 72, the lower support bracket 18 and the lower inner frame fitting are described. It can be said that the lower hinge portion 16L is constituted by 72.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 61 (a), when the gaming machine main part 12 is placed in the closed position, the side portions of the gaming machine main part 12 (specifically, the resin base 60 of the inner frame 13) are outside. The left frame portion 11 b of the frame 11 is in contact with the outer frame 11 from the inside. This makes it difficult to insert an illegal tool such as a wire from the side of the gaming machine through the gap between the gaming machine main portion 12 and the left frame portion 11b, thereby improving the crime prevention function. Furthermore, the lower side inner frame fitting 72 is also configured such that the side portion thereof is in contact with the left frame portion 11b, and the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior is avoided in the vicinity of the lower hinge portion 16L. .

  As described above, when opening the gaming machine main section 12 by offsetting and arranging the rotation center (axis pin 914) of the gaming machine main section 12 in front of the front face of the outer frame 11. The side portion of the gaming machine main part 12 is configured to move away from the left frame part 11b, and the path through which the gaming machine main part 12 passes at the time of opening is prevented from overlapping the outer frame 11 There is. That is, a configuration is realized in which there is no need to increase the operation gap to secure the passage route for the gaming machine main part 12. Thereby, coexistence with improvement of the above-mentioned crime prevention function and security of the opening-and-closing function is achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned reinforcing bead portion 912 and the configuration related thereto are characteristic. Hereinafter, these various configurations will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the curtain plate 900 is formed with a standing portion 903 standing upward from the rear end of the upper surface portion 902, and a return portion 904 extending from the top end of the standing portion 903 to the front of the gaming machine. A groove portion 905 opened to the front of the gaming machine is formed by the upper surface portion 902, the standing portion 903, and the return portion 904.

  The groove portion 905 is formed over substantially the entire area of the pachinko machine 10 in the width direction, and when the game machine main portion 12 is closed, the open portion of the groove portion 905 is the game machine main portion 12 (more specifically, the inner frame 13 It is configured to face the back surface of the resin base 60). The open portion may be covered or closed by the main game unit 12.

  The lower support 18 (specifically, the support base 911) is disposed such that its rear end is inserted into the groove 905. As shown in FIG. 60 (a), the reinforcing bead 912 is located at the rear end of the support base 911, more specifically at the position exposed to the outside of the groove 905, at the rear end. It is formed to be along, and has a laterally elongated shape extending in the width direction (left and right direction) of the pachinko machine 10 as a whole.

  The reinforcing bead portion 912 is disposed at a position overlapping vertically with the gaming machine main portion 12 when the gaming machine main portion 12 is disposed at the closed position, ie, a position overlapping vertically with the operation path of the gaming machine main portion 12 It is done. Therefore, when the gaming machine main part 12 is opened and closed, the left side of the gaming machine main part 12 passes over the reinforcing bead part 912. In other words, the end (left end) of the lower inner frame fitting 72 that contacts the left frame 11b passes across the reinforcing bead 912 when opening or closing the main game unit 12. .

  The groove width dimension of the reinforcing bead portion 912 (groove portion 912a) is set to be slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, and the side wall forming the groove portion 912a is inclined such that the groove width increases upward. . Thus, if the gaming ball is placed on the support base 911, the gaming ball is likely to flow into the groove 912a.

  The depth dimension of the groove portion 912a is set smaller than the diameter dimension of the gaming ball, and as described above, the gaming ball having flowed into the groove portion 912a is configured such that a portion thereof protrudes above the upper surface of the support base 911 ing. This is because when the game machine main part 12 is moved from the open position to the closed position, the game machine main part 12 follows the movement of the game machine main part 12 by hitting the game ball. This is a device for moving the gaming ball in 912a along the groove 912a.

  The left end of the reinforcing bead portion 912, that is, the portion closer to the center of rotation of the gaming machine main portion 12, is curved toward the rear of the gaming machine and communicates with the rear end of the support base 911 . The outer peripheral flange portion 913 described above is omitted for the communicating portion, and the groove portion 912a of the reinforcing bead portion 912 is opened rearward of the gaming machine. An opening 906 is formed in the rising portion 903 of the curtain plate 900 so as to communicate with the open portion. The opening 906 is sized to allow passage of one gaming ball at a time. In other words, the opening 906 is sized such that a plurality of gaming balls can not pass through at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, by closing the gaming machine main part 12, the gaming ball placed on the lower support fitting 18 (support base 911) is discharged using the reinforcing bead 91 and the opening 906. . Here, with reference to FIG. 62, the flow of the discharge of the game ball accompanying the closing operation will be described. 62 is a schematic diagram for explaining the movement of the gaming ball accompanying the closing operation, and when the gaming machine main part 12 is closed, the gaming ball on the support base 911 is from FIG. 62 (a) to FIG. 62 (b) ) → FIG. 62 (c) → FIG. 62 (d) In this order, the gaming balls move.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), when the gaming machine main part 12 is open, the upper surface of the lower support fitting 18 (support base 911) is exposed above the gaming machine. For this reason, when the game ball falls from the pachinko machine 10 or the island facility of the game hall for some reason, the dropped game ball may be placed on the support base 911. The support base 911 is disposed in such a manner that the upper surface thereof is horizontal in consideration of stabilization of the support function of the gaming machine main part 12 and the like. Therefore, the gaming ball can stay on the upper surface of the support base 911 without departing from the support base 911.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the gaming machine main part 12 is in the open position with the gaming ball parked on the upper surface of the support base 911 (specifically, the part located forward of the reinforcing bead 912). When it is turned from the to the closed position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the side surface or lower side inner frame fitting 72 of the gaming machine main unit 12 collides with the gaming ball. The gaming ball pushed by the gaming machine main part 12 or the lower inner frame fitting 72 moves to the rear of the gaming machine and flows into the groove 912 a of the reinforcing bead 912.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (b) → FIG. 62 (c), when the gaming machine main part 12 is further rotated, the portion of the gaming ball which has flowed into the groove 912a protrudes above the upper surface of the support base 911 It is pushed by the gaming machine main part 12 or the lower inner frame fitting 72, and moves leftward along the groove 912a. The side wall constituting the groove 912a is inclined as described above, and the upward movement of the gaming ball in the groove 912a is permitted. Therefore, even if the game ball pushed by the game machine main part 12 or the like is pressed against the side wall of the groove 912a, the game ball bites between the side wall and the game machine main part 12 or the like, and the game machine main It is less likely to cause inconveniences such as the movement of the part 12 being impeded.

  When the gaming machine main part 12 moves toward the closed position as it is, the gaming balls in the groove 912a are guided to the opening 906. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), it moves to the back of the gaming machine through the opening 906, and flows into the game ball collecting mechanism (see FIG. 61 (b)) of the island facility provided behind the pachinko machine 10. Do. Thereby, the game ball discharged through the opening 906 is returned to the island facility.

  As described above, by returning the game balls parked on the support base to the island facilities, the game balls are prevented from falling into the passage of the game hall, and the dropped game balls are collected. You can save time and effort.

  In the configuration in which the side surface of the gaming machine main portion 12 and the end portion of the lower inner frame fitting 72 abut the left frame portion 11 b, the above-described improvement effect of the crime prevention function can be expected. However, if the game ball is caught between the left frame 11b and the side of the game machine main part 12 or the end of the lower inner frame metal fitting 72, the pivoting of the game machine main part 12 to the closed position is hindered. It is feared that the game machine main part 12 can not be closed properly. In addition, if the gaming machine main part 12 is vigorously pushed into the closed position, the pachinko machine 10 is left with the gaming machine main part 12 or the outer frame 11 or the like being deformed or not completely closed. It is feared that the security function may decline. In this respect, by adopting the above-described configuration to allow the gaming balls to escape from the support base 911, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

  It is preferable to increase the weight of the gaming machine main part 12 and secure a certain level of strength of the lower support fitting 18 supporting the gaming machine main part 12. Here, in the present embodiment, the reinforcement bead portion 912 is provided on the support base 911 to improve the strength of the gaming machine main portion 12. Here, the following effects can be expected by providing the reinforcing bead portion 912 (groove portion 912a) with a guide function for guiding the gaming ball to the opening portion 906.

  The standing portion 903 of the curtain plate 900 has a function of covering the boundary portion generated between the gaming machine main portion 12 and the upper surface portion 902 of the curtain plate 900 from the back side of the gaming machine. Thus, when an illegal tool such as a wire is inserted through the boundary portion, it is possible to prevent the intrusion of the illegal tool. Here, when it is possible to discharge the game ball by forming the opening 906 in the standing portion 903, the above-mentioned crime prevention function is exhibited well by aiming the opening 906 and inserting an illegal tool. There is concern that it will disappear. In particular, it is assumed that such a disadvantage becomes more remarkable as the opening 906 becomes larger. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the groove 912a of the reinforcing bead 912 has a function of guiding the gaming ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the size of the opening 906 to such an extent that one game ball can pass, and it is possible to preferably suppress the above-described drop in the crime prevention function.

  The screw 920 as a fixing tool for fixing the lower support bracket 18 is disposed at the end of the groove 912a opposite to the left frame 11b, ie, the end opposite to the opening 906 . Although the head 921 of the screw 920 is projected into the groove 912a, by adopting the above-described arrangement, it is possible to prevent the screw 920 from obstructing the guidance of the gaming ball.

  The reinforcing bead portion 912 is curved toward the opening 906, and at least in a portion located forward of the return portion 904, the side wall of the groove 912a has a component directed diagonally backward (not directly facing And so on). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being caught between the gaming machine main section 12 or the lower inner frame fitting 72 and the side wall of the groove section 912a just before the gaming machine main section 12 reaches the closed position. It has become.

  By adopting the hinge structure described in detail above, when the hall manager etc. opens and closes the game machine main part 12, it is confirmed or confirmed whether the game ball is staying on the support base 911 or not. There is no need to remove the game balls and the like, and it is possible to avoid an increase in work load when performing maintenance and the like.

  Next, the upper hinge portion 16U will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 (a) is a perspective view showing the upper hinge portion 16U, and FIG. 63 (b) is a perspective view showing the upper support bracket 17 constituting the upper hinge portion 16U. In FIG. 63 (a), for convenience of explanation, a part of the configuration (for example, the front door frame 14) in the gaming machine main part 12 is omitted.

<Upper hinge portion 16U>
As described above, the upper hinge portion 16U is configured by the upper support bracket 17 provided on the outer frame 11 and the upper inner frame bracket 71 provided on the gaming machine main portion 12 (specifically, the inner frame 13). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the upper inner frame fitting 71 has a mounting portion 951 facing the upper surface of the resin base 60 of the inner frame 13 and an extension portion 952 extending from the mounting portion 951 to the front of the gaming machine. The mounting portion 951 is integrated with the resin base 60 by screwing the mounting portion 951 to the upper frame portion of the resin base 60 as a whole.

  On the other hand, the upper support bracket 17 has an attachment portion 961 to the outer frame 11, and an opposing portion 962 extending from the attachment portion 961 forward to the gaming machine and facing the extension portion 952 from the lower side, The mounting portion 961 is integrated with the outer frame 11 by being screwed to the left frame portion 11 b and the upper frame portion 11 c of the outer frame 11.

  A shaft pin 953 is fixed to a portion of the extension portion 952 located on the front side of the resin base 60. The axial pin 953 has a cylindrical shape and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the extension portion 952. A bearing portion 963 into which the shaft pin 953 is inserted is formed in the opposing portion 962 of the upper support bracket 17. The axis pin 953 is inserted into the bearing portion 963 so that the main portion 12 of the game machine can rotate. Is supported by the

  In the present embodiment, the configuration of the bearing portion 963 is one of the features. The bearing 963 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. Fig. 64 (a) is a view of the upper support fitting 17 as viewed from above, Fig. 64 (b) is a view of the upper support fitting 17 from below, and Fig. 64 (c) is an I-I line of Fig. 64 (a). FIG. In FIG. 64 (c), the upper inner frame fitting 71 is indicated by a two-dot chain line for convenience of explanation.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the bearing portion 963 of the upper support bracket 17 is in the form of a hole penetrating in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the facing portion 962, and one end thereof is open to the side of the gaming machine It is done. The opening portion 964 has a function as an inlet for the shaft pin 953, and the shaft pin 953 is inserted into the hole-like portion through the opening portion 964.

  The bearing portion 963 has, as the hole-like portion, a back portion 965 extending in the front and rear direction, and a connecting portion 966 connecting the back portion 965 and the open portion 964. As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the connecting portion 966 has an arc shape which curves to the front of the gaming machine, and is provided with a guiding function of guiding the axial pin 953 inserted from the opening portion 964 to the back portion 965. It is done.

  The opposing portion 962 is provided with a stopper 971 that can be switched between a blocking state to block the shaft pin 953 from falling off from the bearing portion 963 through the opening portion 964 and a release state not to block the shaft pin 953 from falling off. There is.

  The stopper 971 is formed by bending a rod-like body, and provided at one end side of a coil portion 972 wound around a shaft 981 fixed to the rear of the bearing portion 963 at the opposing portion 962 A shielding portion 973 for closing the opening portion 964 and a partition portion 974 which is formed so as to be bent at a right angle from the shielding portion 973 and which divides the back portion 965 and the connecting portion 966. The shielding portion 973 is in contact with the outer peripheral flange portion 968 formed on the outer peripheral portion of the facing portion 962, and the contact portion 975 formed on the other end side of the coil portion 972 is also in contact with the outer peripheral flange portion 968 There is. The contact portion 975 and the shield portion 973 are configured such that the contact direction with the outer peripheral flange portion 968 is reversed, and in such a contact state, the coil portion 972 is compressed. As a result, the shielding portion 973 is pressed against the outer peripheral flange portion 968 and biased so that the stopper 971 is maintained in the blocking state.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), for example, when the shielding portion 973 is pressed toward the back portion 965 and the pressing force becomes larger than the biasing force, the shielding portion 973 resists the biasing force from the outer peripheral flange portion 968. Displace to the other side. At this time, the coil portion 972 is elastically deformed about the shaft 981 so that the coil portion 972 is further compressed (the biasing force is increased), and the stopper 971 is switched from the blocking state to the releasing state. After the stopper 971 is in the released state, insertion of the shaft pin 953 through the opening portion 964 is permitted. When the pressure on the shielding portion 973 is released, the stopper 971 returns to the blocking state by the biasing force (elastic force).

  Here, the shaft body 981 is located on the extension of the back portion 965, and the partition 974 is located between the back portion 965 and the shaft body 981. And the partition part 974 is extended in the direction orthogonal to the juxtaposition direction of the back part 965 and the shaft 981 (ie, the passage direction of the back part 965). For this reason, even when the partition 974 is pushed by the shaft pin 953 disposed in the back 965, a deformation (such as switching to the released state) occurs such that the coil 972 is compressed by the stopper 971. Hateful.

  Furthermore, if the partition 974 is pushed by the shaft pin 95, even if bending stress centered on the connection between the partition 974 and the shield 973 acts on the partition 974, displacement of the shield 973 and Since the deformation is prevented by the outer peripheral flange portion 968, the restricted state of the stopper 971 is not released.

  That is, after the shaft pin 953 is inserted into the bearing portion 963 and the stopper 971 returns to the blocking state, the operation is blocked even if the shaft pin 953 is attempted to move horizontally along the bearing portion 963.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, the flow of the attachment / detachment work of the gaming machine main part 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 will be described. FIG. 65 is a schematic view showing the flow of the attaching and detaching operation of the gaming machine main part 12, and FIG. 66 is a schematic view showing the movement of the stopper 971. In FIG. 66, for convenience of explanation, the configuration relating to the gaming machine main part 12 is represented by a two-dot chain line.

  When mounting the gaming machine main unit 12 on the outer frame 11, first, the lower hinge portion 16L is connected, and then the upper hinge portion 16U is connected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65 (a) → FIG. 65 (b), the gaming machine main section 12 is lifted, and the lower side of the gaming machine main section 12 above the lower support bracket 18 of the outer frame 11 The game machine main part 12 is disposed so that the inner frame fitting 72 is positioned. After that, the bearing portion 933 of the lower inner frame fitting 72 is inserted into the shaft pin 914 of the lower support bracket 18 to lower the gaming machine main unit 12, and the same main part 12 is mounted on the lower support bracket. Place on 18 Thus, the connecting operation of the lower hinge portion 16L is completed.

  In this manner, by mounting the gaming machine main unit 12 on the lower support bracket 18, the gaming machine main unit 12 is supported by the lower support bracket 18, and it is necessary for the operator to hold the gaming machine main unit 12 There is no

  Next, the upper hinge portion 16U is connected. Specifically, the shaft pin 953 of the upper inner frame fitting 71 is guided to a position facing the open portion 964 of the upper support fitting 17 by slightly inclining the game machine main unit 12 centering on the lower hinge part 16L ( See FIG. 66 (a)). Thereafter, the shaft pin 953 is brought into contact with the shielding portion 973 of the stopper 971 and is pushed as it is toward the deep portion 956 of the bearing portion 963 (see FIG. 66B). Thus, the stopper 971 is elastically deformed to switch from the blocking state to the releasing state.

  By continuing the push-in operation of the gaming machine main portion 12 (shaft pin 953), the shaft pin 953 reaches the connecting portion 966 of the bearing portion 963, and along the wall surface of the connecting portion 966, to the back portion 965 It is Then, when the axial pin 953 reaches the back portion 965, the axial pin 953 is separated from the shielding portion 973, and the stopper 971 returns to the blocking state by the elastic force stored in itself. As a result, the back portion 965 and the connecting portion 966 are cut off, and the movement of the shaft pin 953 toward the open portion 964 via the connecting portion 966 is blocked.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in a state where the axial pin 953 is disposed in the back portion 965, the axial pin 953 is positioned on substantially the same straight line as the axial pin 914. The straight line connecting the two is the rotation center axis of the gaming machine main part 12.

  It is preferable that the connection work of the hinges 16L and 16U described above be performed in a state in which the gaming machine main part 12 secures a certain opening angle (for example, about 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 11 . As a result, interference between the outer frame 11 and the rear surface portion of the gaming machine main unit 12 can be avoided, and it becomes possible to suppress the difficulty in working.

  After completing the connection work of both hinges 16L and 16U, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the mounting operation of the gaming machine main unit 12 is performed by rotating the gaming machine main unit 12 from the open position to the closed position. Is complete.

  Next, the flow of the operation in the case of removing the gaming machine main part 12 from the outer frame 11 will be described. As shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the state where the gaming machine main part 12 is disposed at the closed position, the locking device 75 regulates the opening of the gaming machine main part 12. Therefore, the unlocking operation is first performed using the release key, and the gaming machine main unit 12 is disposed at the predetermined opening position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), by lifting the gaming machine main part 12 upward, the connection of the hinges 16L and 16U is released, and the gaming machine main part 12 is removed from the outer frame 11.

  The extension portion 952 of the upper inner frame fitting 71 is a configuration useful for realizing the offset arrangement of the shaft pin 953. However, the presence of the extension portion 952 lowers the visibility of the stopper 971 and further makes it difficult to access the stopper 971. Therefore, it is difficult to switch the stopper 971 to the release state by a manual operation, and the removal operation of the gaming machine main part 12 becomes complicated if such an operation becomes essential. In this respect, by lifting the main portion 12 of the gaming machine upward, the shaft pin 953 is separated from the bearing portion 963, thereby eliminating the need for access to the stopper 971 or visual confirmation, etc., and the main portion of the gaming machine Twelve removal operations can be facilitated.

  In this manner, in the configuration in which the connection between the hinges 16L and 16U is released simply by lifting the gaming machine main unit 12, it is necessary for the player to support the entire weight when the gaming machine main unit 12 is lifted. It occurs. For this reason, if the outer frame 11 and the gaming machine main unit 12 are hooked or the like immediately after the disconnection of both hinges 16L and 16U and the gaming machine main unit 12 is separated from the operator's hand, the following operation is performed. An inconvenience arises. That is, there is a disadvantage that the gaming machine main part 12 falls to the floor or the like and is damaged / broken down.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a device for suppressing the occurrence of such inconvenience is provided. Hereinafter, the configuration according to the device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a schematic view showing the upper hinge portion 16U.

  After lifting the main part 12 of the gaming machine to the position where the axial pin 953 is separated from the bearing part 963, as shown in FIG. 67 (a)-> FIG. 67 (b), move the main part 12 horizontally. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game machine main part 12 and the outer frame 11 from being caught.

  As to the stopper 971 in the present embodiment, the shielding portion 973 and the partitioning portion 974 are formed by bending a linear member, and the shaft pin 953 is formed between the both 973 and 974 and the wall surface of the connecting portion 966. The insertion part which can be inserted is formed.

  Therefore, when the main part 12 of the gaming machine is dropped by sliding the hand above the connecting part 966 or the like while the main part 12 of the gaming machine is being moved horizontally, the axis pin 953 The shaft pin 953 is caught by the stopper 971. In this state, the gaming machine main part 12 remains supported by the upper support bracket 17, and the game machine main part 12 is prevented from dropping out of the outer frame 11. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the gaming machine main part 12 collides with a floor or the like to cause breakage, breakdown or the like.

  Furthermore, the shield 973 and the partition 974 of the stopper 971 can be displaced up and down (especially downward), and the operation spaces of the various components 973 and 974 are located above and below the shield 973 and the partition 974. It is secured. Even if the shaft pin 953 falls on the shielding portion 973 or the partitioning portion 974, the coil portion 972 is elastically deformed to disperse the impact and the like, and the stopper 971 may be damaged or the like due to the drop. It is avoided. Then, by elastically deforming with the coil portion 972 as the base end, the shaft pin 953 dropped onto the shielding portion 973 and the partition portion 974 can be guided to the back portion 965 and the insertion portion. This makes it easy to exhibit the above protective function.

Eleventh Embodiment
In the tenth embodiment, the configuration has been described in which it is possible to prevent the closing operation of the gaming machine main unit 12 from being hindered by the gaming ball placed on the lower hinge portion 16L. However, the hindrance to the closing operation of the gaming machine main unit 12 by the gaming balls is not necessarily a problem that occurs only with the lower hinge unit 16L. One of the features of this embodiment is that a configuration is adopted to improve the crime prevention function and to prevent the closing operation of the game machine main unit 12 from being easily disturbed due to it. And Referring to FIG. 68 (a), the configuration for exerting the function, specifically, the relationship between the curtain plate 900 and the outer frame 11 (more specifically, the lower frame portion 11a) and the gaming machine main portion 12 explain. FIG. 68A is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. In FIG. 68 (a), for convenience of explanation, the configuration relating to the gaming machine main part 12 is simplified and displayed.

  The lower frame portion 11a is in the form of a long plate extending in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10, and is disposed so that the surface of the plate faces up and down. As already described, the curtain plate 900 extends from the front end of the front frame of the lower frame portion 11a from the front of the gaming machine forward from the front end of the front frame 901 to the rear and covers the upper surface of the lower frame 11a from above The front surface portion 901 is integrated with the outer frame 11 by being fixed to the lower frame portion 11a by a fastener such as a screw.

  The upper surface portion 902 has a flat plate shape and is vertically sandwiched by the gaming machine main portion 12 and the lower frame portion 11a. A rear end portion of the upper surface portion 902 projects to the back side of the main game machine portion 12, and an upright portion 903 standing upward is formed at the rear end portion. The standing portion 903 is opposed to the gaming machine main portion 12 from the back side, and a turning portion 904 is formed at the tip end portion thereof so as to be folded forward to the gaming machine. That is, in the curtain plate 900, a groove portion 905 opened to the front of the gaming machine (the gaming machine main portion 12 side) by the upper surface portion 902, the standing portion 903 and the return portion 904 is formed.

  The groove portion 905 extends left and right, and the boundary portion between the front surface portion 901 of the curtain plate 900 and the gaming machine main portion 12 (specifically, the resin base 60 of the inner frame 13) It covers from the rear of the aircraft.

  The gaming machine main part 12 (more specifically, the lower end part of the inner frame 13) is formed with a projecting portion 67 which protrudes backward from the back of the inner frame 13 and extends left and right. In a state of being closed with respect to 11, the projection 67 is configured to enter the groove 905 of the curtain 900.

  As a result, even if it is attempted to insert an illegal tool such as a wire from the gap between the gaming machine main part 12 and the curtain plate 900 for the purpose of illegal access to the various control devices 162 and 242 and the payout device 224 etc. Invasion is impeded by the ridges 67 and the grooves 905. This is trying to improve the crime prevention function.

  The upper surface portion 902 of the curtain plate 900 is shaped like a flat plate facing upward of the gaming machine. For this reason, in the state where the gaming machine main part 12 is opened, there is a possibility that the gaming ball which has fallen from the pachinko machine 10 or the island facility of the gaming hall may be placed on the upper surface part 902. If the gaming machine main unit 12 is closed with the gaming ball resting on the upper surface 902, the gaming ball is caught between the groove 905 and the projecting portion 67 and the gaming machine main 12 is It is feared that movement to the closed position is hindered. This is a new problem that arises due to the improvement of the crime prevention function by the groove portion 905.

  In the present embodiment, a device for solving the above-mentioned problems is provided while maintaining the crime prevention function. Hereinafter, the configuration according to the device will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (b). FIG. 68 (b) is a partially enlarged view showing a portion X in FIG. 68 (a) in an enlarged manner, and shows a state in which the gaming machine main part 12 is opened.

  The distance dimension D1 from the upper surface portion 902 to the return portion 904 (more specifically, the upper surface thereof) is set smaller than the radius dimension R1 of the gaming ball B. The distance dimension D2 from the upper surface portion 902 to the projecting portion 67 is also set smaller than the radius dimension R1 of the gaming ball B. That is, when the return portion 904 and the projecting portion 67 hit in a state where the game ball is placed on the upper surface portion 902, the contact point becomes the lower hemisphere of the game ball.

  Furthermore, although the rising dimension L1 of the protruding portion 67 is set larger than the depth dimension D3 of the groove portion 905, the difference between the two dimensions L1 and D3 is set smaller than the radius dimension R1 of the gaming ball B There is. The difference between the distance dimensions D1 and D2 is also set smaller than the radius dimension R1 of the gaming ball B. Therefore, the gaming ball B does not stay on the projecting portion 67.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the movement of the gaming ball on the upper surface portion 902 when the gaming machine main portion 12 is closed will be described. FIG. 69 is a schematic view showing the relationship between the gaming ball and the gaming machine main part 12 and the curtain plate 900. As shown in FIG.

  In the state where the gaming machine main part 12 is opened and the vertical overlap between the gaming machine main part 12 and the curtain board 900 is avoided, access to the upper surface part 902 of the curtain board 900 is permitted. When trying to close the gaming machine main unit 12 with the gaming ball resting on the upper surface portion 902, the projecting portion 67 of the gaming machine main unit 12 first hits the gaming ball, and the projecting portion 67 Will be pushed backward.

  The game ball pressed by the projecting portion 67 abuts on the return portion 904 of the curtain plate 900. As a result, both the projecting portion 67 and the return portion 904 abut against the lower hemispheric surface of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball is sandwiched back and forth by the projecting portion 67 and the return portion 904 ( See FIG. 69 (a)). Then, the game ball pressed by the projecting portion 67 and the return portion 904 is pushed upward by continuing the rotation of the gaming machine main part 12 toward the closed position as it is (FIG. 69). (B)).

  The gaming ball lifted upward is placed on the lower one of the projecting portion 67 and the return portion 904. Thereafter, when the gaming machine main part 12 moves further, the gaming ball comes in contact with the back face of the gaming machine main part 12 as shown in FIG. 69 (b) → FIG. 69 (c), and this time it is scooped upward by the return part 904; Become.

  The gaming ball scooped upward is temporarily placed on the return section 904 but is pushed backward by the back of the gaming machine main section 12 and thus disengages from the return section 904 and the back of the pachinko machine 10 ( Flows into the game ball collection mechanism provided in the island facility) (see FIG. 69 (c)).

  As a result, the gaming ball that has prevented the movement of the gaming machine main unit 12 to the closed position is discharged from the pachinko machine 10, and the arrival of the gaming machine main unit 12 at the closed position is secured.

  According to the present embodiment described above, the following effects can be obtained.

  By inserting the projection 67 of the gaming machine main part 12 into the groove part 905, it is possible to make it difficult to make an illegal act such as a wire or the like intruding through the boundary between the gaming machine main part 12 and the curtain plate 900. .

  When such a structure is adopted, the standing portion 903 of the curtain plate 900 may be an obstacle that prevents the game ball from escaping from the upper surface portion 902. The movement of the gaming machine main unit 12 to the closed position is impeded by the game balls remaining on the upper surface portion 902, and the operator is incomplete without noticing that the game ball has not completely reached the closed position. There is a possibility of being left alone. This can be a factor that causes a reduction in workability when the gaming machine main part 12 is opened and closed, and a reduction in the crime prevention function.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, by moving the gaming machine main part 12 in the closing direction, the gaming ball moves so as to follow the movement of the gaming machine main part 12, and the gaming ball is a pachinko machine 10 Will be discharged from the This secures the movement of the gaming machine main unit 12 to the closed position, so it is not necessary to remove the gaming ball by hand, for example, and it is further necessary to confirm the presence or absence of the gaming ball before closing the gaming machine main unit 12 There is also no. As a result, the worker can perform the closing operation of the gaming machine main unit 12 without worrying about the presence or absence of the game ball, etc., and it is possible to preferably suppress the reduction in operability.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming ball does not stay on the projecting portion 67 and the return portion 904, and the gaming ball discharged from the pachinko machine 10 is not located behind the pachinko machine 10. It is returned to the recovery mechanism located. Since the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 10 are not discharged into the passage of the game hall or the like, it is not necessary to separately perform a recovery operation of the game balls. Thereby, the improvement effect of the said workability can be made more preferable.

  For example, by tilting the upper surface portion 902 to the front of the gaming machine, the game ball placed on the upper surface portion 902 can be moved to the front of the gaming machine by its own weight, and by avoiding staying on the upper surface portion 902, It is possible to prevent the game ball from becoming an obstacle to the closing operation of the game machine main part 12. However, in such a configuration, since the gaming ball moves toward the gaming machine main part 12, the gaming ball reaches the upper surface 902 while the gaming machine main part 12 is pivoting toward the closed position. In such a case, there may occur a case where the movement of the gaming ball is not in time and the discharge function does not work well. When actually closing the gaming machine main part 12, if the gaming machine main part 12 moves to a certain position, it becomes difficult to visually check the upper surface part 902. Therefore, simply providing the slope can not be expected to have the same effect as the configuration shown in the present embodiment.

  Furthermore, since the weight of the gaming machine main part 12 increases, the gaming machine main part 12 tends to tilt downward (especially at the turning tip) away from the rotation center. In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is made in view of such a situation, and the support function of gaming machine main part 12 is suitably exhibited by keeping the upper surface part of curtain plate 900 horizontal. be able to. From the above reasons, by adopting the configuration described in the present embodiment, it is possible to satisfy all the support functions of the gaming machine main part 12, the crime prevention function, and the improvement of the workability.

  Incidentally, as described above, in the configuration in which the upper surface portion 902 is simply inclined, the support function is not properly exhibited, and the same effect as the configuration shown in the present embodiment can not be expected at all.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the following alternative configurations may be applied individually to the configurations in the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other.

  (1) In the first to fourth embodiments, the operation area is changed during reach display (reach variation), but the detailed timing of changing the operation area is arbitrary. However, it is preferable that at least a change display (during a game cycle) be performed in order to suitably exert the attention level improvement effect of the player.

  Furthermore, although the operation area is expanded as part of the effect during reach display, this may be changed to reduce the operation area. Furthermore, it is also possible to repeat the expansion → reduction of the operation area during reach display (during game play).

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment and the third to seventh embodiments described above, the operation means is deformed during reach display (reach change), but the operation means is changed in detail. The timing is arbitrary. However, it is preferable that at least a change display (during a game cycle) be performed in order to suitably exert the attention level improvement effect of the player.

  (2) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the operation modes of the push button members 320 and 550 as the "operation means" are the same before and after the operation area is changed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation mode changes with the change of the area.

  Specifically, it is possible to set the operation direction in a relatively small operation area (the normal state) to be different from the operation direction in a relatively large operation area (the expanded state). It is.

  Also, the operation method in each state may be different. For example, in the first embodiment, the following changes can be made. That is, the push button member is formed of a deformable film-like member, the liquid is injected into the inside, and the adjusting means (for example, hydraulic cylinder etc.) for adjusting the pressure of the liquid And to adopt. In the normal state, by increasing the pressure of the liquid, substantial deformation when the player touches is not possible, and in the expanded state, the substantial pressure is allowed by reducing the pressure of the liquid. In the expanded state, the push button member can be grasped by projecting the push button member upward. Here, if the stagnation operation of the push button member is allowed, the operation method can be changed from the push operation in the normal state to the stagnation operation in the expanded state. This can contribute to the further improvement of the degree of attention to the push button member.

  (3) In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the operation corresponding rendering is completed on condition that the push button member 320 or the cover body 530 as the "operation means" has returned to the position before the operation. Although it has been configured to prevent the hand from being attached from the operation means after the operation, such conditions do not have to be essential. It is sufficient if the expansion state is switched to the normal state on the condition that at least the operation means is returned to the position before the operation.

  However, when the return to the position before the operation is not completed due to a hand being attached to the operation means or the like, the operation area expansion effect is restricted until the return is completed in the subsequent game rounds. Therefore, desirably, as described in the above embodiment, by incorporating the return of the push button member 320 or the like to the position before the operation in the condition for completing the rendering, the player can release the push button member 320 or the like To facilitate switching to the normal state after the operation area expansion effect. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the effect based on the change of the operation area becomes difficult to occur while the operation area expansion effect is restricted.

  (4) In the first and second embodiments, the push button members 320 and 550 are adopted as the "operation means", but instead of this, for example, a lever member such as a joystick is adopted. Good. For example, in the case of realizing the expansion of the operation area by the lever member alone, the amount of projection of the lever member from the pedestal or the like on which the lever member is installed may be changed. Further, when adopting the lever member, the operation direction is configured to be plural directions, and the operation direction restricting means for restricting the operation direction of the lever member is adopted, and the operation direction is restricted when the operation area is expanded. It is also possible to cancel the regulation by means.

  Furthermore, the "operation means" need not necessarily be configured to be displaced based on the player's operation, and a configuration that accepts the player's operation without displacement may be employed, such as a touch panel.

  (5) In the above embodiments, the display control device 410 is adopted as the "modification means" or the "deformation means", but a control device other than the display control device 410 (for example, the audio lamp control device 143) is adopted. It is also possible.

  (6) In the first embodiment, the operation switch unit 40 is disposed in the upper bulging portion 28. However, if the operation switch unit 40 exists at a position where the player can operate, the detailed arrangement of the operation switch unit 40 Is optional. For example, it may be provided in the lower side bulging portion 29 or may be disposed in a position in line with the bulging portions 28, 29.

  (8) In the first embodiment, the shutter member 330 constituting the "modification unit" restricts the upward projection of the push button member 320 as the "operation unit". It is sufficient that the operation area can be changed by covering a part of the operation area in the operation surface portion 322, and the function as the stopper is not necessarily required.

  In addition, although the operation stroke is increased when the operation area is expanded in the push button member 320, the operation stroke can be the same in both the normal state and the expanded state.

  (9) In the first embodiment, in order to realize smooth switching from the expanded state to the normal state, normally, under the condition that the push button member 320 stands by at the maximum projecting position in the expanded state, Although it was set as the structure which switches to a state, it is also possible to change this as follows. That is, instead of the position detection sensor 352 which detects that the push button member 320 is at the maximum projecting position, a touch sensor which detects the finger when touching the push button member 320 (more specifically, the operation surface 322) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which return from the expanded state to the normal state is performed when the touch on the operation surface 322 is not detected by the touch sensor.

  (10) In the second embodiment, although the first continuous operation compatible rendering (operation area expansion rendering) is not performed when the upper tray 501 is full, it is limited to this It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, even when the upper plate 501 is full, it is possible to perform the first continuous operation corresponding rendering. However, in this case, it is desirable to make the following changes together.

  That is, when in the low frequency support mode and the number of reservations reaches the upper limit, the first continuous operation corresponding presentation is performed even if the upper tray 501 is full. When the number of reservations is at the upper limit, the player often stops the firing of the game ball (especially at the time of reach display), and furthermore, the player suffers a loss by not being able to continue the firing of the game ball. The possibility is low. Therefore, even if the ball biting occurs due to the movement of the cover body 530 when the first continuous operation corresponding presentation is performed in such a situation, the influence on the game progress can be suppressed.

  Further, when the game ball is not fired, even if the upper tray 501 is full, it is possible to perform the first continuous operation corresponding rendering. Even if inconveniences such as the above-mentioned ball biting occur under a situation where the game ball is not fired, it is difficult to affect the game progress.

  By adopting at least one of the above configurations, it is possible to ease the execution condition of the first continuous operation corresponding presentation.

  (11) In the second embodiment, the storage area is divided back and forth by the partition 522. However, instead of this, the bottom 511 of the upper tray main body 510 is aligned on the back side of the area on the front side It is also possible to form the channel 523 in the form of a lower step.

  However, when the storage sphere is pushed by the cover body 530, a force can be transmitted through the contact portion between the storage spheres. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the force from the cover body 530 from reaching the alignment passage 523 by minimizing the contact between the storage spheres present in the area on the front side and the storage spheres present in the alignment passage 523 as much as possible. it can. In consideration of this point, it is desirable to adopt the divider 522 described in the above embodiment.

  (12) In the second embodiment, the distance between the front surface of the partition 522 and the top plate 532 increases toward the upstream side of the storage area RE, but at least the operating direction of the cover 530 As long as the storage balls can be guided in the direction intersecting with the pressing direction), for example, they may be configured to be larger toward the downstream side. In addition, although the rear end portion of the top plate portion 532 is linear and the front surface of the partition portion 522 is curved, this is reversed, the rear end portion of the top plate portion 532 is curved, and the front surface of the partition portion 522 is flat It is also possible to make it a shape.

  (13) In the second embodiment, when the cover 530 is operated in the expanded state, the push button member 550 moves to follow the cover 530 to operate the cover 530. Can be detected by the detection sensor 557A. It is also possible to change this and separately provide a detection sensor for the cover 530 and a detection sensor for the push button 550 so that the cover 530 and the push button 550 do not move together. is there.

  (14) In the second embodiment, when the cover body 530 is moved backward based on the operation of the player, a part of the cover body 530 is projected to the storage area side. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the cover body 530 does not protrude to the storage area side even when the cover body 530 moves backward.

  (15) In the second embodiment, the arrangement for temporarily stopping the payout of the game ball from the payout device 224 when the continuous operation corresponding effect is being executed (specifically, the period after the completion of the continuous operation). It may be In other words, the payout of the game ball may be delayed until the end of the continuous operation corresponding effect.

  (16) In the third embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation when the maximum number of times (“10 times”) is selected as the specified number of operations is selected as the maximum number of times—one for the specified number of operations. It was configured to be lower than the jackpot expectation level of. More specifically, the jackpot winning expectation is the highest in the maximum number of times -1. As long as the prescribed operation frequency is increased, the jackpot winning expectation may be increased. For example, the jackpot winning expectation may be maximized at the maximum frequency.

  (17) In the third embodiment, the mode corresponding to the operation corresponding to the operation is different depending on whether the maximum number of times is selected as the specified number of times of operation or the case where other than that is selected. Specifically, in the case where the maximum number of times is selected as the operation prescribed number of times, it is configured to perform advance notification of the game result based on the operation of the player, and in the case where the other number of times is selected It was configured not to announce. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make the aspect of the operation corresponding rendering the same in the case where the maximum number of times is selected and the case where the other is selected.

  For example, even if the number of times other than the maximum number is selected as the operation prescribed number, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which advance notification is performed. However, since it is not notified to the player how many times is set as the operation prescribed number of times, there is a high possibility that the initial stage of the operation will be repeatedly hit. In the configuration in which the advance notification is performed under such a situation, the advance notification is performed suddenly during the continuous hit. This deviates from the original expectation of reflecting the player's intention in the operation response presentation. Therefore, it is preferable that the advance notice be executed at the maximum prescribed number of times, and the intention of the player be easily reflected on the operation response effect.

  (18) In the third and fourth embodiments, the display screen 94a is configured to suggest that the operation has been effectively received. It is also possible to give.

  Furthermore, in view of the fact that acceptance is suggested based on at least the deformation of the operation switch unit (change of the operation area), it is possible to omit the other indication function executed on the display screen 94a or the like.

  (19) In the above third and fourth embodiments, the timing of execution of acceptance suggestion based on the deformation of the operation switch unit and the execution timing of acceptance suggestion performed on the display screen 94a are shifted. Is also possible.

  For example, after the acceptance suggestion based on the deformation of the operation switch unit is executed, the acceptance suggestion may be executed on the display screen 94a.

  (20) In the fourth embodiment, the MPU 412 of the display control device 410 constituting the “regulating means” operates even when the player's operation is effectively accepted during execution of the continuous expansion effect. The suggestion that it was accepted effectively was set to be temporarily avoided. By changing this and restricting the acceptance of the operation itself, it is possible to temporarily avoid the suggestion that the operation has been effectively accepted.

  (21) In the fourth embodiment, the regulation of suggestion in the case where the operation by the player is effectively accepted during execution of the continuous expansion effect is performed according to the number of times of operation, but this is changed It is also possible to regulate the suggestion over a specific period of time. However, considering that it is not unique at which timing the operation by the player is performed, there is a possibility that the function may not be exhibited properly with respect to the regulation of the suggestion based on the period. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt a configuration for restricting the suggestion according to the operation time as shown in the fourth embodiment.

  (22) In the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, the inner operation member 610 as the "inner operation portion" is completely covered by the outer operation member 620 as the "outside operation portion". It is sufficient if the inner operation member 610 is covered so that at least the inner operation member 610 can not be accessed by the outer operation member 620, which is not limited thereto.

  Further, the outer operation member 620 does not necessarily have to be formed in a bowl shape. It is sufficient if at least a function to prevent access to the inner operation member 610 is provided, and the shape is arbitrary.

  (23) In the fifth embodiment, the inner operating member 610 is in contact with the outer operating member 620 from the inside, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the inner operating member 610 in the normal state It is also possible to form a gap between the and the outer operation member 620.

  However, in view of the point that the outer operation member 620 is the target of the pressing operation by the player and further that the outer operation member 620 is movable, in view of the protection of the outer operation member 620, the inner operation member It is preferable to make it contact | abut with respect to the outer side operation member 620.

  (24) In the fifth embodiment, the outer operation members 620 are arranged side by side, and in the sixth embodiment, the outer operation members 620A are arranged in the front and back direction. Or the number is arbitrary.

  For example, the outer operating member 620 may be singular. However, in order to shorten the period required for the deformation of the operation switch unit and to achieve smooth operation corresponding to the operation, the operation stroke may be shortened by using a plurality of outer operation members 620. This can contribute to shortening of the time required for deformation.

  (25) In the sixth embodiment, the lock device 660 is adopted and the operation of the outer operation member 620A (entire operation unit 601A) is disabled in the deformed state, but the lock device 660 is omitted and However, the operation of the outer operation member 620A (entire operation unit 601A) may be permitted.

  (26) In the seventh embodiment, the movable surface 750 as the “second operating member” retracts with respect to the button member 720 as the “first operating member”, whereby the operation surface portion 705 is deformed. However, the operation surface portion 705 may be deformed by changing this and projecting the movable member 750. This makes it easy to convey the change of the operation surface 705 to the player. However, since the movable member 750 is set to a smaller occupancy rate in the operation surface portion 705, there is a concern that the pressing operation is difficult to perform after the projection as described above. This can be a factor that reduces the operability of the operation switch unit 700. Therefore, in consideration of the operability, it is desirable to adopt a configuration in which the movable member 750 is retracted as shown in the seventh embodiment.

  Incidentally, in the case of adopting the configuration in which the movable member 750 is retracted as shown in the seventh embodiment, for example, the ease of noticeable deformation is slightly inferior to the configuration in which the movable member 750 is protruded. there is a possibility. This is because while in the configuration in which the protrusion is made, the deformation stands out by increasing the amount of protrusion, in the configuration where it is made into the configuration in which it is made to retract, the change in appearance does not progress even if it is further retracted. to cause. Therefore, for example, the light transmitting property is given to the movable member 750 and the button member 720 does not transmit light, and it is preferable to incorporate a light emitter for emitting light from the distal end portion 753 through the projecting portion 752 in the operation portion 701. As the movable member 750 retracts, the aspect of the light emitted through the slit 723 changes, which can indicate that the movable member 750 is retracted.

  (27) In the seventh embodiment, the operation surface 705 has a curved surface, but the operation surface 705 may have a flat surface. However, in order to increase the haptic change after deformation, it is preferable to make the operation surface 705 a curved surface.

  (28) In the seventh embodiment, although the operation direction of the operation unit 701 and the relative displacement direction of the button member 720 and the movable member 750 are parallel to each other, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible that the operation direction and the relative displacement direction intersect each other.

  (29) In the seventh embodiment, the movable member 750 having a relatively small occupancy ratio is displaced with respect to the button member 720 having a relatively large occupancy ratio of the operation surface portion 705. It is also possible to reverse.

  (30) In the seventh embodiment, although the start timing of deformation is the timing at which the maximum pressing position is reached, this is changed to return to the maximum projecting position from the timing at which the maximum projecting position is returned or the maximum pressing position. It is also possible to start the deformation at a specific timing during the period.

  (31) In the seventh embodiment, the projection 752 of the movable member 750 has a plate shape, but at least when the player presses the operation surface 706 with a finger or the like, the finger operates the operation. Positions of the top surface portion 722 of the button member 720 and the tip end portion 753 of the movable member 750 in contact with both the region formed by the button member 720 and the region formed by the movable member 750 in the surface portion 705 It is sufficient if the relationship is defined. For example, the protrusion may have a columnar (for example, cylindrical) shape.

  Further, the number of configurations corresponding to the movable member 750 is not limited to one, and may be plural. For example, it is also possible to arrange a plurality of movable members having a cylindrical shape and different in diameter concentrically and move the movable members individually.

  (32) In the first embodiment and the third to seventh embodiments, the operation switch unit 40 or the like as the “operation means” is disposed on the upper bulging portion 28 of the front door frame 14 Although the operation switch unit 40 or the like may be operated at least from the front side of the gaming machine, the detailed arrangement thereof is arbitrary. For example, the operation switch unit may be disposed on the lower side bulging portion 29 or may be disposed around the gaming ball emission handle 45.

  Furthermore, with regard to the direction of the operation switch unit, it is not necessary to arrange the operation unit to face upward, and for example, the operation unit may be arranged to face the front of the gaming machine or to face obliquely upward. Placement is also possible.

  (33) In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the operation switch mechanism 502 as the "operation means" is the push button member 550 as the "first operation portion" and the "second operation portion". Although it is set as the structure which has the cover body 530 as these, several operation parts are not necessarily required. For example, the target of the continuous operation as the “first specific operation” and the target of the specific one-shot operation as the “second specific operation” may be shared. In this case, for example, one of the push button member 550 and the cover body 530 may be omitted, and the other may be a target of the continuous operation and the specific one-shot operation.

  (34) In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the command effect is continued when the number of times of operation of the push button member 550 reaches the specified number of times set as the plurality of numbers (specific Although the single-shot operation is permitted), the conditions for the command effect (specific one-shot operation) may be changed as follows. That is, when the push button member 550 is operated at a predetermined timing, the command effect may be continued (a specific one-shot operation is permitted), or may be maintained in a pressed state for a predetermined period. In this case, the command effect may be continued (specific one-shot operation is permitted).

  (35) In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the configuration of the cover 530 may be changed as follows. That is, the cover stopper device 540 is omitted and the cover 530 can always be displaced, and if the specific one-shot operation is not permitted, the position detection sensor for the cover 530 is invalidated and the specific one-shot operation is permitted. The same position detection sensor may be activated when it is detected. In addition, the position detection sensor for cover body 530 is always validated, and when the specific one-shot operation is permitted, the operation is forcibly performed in the operation determination process based on the detection information from the position detection sensor. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the state to be invalidated is switched to the state in which the determination process is activated.

  (36) In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the condition is that the hold information as the "special information" is stored in the hold information storage area 824 as the "acquired information storage means". Although it was set as the structure which implements instruction production as, it is not necessarily limited to this. If no hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 824, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the command effect is performed. In such a configuration, the operation of the cover body 530 may be permitted, for example, when it is a subsequent game session and the game session to which the instruction effect is applied corresponds to the big hit.

  However, even if the prompting of the continuous operation is performed in a state where the hold information is not present, the possibility of the continuous operation not being performed becomes high because the connection between the game times becomes weak. In this case, the rendering function of the operation switch mechanism 502 can not be exhibited well. Therefore, desirably, as described in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, it is preferable that the command effect is performed on condition that at least one hold information exists.

  (37) In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the relationship between the specific one-shot operation of the cover body 530 and the jackpot is unique, and the specific one-shot operation is permitted. Although it was always configured to be a jackpot at the game times or subsequent game times, it is also possible to change this as follows. That is, when the specific one-shot operation is permitted, the jackpot may be won, but the jackpot may not necessarily be determined. In this case, for example, the jackpot expectation degree in the case where the specific one-shot operation is permitted may be set higher than, for example, the jackpot expectation degree given to the super reach.

  (38) It is also possible to change the permission conditions of the specific one-shot operation and the prompt execution conditions of the specific one-shot operation in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment as follows. That is, the specific single operation and its prompting are permitted for the specific single operation and its prompting on condition that the specific single operation was performed in the previous game times or the specific single operation was attempted. It is also possible to have a configuration that

  Generally, in a gaming machine, when similar effects are continuously executed, an expectation degree to shift to a gaming state advantageous to a player becomes higher as the number of continuous times increases. There are many things. For this reason, in a configuration in which specific one-shot operations in multiple game times and their prompts are permitted based on the multiple-shot operation, it is possible to predict that the last one will have the highest expectation if performed multiple times. It is assumed that the action of trying a specific one-shot operation is performed only when the specific one-shot operation and its prompting are allowed several times in a row. In this case, the meaning of permitting the specific one-shot operation and its prompting in a plurality of game times is diminished.

  Therefore, in the present modification, the specific single operation and the prompt thereof are performed on the condition that the specific single operation is performed in the previous game run or the specific single operation is attempted. It was set as the composition that operation and the prompting are permitted. According to this configuration, when the prompt for the specific one-shot operation is ignored, the specific one-shot operation and the prompt in the later game round are not permitted, so the inconvenience that the prompt for the specific one-shot operation is ignored hardly occurs. can do. As a result, it is possible to make it less likely that the specific one-shot operation will not be performed although the operation opportunity is given.

  In the case of performing a single-shot operation (corresponding to "first specific operation") to prompt the specific single-shot operation (corresponding to "second specified operation") in a plurality of game times, the operation originally It may give the impression of being bothersome to a less interested player. As a result, this can be a factor that weakens the interest in the repeated operation that triggers the specific one-shot operation itself. Here, as shown in the present modified example, when an attempt is made to perform a specific one-shot operation during a request for a specific one-shot operation, the configuration is to restrict the request for the specific one-shot operation in the subsequent game rounds. When the request for the specific one-shot operation is ignored, the specific one-shot operation at the later game play and the prompt are not permitted, and thus the inconvenience as described above does not occur.

  On the other hand, in the case of a player who is interested in the operation itself, the specific single operation is permitted since the prompt of the specific single operation in the subsequent game is continued by trying the specific single operation in response to the specific single operation prompt. Increase opportunities for Thereby, a desirable gaming machine is realized for both players who are interested in the operation and players who are not interested.

  When trying a specific one-shot operation, the player's hand will touch the cover body 530. Therefore, as a "monitoring means", a contact sensor for monitoring contact with the cover body 530 or a pressure sensor for monitoring pressurization to the cover body 530 is employed to monitor whether or not a specific one-shot operation has been attempted. By doing this, the technical idea shown in the present modification can be suitably embodied.

  It should be noted that, even if a specific one-shot operation is requested during execution of the command effect, if no attempt is made at the specific one-shot operation, the command effect may be forcibly terminated halfway. It is.

  (39) In the ninth embodiment, the specific one-time operation is permitted at the game times corresponding to the jackpot and the game times before it, and the modes of the respective specific one-time operations are common. However, this may be changed as follows. That is, the aspect of the specific single operation in the game times corresponding to the jackpot may be different from the aspect of the specific single operation in the previous game times.

  According to this configuration, even when the specific one-shot operation can be performed, the player's attention tends to be directed to what the operation mode is, and repetition of the specific one-shot operation causes monotony. Can be suppressed.

  For example, in the case where the cover stopper device 540 has a second stopper piece different from the first stopper piece 541 and is in the released state at the previous game round not corresponding to the big hit, the second It is preferable that both the stopper pieces move to the release position when the stopper pieces remain in the blocking position and the game is released in the game round corresponding to the big hit. When the jackpot is announced first in the game times before the game times corresponding to the jackpot, the operation stroke is limited so as not to be maximum. In this manner, it is possible to suggest to the player whether or not the game times correspond to the jackpot by the difference in the operation stroke, which can contribute to the improvement of the attention to the specific one-shot operation.

  (40) In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment described above, the command effect is started at the game turn corresponding to the super reach (a configuration in which the prompt operation is performed repeatedly), but Without being limited to this, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the instruction effect is started at the game times corresponding to the normal reach, as long as at least the operation reception period for the repetitive operation can be secured.

  However, on the condition that hold information is stored in the hold information storage area 824 as described above, in the configuration in which the command effect is performed, the operation reception period is secured in the game turn corresponding to complete removal not shifting to reach display. It tends to be difficult to do. Therefore, it is preferable to start instruction effects for the game times in which a certain variable display period is secured.

  (41) In the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, when an attempt to operate the cover body 530 is not made when a specific one-shot operation is prompted, generation of a subsequent command effect is made It is also possible to reduce the frequency. However, in the gaming machine, since the same player does not always play a game, the player who played the game first ignored the prompt of the specific one-shot operation, which affects the player who played the game later. It is not desirable to extend. Therefore, in the case of adopting the modified example, the penalty of the occurrence frequency decrease when the request for the specific one-shot operation is ignored is, for example, a predetermined period of time when a predetermined restriction period has elapsed or a predetermined period of game ball firing operation. It may be configured to be released if it has not been performed.

  (42) In the ninth embodiment, when the command effect is performed, the operation reception period of the continuous operation is changed according to the number of stored hold information, but instead of this, It is also possible to change the prescribed number of times as the continuation condition of the command effect according to the number of the stored hold information.

  (43) In the tenth embodiment, the standing portion 903 of the curtain plate 900 is provided with the opening portion 906 as a "relief portion" for releasing the game ball to the rear of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, when there is no configuration corresponding to the standing portion 903, the gaming ball guided to the back of the gaming machine by the reinforcing bead portion 912 is lowered through the portion opened to the back of the gaming machine in the reinforcing bead portion 912. It detaches from the side support bracket 18. Focusing on such an action, it is also possible to use a portion of the reinforcing bead portion 912 that is open to the rear as a “escaping portion”.

  (44) In the tenth embodiment, the reinforcing bead portion 912 as a "recess" extends to the left and right, and the gaming ball on the support base 911 pushed by the gaming machine main portion 12 is the gaming machine main portion 12 It is configured to be guided to the central part side of, but is not limited to this. As long as the game balls existing on the support base 911 can be guided to a position which does not prevent the movement of the game machine main part 12 to the closed position, the guide direction is arbitrary.

  For example, in the configuration shown in the schematic view of FIG. 70, the rotation center of the gaming machine main section 12X (inner frame 13X) is disposed at the rear of the lower inner frame fitting 72X, and the gaming machine main section 12X When it is rotated, the rear face of the gaming machine main part 12X and the rear end of the lower inner frame fitting 72X pass above the lower support fitting 18X.

  In this configuration, the gaming balls on the support base 911X pushed by the back of the gaming machine main part 12X and the rear end of the lower inner frame fitting 72X are as shown in FIG. 70 (a) → FIG. 70 (b) → FIG. As shown in (c), it is easy to move to the side (right side) away from the center of rotation of the gaming machine main part 12. Therefore, the reinforcing bead portion 912 is configured to extend from the portion vertically overlapping with the lower inner frame metal fitting 72X in the support base 911X to a portion not overlapping, and to the portion not overlapping with the movement of the gaming machine main portion 12 to the closed position. By being guided, it is possible to avoid that the movement of the gaming machine main part 12 to the closed position is hindered.

  In this modification, as shown in FIG. 70 (d), even if the gaming ball is guided to a position which does not prevent the movement of the gaming machine main part 12X to the closed position, the gaming ball is the lower support bracket 18X. Although the configuration in which it is not discharged from the top but remains on the lower support fitting 18X is illustrated, it is also possible to change it as follows. That is, applying the same idea as the tenth embodiment and curving the end on the right side of the reinforcing bead portion 912X toward the rear of the gaming machine, it is also opened to the rear of the gaming machine, and the curtain plate 900 (stand up portion By providing the structure corresponding to the opening 906 in the portion located at the opening destination in 903), it is possible to discharge the gaming ball guided along the reinforcing bead portion 912X to the rear of the gaming machine. is there.

  (45) In the tenth embodiment, although the support base 911 of the lower support fitting 18 has the reinforcing bead portion 912 as a "recess", the "recess" does not necessarily have a reinforcing function. There is no need to It is sufficient if at least the upper surface of the support base 911 is recessed, and the application thereof may be specialized in securing the storage space of the head 921 of the screw 920, for example. When this modification is adopted, it is not necessary to indent both the upper surface and the lower surface of the support base 911, and only the upper surface of the support base 911 may be indented.

  (46) In the tenth embodiment, the arrangement of the upper hinge portion 16U and the arrangement of the lower hinge portion 16L may be interchanged. In other words, the upper and lower positions of the configuration corresponding to the lower hinge portion 16L and the configuration corresponding to the upper hinge portion 16U can be arbitrarily changed. However, since the game balls dropped from the game machine are dropped downward, it is assumed that the dropped game balls can easily be placed on the hinge disposed at the lower part of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, about the effect which the above-mentioned lower side hinge part 16L plays, when the composition concerned is arranged at the lower part of pachinko machine 10, it is exhibited suitably.

  (47) In the tenth embodiment, although the groove width is configured to be constant for the reinforcing bead portion as the "recess", the groove width may be set if the guiding function of the game ball can be secured. It does not have to be constant. For example, the groove width may be gradually reduced toward the opening 906 as the “escaping portion”.

  (48) In the tenth embodiment, the lower support bracket 18 is provided with the shaft pin 914 as the “shaft portion”, and the lower inner frame fitting 72 is provided with the bearing portion 933 constituting the “bearing portion”. However, the lower support bracket 18 may be provided with a bearing portion, and the lower inner frame fitting 72 may be provided with a shaft pin.

  (49) Other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which a motorized character opens a predetermined number of times when gaming balls enter a specific area of a special device The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a ball enters and becomes a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with other features, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a ball ball, etc.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is awarded to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  Furthermore, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage section and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configuration illustrated in the parentheses or the like.

Features A1. In a gaming machine provided with operating means (push button member 320 etc.) operated by a player,
The operation means is configured to be switchable between a first state and a second state in which an operation range in which the player can directly touch and operate is wider than the first state.
According to the game situation, by changing the operation means to the first state and the second state, it is provided with changing means (shutter member 330, display control device 410, etc.) for changing the operation range. A game machine that features it.

  According to the feature A1, the operation range that the player can directly touch and operate is changed according to the game situation. As a result, when the operating means is operated, a game for visually or tactilely confirming what the operating range is like can be realized, which can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the operating means.

  For example, a configuration is provided in which the changing unit has an expanding unit that expands the operable range by switching the operating unit from the first state to the second state when a preset condition is satisfied. It is good to adopt.

  The configuration shown in the present feature may be changed as follows. That is, “the operation means is provided on the front side of the gaming machine, and includes operation means for outputting an operation signal by the operation of the player, and effect control means for performing different effects when the operation signal is inputted and not inputted. An operation range in which the operation signal is output when the player directly touches and operates the operation means is defined in the operation means, and the operation means has first and second states different in the operation range. And changing means for changing the operation range by switching the operation means between the first state and the second state according to the game situation. It may be a game machine to be

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the operation range in the second state includes at least a part of the operation range in the first state.

  According to the feature A2, by setting the common operation range in the first state and the second state, it is possible to suppress missing of the operation opportunity without the player being able to grasp the portion to be operated.

Feature A3. The changing means is
Restricting means (shutter member 330) for restricting the operation of a specific portion (for example, a portion other than the central portion in the operation surface portion 322) in the operation means;
And release means (such as a solenoid 340 and a display control device 410) for releasing the operation restriction by the restriction means.
It is in the first state by the operation restriction being performed by the restriction means, and is in the second state by the operation restriction being released by the releasing means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A2, the operation of the specific part is restricted by being in the first state, and the operation of the specific part is enabled by being in the second state. As described above, by changing the operation of the specific part by restriction / restriction, it is possible to suggest a change in the operation range to the player.

Feature A4. The restriction means is a movable cover that covers the specific part in the first state,
The release means is brought into the second state by moving the cover portion to a position not covering the specific portion,
In the second state, when the specific part is exposed, the specific part can be directly touched and operated, and the gaming machine according to the feature A3.

  According to the feature A3, the player is notified of how the operation range has changed by switching between the first state in which the specific part is covered and the second state in which the specific part is not covered by the restriction means (cover part). It can be shown clearly.

  In addition, by making the cover part movable, the change in the operation range can be suitably used as an effect to increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, the player may play a game while putting his hand on the operation means. In this case, it is possible to provide the player with not only visual or auditory effects but also tactile effects. Become.

Feature A5. The operation means is an operation button (push button member 320) having an operation surface (operation surface portion 322),
The restriction means covers a part of the operation surface so as to allow the pressing operation of the operation surface in the first state, and the range covered in the second state is smaller than that in the first state or A movable cover (shutter member 330) configured not to cover the operation surface;
The release means is
Drive means (such as a solenoid 340 or a gear 345) for moving the cover in a predetermined range including the position in the first state and the position in the second state;
A game control unit (display control device 410) for controlling the drive unit such that the cover unit is in the first state or the second state; .

  According to the feature A5, by changing the range covered by the cover in the operation surface, it is possible to clearly show the player how the operation range has changed.

  In addition, by making the cover part movable, the change in the operation range can be suitably used as an effect to increase the degree of attention to the game. In addition, the player may play a game while putting his hand on the operation means. In this case, it is possible to provide the player with not only visual or auditory effects but also tactile effects. Become.

Feature A6. The operation button is displaceable in a predetermined direction by being operated by the player,
The cover portion is provided movably in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction,
The drive control unit drives the drive unit to switch the operation unit to the first state based on the return of the operation button to the position before the operation in the second state. The gaming machine according to feature A5, which is controlled.

  In the case where the operable range is expanded by the movement of the cover portion, it is preferable that the cover portion be smoothly moved when the operable range is reduced. In this respect, in the present feature, when switching from the second state to the first state, the cover portion is moved on the condition that the operation button is returned to the position before the operation. This can reduce the chance that the cover portion interferes with the hand (finger or the like) to prevent the switching to the first state.

  Feature A7. An effect execution unit that executes a predetermined effect by returning the operation button to the position before the operation when the operation button is operated in the second state (function to execute the effect in the display control device 410) The gaming machine according to feature A6, comprising:

  According to the feature A7, after pressing the operation button with a finger or the like, a predetermined effect is performed by releasing the finger or the like from the operation button. This makes it possible to urge the player to withdraw the finger from the operation means after the pressing operation, and can contribute to the facilitation of the switching to the first state.

Feature A8. The operation means is
A first operation unit (push button member 550),
And a second operation unit (cover body 530) provided separately from the first operation unit and displaceable based on the operation.
The changing means restricts the displacement of the second operating portion in the first state, and releases the displacement restriction of the second operating portion in the second state,
First prompting means for prompting the user to operate the second operation unit in the first state;
A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, further comprising second prompting means for prompting operation of the second operation unit in the second state.

  According to the feature A8, the player can grasp whether or not the operation range has changed from the feeling of operating the second operation unit. Specifically, it is possible to grasp whether or not the displacement of the second operation unit is restricted by trying an operation. By using the change in the operation range as the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game, it is possible to provide the player with not only visual or auditory effects but also tactile effects.

Feature A9. The game machine is provided with a storage plate (upper plate 501) which is provided on the front face of the game machine so as to be bulging forward to the game machine and can store game balls.
The storage dish has a main body portion (upper dish main body 510) fixed to the front face portion of the gaming machine and provided with a storage area forming portion (bottom portion 511 and peripheral wall portion 512),
A front movable panel portion (cover body 530) provided along the front surface portion of the main body portion, covering the front surface portion from the front of the gaming machine, and provided so as to be movable relative to the main body portion;
The gaming machine according to the feature A8, wherein the second operation unit is configured by the front movable panel unit, and the displacement restriction is released when a preset condition is satisfied.

  Some gaming machines are provided with operation buttons on the front surface and the top surface of the storage tray in consideration of facilitating or highlighting access to the operation unit (for example, push button). In such a gaming machine, in order to realize the change of the operation range while securing the operability, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which another operation button is added to the same storage plate. However, in such a configuration, securing of the arrangement area of the operation button increases the overhang of the storage tray to the front of the gaming machine or makes the storage area easy to be compressed. Therefore, if the front movable panel portion (for example, the outer shell forming portion of the storage tray) is used as the second operation portion instead of adding the operation button, the operation area can be expanded while suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature A10. The first operation unit is provided so as to be displaceable in the same direction as the displacement direction of the second operation unit.
A detection unit configured to detect that the first operation unit has been operated based on the displacement of the first operation unit;
When the first operation unit is operated, the first operation unit is displaced independently of the second operation unit, and when the second operation unit is operated, the second operation is operated. The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the first operation unit is configured to be displaced following a unit.

  According to the feature A10, even when either the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated, the detection unit can detect that the operation is performed. According to this configuration, the detection means can be shared to contribute to simplification of the electrical configuration.

  Characteristics A11. The front movable panel unit moves from the position not overlapping from above to the storage area to the position overlapping from above to the storage area by moving to the rear of the gaming machine based on the operation of the player. The gaming machine according to the feature A9 or the feature A10 characterized in that it is configured.

  When the front movable panel (for example, the outer shell forming part) is adopted as the second operation part as shown in the feature A9, the front movable panel can be moved at a position away from the storage area. Interference with the storage ball when operating the device can be avoided. However, in such a configuration, the protrusion of the storage tray to the front of the gaming machine becomes large, which may cause the player to feel a sense of oppression. On the other hand, when the storage area forming part is made smaller to secure the operation area of the front movable panel part, the storage amount decreases and the convenience of the storage tray is reduced.

  In this respect, as shown in the present feature, if the outer shell forming portion overlaps with the storage area from the upper side only during effect execution, it is possible to suppress the increase in the feeling of compression while securing the storage amount.

Feature A12. The rear part of the storage area is an intake passage (alignment passage 523) for taking in the gaming balls in an aligned state,
The moving range of the front movable panel portion is set such that, when reaching the maximum displacement position to the rear, overlapping from above with respect to the take-in passage is avoided. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A12, it is suppressed that the game ball existing in the loading passage is pushed by the front movable panel portion, and it is suppressed that the movement of the outer locking portion to the rear becomes the hindrance of the loading of the game ball. Can.

Feature A13. In the storage area, a wall (partitioning section 522) is formed, which stands up from the bottom and divides the intake passage from the area which is forward of the intake passage.
The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein an upper end portion of the wall portion is positioned lower than an upper surface portion (top plate portion 532) of the front movable panel portion.

  According to the feature A13, even if the storage sphere is pushed backward by the front movable panel portion, it is possible to suppress the influence thereof from extending onto the intake passage.

  For example, the height difference between the upper end of the wall and the upper surface of the outer locking portion may be larger than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  Feature A14. When any one of the wall and the upper surface of the front movable panel is inclined to the side of the gaming machine, the distance between the wall and the front movable panel is increased toward the side. The gaming machine according to the feature A13, which is a feature.

  According to the feature A14, when the storage balls existing between the front movable panel portion and the wall portion are pushed toward the wall portion by the operation of the front movable panel portion, the storage balls are used as the wall portion or the front movable panel portion Can be urged to move laterally along the As a result, since the pressed reservoir ball escapes in the direction intersecting with the operation direction of the front movable panel portion, the pushing operation of the front movable panel portion is less likely to be hindered.

  In particular, by setting the relief direction of the storage spheres to the side, it is possible to suppress the pushed storage spheres from passing over the wall and flowing into the intake passage side.

Feature A15. The changing means is
Gaming ball detection means (ball detection sensor 36) for detecting gaming balls in the storage tray or a guide passage (front door side upper tray passage 35) for guiding the gaming balls to the storage tray;
Storage determination means for determining whether or not gaming balls are stored up to a specific position in the storage tray or the guide passage based on the detection result of the game ball detection means (the upper tray 501 is full in the display control device 410 Function to determine whether or not
Specific restriction means for restricting switching to the second state when it is determined by the storage determination means that the game ball has accumulated to the specific position (function to execute the process of step S603 in the display control device 410) And the game machine according to any one of Features A11 to A14.

  As described in the feature A11, in the configuration in which the front movable panel portion is moved to the storage area side by the operation of the player, the operation is performed when the storage tray is full, so that the storage ball is used. It is feared that interruption of operation is likely to occur. Therefore, if the storage tray is full as shown in the present feature, by restricting the switching to the second state, it is possible to make it difficult to cause the inconvenience that the operation can not be performed well.

Feature A16. A ball entry section (operation opening 83) provided in the game area (game area PE) and into which game balls enter;
Gaming ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) for firing game balls stored in the storage tray to the game area based on a predetermined firing operation;
Information acquisition means (practice processing for the operation opening in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry portion;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with an upper limit defined in advance as the upper limit;
The changing means is
A feature A15 is characterized by comprising invalidation means for invalidating the regulation by the specific regulation means when the number of special information stored by the acquired information storage means has reached the prescribed number. The gaming machine described in.

  If the number of stored special information has reached the specified number, there is little possibility that the player will be disadvantaged without performing the game ball firing operation, and there is no real harm even if the firing operation is interrupted. Then, when the full tank, by making the regulation by the specific regulation means invalid, it can be suppressed that it becomes difficult to generate the effect for which the outer shell forming portion is the operation target.

  In addition, if the operation of the front movable panel portion is performed with both hands temporarily, the firing operation is not performed and the operation rate of the gaming machine may decrease. In this respect, if the restriction by the specific restriction means is invalidated when the number of storages of special information has reached the specified number, the decrease in the operation rate can be suitably suppressed.

  It should be noted that "a game ball firing means provided in the game area (game area PE) and firing balls to the game area based on a predetermined ball entry portion (operation opening 83) where the game balls enter the ball (Gaming ball launch mechanism 110), information acquiring means (practice processing for the operation opening in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entry portion, and the predetermined Operation determining means for determining whether or not a shooting operation is performed, and the change means is configured to determine the specific restriction when it is determined that the predetermined shooting operation is not detected by the operation determining means. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which “invalidation means is provided to invalidate the regulation by means”.

Feature A17. Payout means (payout device 224 or the like) for paying out game balls to the storage tray;
The game according to any one of features A11 to A16, comprising: delay means for delaying payout until at least the first state when in the second state Machine.

  According to the feature A17, it is possible to suppress the payout of the gaming ball to the storage tray from being blocked by the front movable panel portion or the blocking of the operation of the shell forming part by the paid gaming ball.

Feature B1. Operation means (push button member 320 etc.) operated by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with effect execution means (display control device 410) for executing an effect based on an operation of the operation means.
The effect executing means urges the player to perform the second specifying operation on the operation means when the first specifying operation as the repetitive operation is performed by the operation means.
A game machine characterized by comprising means for enabling the second specific operation based on the execution of the first specific operation.

  According to the feature B1, when the player performs the first specifying operation (for example, the predetermined number of repeated operations), the second specifying operation is prompted by the gaming machine. Since at least the execution of the first specific operation → the second specific operation is prompted in this way, it is possible to give meaning to the next operation when the operation means is repeatedly operated, and the repetitive operation is wasted. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to give an impression as if there were any. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the operation means (specific operation).

  Note that, for example, it is preferable to adopt a configuration that suggests an expectation degree or the like of transition from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state advantageous to the player when the second specific operation is performed. If such a configuration is adopted, the above-mentioned prescribed number of times is set to be substantially unreachable number of times or substantially attainable number of times, and the expectation degree is not indicated by the presence or absence of reaching the prescribed number of times , Can make an indication of the degree of expectation. When adopting a configuration that can not substantially reach the specified number of times, it is easy to give the player an impression as if the operation was wasted, but if the second specific operation is performed, the degree of expectation etc. By adopting the configuration that suggests the above, such a disadvantage can be suitably eliminated.

Feature B2. It has lottery means (lottery function of the main control device 162) for lottery whether or not the special gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is to be generated.
The effect executing means urges the player to perform the second specifying operation on the operation means when the first specifying operation as the repeated operation of the predetermined number of times set in advance is performed by the operation means,
Furthermore, the effect executing means is
Storage means (ROM 413 of the display control device 410) for storing a plurality of times data for setting the specified number of times in accordance with an expectation at which the special gaming state occurs;
And setting means for setting one of the plurality of frequency data as the prescribed frequency based on the lottery result by the lottery means (a function of executing the processing of step S305 etc. in the display control device 410). The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that

  According to the feature B2, when the first specific operation is performed, the generation expectation of the special gaming state changes depending on how many times the predetermined operation has been performed by the repetition operation. This can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the first specific operation (repetitive operation).

  Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the setting means is set so that the specified number of times corresponding to the number of times data increases as the degree of expectation becomes higher.

  According to the feature B3, when the degree of expectation for generating the special game state is low, the specified number of times decreases, and when the degree of expectation is high, the specified number of times increases. Therefore, when performing the first specific operation, the player repeats the operation while expecting that the prescribed number of times is not reached, and the same repeated operation can be suitably prompted.

  Feature B4. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein at least one of the operation direction and the operation target of the second specific operation is different from the first specific operation.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to suppress the player from performing the second specific operation at an unintended timing with the momentum of the continuous operation.

Feature B5. Restricting means (cover stopper device 540 etc.) provided switchably from the state of restricting the second specific operation to the state of releasing the restriction;
A determination unit (a function of executing the process of step S 712 in the display control device 410) that determines whether or not to release the operation restriction by the restriction unit;
And a release unit (a function of executing the processing of step S713 in the display control device 410) for releasing the operation restriction by the restriction unit when the judgment unit judges that the restriction is to be released.
When the determination by the determination means is made, the effect execution means notifies that there is a possibility that the second specific operation is possible regardless of the result of the determination. Feature B1 The gaming machine according to any one of the features B4.

  According to the feature B5, the right to challenge the second specific operation occurs on condition of execution of the first specific operation. Here, whether or not the second specific operation can be performed is separated, so that not only the effects after the second specific operation, but also the attention to the second specific operation itself can be suitably improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation from becoming monotonous and mechanically performing a series of operations, and to actively participate in the game.

  Note that "means for enabling the second specific operation based on the fact that the first specific operation is performed" shown in the feature B1, and "determination means" and "canceling means" shown in the present feature are both operations. It corresponds to the permission means.

Feature B6. The effect executing means urges the player to perform the second specifying operation on the operation means when the first specifying operation as the repeated operation of the predetermined number of times set in advance is performed by the operation means,
Storage means (ROM 413 of display control device 410) for storing a plurality of times data for setting the specified number of times according to the possibility that the operation restriction is released;
And setting means for setting one of the plurality of frequency data as the prescribed frequency based on the determination result by the determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S305 etc. in the display control device 410). The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that

  According to the feature B6, the specified number of times for the first operation is determined according to the possibility of the second specific operation being possible. For this reason, the game which predicts the decision | availability of 2nd specific operation through 1st specific operation is added, and the attention degree to the production concerning specific operation can be improved suitably.

  Note that, for example, it is preferable to set a plurality of types of specified times such that the possibility that the operation restriction is released increases as the number of times increases. Thereby, the first specific operation (repetitive operation) can be suitably promoted.

Feature B7. Operation means operated by the player;
Restricting means for restricting the operation means from being operated;
A determination unit that determines whether to release the operation restriction by the restriction unit;
A gaming machine characterized by further comprising: notification means for notifying that there is a possibility that the second specific operation is possible if the determination is made regardless of the result of the determination by the determination means. .

  According to the feature B7, when trying to operate the operation means in accordance with the notification, it can be divided whether or not the operation can actually be performed. According to this configuration, not only the operation result of the operation means but also the attention to the operation itself can be improved, and it is possible to suppress the player from mechanically performing the operation. This can encourage active participation in the game.

Feature B8. The restriction means is configured to be recognized as having the same appearance in both the restriction state for restricting the operation of the operation means and the restriction release state for not restricting the operation of the operation means.
The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the notification unit executes the same notification regardless of the result of the determination by the determination unit.

  According to the feature B8, it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the control state or the control release state from the appearance or the notification content until the operation means is actually operated. By thus making it difficult or impossible to predict in advance the operation availability from the appearance or the like of the gaming machine, attention to the operation means (operation) can be suitably improved.

Feature B9. The operation means is configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction from an initial position,
The restricting means is characterized in that the displacement of the operating means in the predetermined direction is restricted by contacting the operating means arranged at the initial position from the front side in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to feature B8.

  According to the feature B9, when operating the operation means, it is possible to transmit the tactile difference to the player between the restriction state and the restriction release state, and the attention degree to the operation means can be further suitably improved. .

  Further, in order to embody the technical idea shown in the feature B7, it is possible to allow the operation (displacement) but not to accept it effectively. However, in such a configuration, the absence of reaction despite the operation may give the player an impression as if it were broken. In this respect, if the movement itself is regulated as shown in the present feature, such misunderstanding can be avoided.

  In the feature B8 and the feature B9, when the lock mechanism for locking the operation means is adopted as the restricting means, it is preferable that the lock mechanism is not visible from the player side (front side of the gaming machine).

Feature B10. Operation means operated by the player;
Effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation means being operated a predetermined number of times set in advance;
In a gaming machine provided with a lottery means for lottery whether or not to generate a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The effect executing means is
Storage means (ROM 413 of the display control device 410) for storing a plurality of times data for setting the specified number of times in accordance with an expectation at which the special gaming state occurs;
And setting means for setting one of the plurality of frequency data as the prescribed frequency based on the lottery result by the lottery means (a function of executing the processing of step S305 etc. in the display control device 410). A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature B10, when the operation means is repeatedly operated, the generation expectation degree of the special gaming state is suggested depending on how many operations the operation means has reached the specified number of times. This can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the first specific operation (repetitive operation).

  Feature B11. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a winning result, the setting means has a relatively small number of corresponding prescribed times among the plurality of times data, as compared with the case where the result is a losing result. The gaming machine according to the feature B10, wherein the gaming machine is set so as to make it easier to select one that is relatively more than one.

  According to the feature B11, when the degree of expectation for generating the special game state is low, the specified number of times decreases, and when the degree of expectation is high, the specified number of times increases. Therefore, when the first specific operation is performed, the player repeats the operation while expecting that the prescribed number of times is not reached, and the player can be preferably urged to perform the same repeated operation.

Feature C1. Operation means (such as the operation switch unit 40) operated by the player;
Effect executing means (MPU 412 of display control device 410) for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation means being operated a prescribed number of times set in advance;
In a gaming machine provided with a lottery means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for lottery whether or not to generate a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state
The effect executing means is
Storage means (the ROM 413 of the display control device 410) for storing a plurality of number data (number determination table) for setting the predetermined number according to an expectation at which the special gaming state occurs;
And setting means for setting one of the plurality of frequency data as the prescribed frequency based on the lottery result by the lottery means (a function of executing the processing of step S305 etc. in the display control device 410). A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature C1, when the operation means is repeatedly operated, the generation expectation degree of the special gaming state is suggested depending on how many operations the operation means has reached the specified number of times. This can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the first specific operation (repetitive operation).

Feature C2. Among the plurality of frequency data stored in the storage means, the frequency data having the larger number of prescribed times is the one in the case where the winning result is obtained rather than the case where the result of the lottery by the lottery means is out. The probability of being set as the specified number is set to be high,
Among the plurality of frequency data stored in the storage means, the frequency data having the smaller specified frequency is the one in the case where the winning result is more than the case where the result of the lottery by the lottery device is out of order. The gaming machine according to the feature C1, characterized in that the probability of being set as the prescribed number is set to be low.

  According to the feature C2, when the degree of expectation for generating the special game state is low, the specified number of times tends to be small, and when the degree of expectation is high, the specified number of times tends to be large. Therefore, when the first specific operation is performed, the player repeats the operation while expecting that the prescribed number of times is not reached, and the player can be preferably urged to perform the same repeated operation.

Feature C3. The effect executing means is
Operation accepting means (the MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for accepting the operation of the operation means;
Reception period setting means (the MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for setting an operation reception period in which the operation reception means can receive the operation of the operation means, the feature C1 or the feature C2 being characterized The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C3, by setting the reception period, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively delaying the operation.

  Feature C4. The effect executing means executes the predetermined effect without waiting for the operation reception period to be triggered when the number of operations reaches the specified number within the operation reception period. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature C4, since the operation is completed → the predetermined effect is achieved, it is possible to suppress unnecessary operations from being performed, and to strengthen the connection between the prescribed number of times (the number of operations) and the degree of expectation. This can contribute to the further improvement of the degree of attention.

Feature C5. The effect executing means is
Intermediate effect execution means for executing an intermediate effect so as to correspond to each operation when the operation is received by the operation reception means;
A game machine according to the feature C3 or the feature C4, characterized by further comprising: a final effect performing means for performing a final effect when acceptance of the predetermined number of operations is completed by the operation accepting means.

  According to the feature C5, the effect corresponding to each operation is performed until the final effect is performed.

  Feature C6. The intermediate effect execution means indicates that the operation reception means receives an operation as the intermediate effect, and a part of all the operations corresponding to the prescribed number of times as the intermediate effect or the reception period A game machine according to Feature C5, comprising: means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for restricting the suggestion by the suggestion means over a part of the period.

  In the configuration in which the predetermined effect is executed by reaching the specified number as shown in the feature C1, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the operation unit may be reduced by reaching the specified number. In this respect, according to the present feature, there is a possibility that the acceptance suggestion as the intermediate effect may be paused before reaching the specified number of times, so a situation where the operation is not accepted (ie, the operation is actually accepted It becomes the situation where it does not become the completion of operation = becoming a situation where the acceptance suggestion of the operation is not performed regardless of whether or not there is an operation completion. This encourages the player to maintain the expectation that the operation may be accepted even if the predetermined number of times has actually been reached, thereby reducing the attention of the operation and the result of the operation. It can be suppressed.

  Feature C7. The intermediate effect execution means indicates that the operation reception means receives an operation as the intermediate effect, and a part of all the operations corresponding to the prescribed number of times as the intermediate effect or the reception period A game machine according to Feature C5, comprising: means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410) for restricting the suggestion by the suggestion means over a part of the period.

  In the configuration in which the predetermined effect is executed by reaching the specified number as shown in the feature C1, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the operation unit may be reduced by reaching the specified number. In this respect, according to the present feature, there is a possibility that the acceptance suggestion as the intermediate effect may be paused before reaching the specified number of times, so a situation where the operation is not accepted (ie, the operation is actually accepted It becomes the situation where it does not become the completion of operation = becoming a situation where the acceptance suggestion of the operation is not performed regardless of whether or not there is an operation completion. This encourages the player to maintain the expectation that the operation may be accepted even if the predetermined number of times has actually been reached, thereby reducing the attention of the operation and the result of the operation. It can be suppressed.

  In particular, since the configuration is adopted in which the operation is accepted internally but the operation is not temporarily suggested, the reception suggestion has been revived by continuing the operation in a situation where the reception suggestion is not performed. In this case, the expectation of the previous operation is also substantially added. This makes it possible to give meaning to the operation performed in the situation where the reception suggestion is not performed, and can contribute to the security of the operation desire.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to perform an operation exceeding the specified number of times, it is not necessary to prompt the player to perform an additional operation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the effect of the operation from being extended.

  In the case of adopting the configuration shown in the feature C6 or the feature C7, for example, it is preferable to employ delay means for delaying the timing of performing the final effect after reaching the prescribed number of times.

Feature C8. First determining means (MPU 412 of display control device 410) for determining whether or not to perform restriction by means for restricting the suggestion;
Delay means (MPU 412 of display control device 410) for delaying the timing for executing the final effect after reaching the prescribed number of times;
A second determination means for determining whether or not to delay by the delay means when the determination result by the first determination means is a result of not performing the restriction; The gaming machine according to the feature C7.

  According to the feature C6, when the number of operations reaches the specified number of operations, the start of the final effect may be delayed. As a result, even if a small number of times is set as the specified number, it is possible to give the player an impression as if there is a possibility that the operation may be continued, thereby promoting the continuation of the operation. Can.

  The occurrence frequency of the operation restriction and the occurrence frequency of the effect delay are preferably set lower than the occurrence frequency.

  Feature C9. The object of restriction by the means for restricting the suggestion is set so as to be other operations excluding the first operation and the last operation among all the operations corresponding to the prescribed number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of features C8.

  According to the feature C9, since the restriction is performed in the middle, it is possible to make it difficult to give an impression as if a failure has occurred in the operation means as compared with the case where the restriction is performed from the beginning.

  In addition, by removing the last operation from the control object, it is possible to avoid that the prescribed number of times remains unknown.

  Preferably, the target of the regulation is the latter half of all the operations corresponding to the prescribed number of times. When the regulation is activated, it is possible that the operation is stopped judging that it is over. Therefore, if the target of the regulation is the second half, even if such a misunderstanding occurs, it is possible to allow even a small number of operations. This makes it possible to suppress the following inconvenience caused by adopting the regulation means. That is, it is possible to suppress giving the player an impression as if the degree of expectation is low despite the fact that the specified number of times selected is large.

  Feature C10. The range regulated by the means for regulating the suggestion among the prescribed number of operations is set to be smaller than the range not regulated by the regulation means, any one of the features C6 to C9 The gaming machine described in one.

  When the control means shown in the feature C5 and the like is adopted, if the target of the control is excessively extended, an event may occur such as giving up on the operation in spite of the fact that there is still room to return. That is, it is assumed that adopting the regulation means is a factor that gives the player the impression that there is no room to return. Therefore, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by making the regulation range smaller than the range not regulating.

  Note that “restricted range” corresponds to a part of all operations corresponding to the specified number of times, a part of all periods assumed to be required to complete all operations corresponding to the specified number of times, etc. Do.

Feature C11. As the number data (number determination table) for setting the predetermined number, the first number data corresponding to the first predetermined number and the number 1 or more times larger than the first predetermined number are set. Second number data corresponding to the second specified number of times is provided;
The means for restricting the suggestion includes an operation exceeding the first predetermined number of times or the operation when the second number data is set as the predetermined number of times by the setting means. A game machine according to any one of features C6 to C10, comprising means for making it a part of the subsequent operation.

  According to the feature C11, even when the number of operations by the player has reached the specified number, the possibility of further accepting an operation can be left. As a result, even when the first prescribed number of times smaller than the second prescribed number of times is selected, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the player's attention to the operation.

Feature C12. Changing means for changing a period required for the operation of the operation means;
An operation period in which the period required for the operation is extended compared to the previous operation by controlling the change unit based on the operation of the operation unit by the player when the predetermined number of times is set by the setting unit. A game machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, comprising extension means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410).

  As described in the feature C1, in the configuration in which the generation expectation of the special gaming state is suggested by the number of operations, it is important to be able to perform the number of operations for grasping the number of operations. Therefore, if the time required for the next operation is extended based on the operation of the operation means (i.e., the responsiveness of the operation is reduced), differentiation of each operation is attempted to grasp the number of operations. To the player. Here, in the case where the operation period is extended for all the operations, there is a concern that the responsiveness of the operation may be reduced and the smooth progression of the game may be hindered. In this regard, by setting the next operation as the target of the period extension based on the operation of the player, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

  In combination with the configuration having the restricting means such as the feature C6, the player may leave the force to perform the continuous hitting of the operation means, etc., and there is a possibility that a series of effects may be ended without noticing the restriction. In this regard, according to the combination with the present feature, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed, and the effect of improving the attention degree by the regulation function can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature C13. The operation period extension means has operation availability determination means for determining whether or not the next operation is possible when the player operates the operation means, and the operation availability determination means determines the next time The gaming machine according to feature C12, wherein an operation stroke of the operation means is increased when it is determined that the operation is possible.

  According to the feature C13, when the operation stroke is increased, the technical idea shown in the feature C12 can be suitably embodied. Here, when the operation stroke is increased, it can be suggested that the next operation is possible by the increase of the operation stroke, which contributes to the improvement of the player's attention to the operation means and the operation. it can.

  Feature C14. The feature C13 is characterized in that the increase ratio of the operation stroke of the operation means, which is increased by the operation period extension means based on each operation, is set so as to increase as the number of operations increases. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C14, while the number of operations is small, quick operation can be permitted, and the number of operations can be increased to encourage careful operation. In this way, at the end of the operation, the degree of attention to each operation can be suitably increased.

Feature D1. Operation means (operation units 601, 701, etc.) operated by the player;
Signal output means (detection sensors 655, 708, etc.) for outputting an operation signal when the operation means is operated;
Effect execution means (MPU 412 of display control device 410) for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation signal from the signal output means;
It is characterized by further comprising: deformation means (display control device 410, etc.) for deforming the operation means so that the appearance of the operation means is recognized as changing according to the game situation when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature D1, it is possible to cause not only visual change but also tactile change by deformation of the operation means. By deforming the operation means in accordance with the game situation, it is possible to provide a rendering function with motion to the operation means, and an improvement in the degree of attention to the operation means can be expected.

Feature D2. An installation unit (upper bulging portion 28) provided on the front surface of the gaming machine (front door frame 14) and on which the operation means is installed,
The gaming machine according to the feature D1, wherein the deformation means is for deforming a portion exposed from the installation portion in the operation means.

  If the portion exposed from the installation portion is deformed, it can be avoided that the confirmation of the presence or absence of the deformation is hindered by the installation portion, and the effect shown in the feature D1 can be more suitably exhibited. .

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or the feature D2, wherein the deformation means is for deforming a portion which the player directly touches and operates in the operation means.

  According to the feature D3, it is possible to easily transmit the above-described tactile change to the player by deforming the portion that the player directly touches and operates.

  In addition, about the operation means shown to the feature D1-the feature D3, it is preferable to set it as the structure in which operation is accept | permitted both before deformation | transformation and after deformation | transformation.

Feature D4. The operation means is
A first operation unit (inner operation member 610);
A second operation unit (outside operation member) switchably provided in a restricted state for restricting the operation of the first operation unit by covering the first operation unit, and a permitted state for permitting the operation of the first operation unit 620), and
When the second operation unit is in the restricted state, the second operation unit is configured to allow the operation of the second operation unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the deformation means switches the second operation unit from the restricted state to the permitted state.

  According to the feature D4, in the restricted state in which the first operation unit is covered by the second operation unit, the operation of the second operation unit is enabled, and the first operation unit is switched to the permitted state. Operation of the operation unit is possible. By changing the operation target in this manner, it is possible to reduce the chance of missing the deformation of the operation means.

  In the configuration in which a plurality of different operation units are switched as operation targets as shown in the present feature, for example, it is preferable to make the materials, shapes, and the like of the operation units different. This makes it possible to make the haptic change clearer.

  Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the number of first operation units and the number of second operation units are different.

  According to the feature D5, since the number of operation targets is different, the aspect of the effect using the operation means in the case where the first operation unit is the operation target and the case where the second operation unit is the operation target It is possible to make a difference. Thereby, the uniqueness of each operation unit can be enhanced.

  Note that the “number of operation parts” is, for example, a part that the player can directly touch and operate, and indicates the number of parts that can be displaced independently (independently) from other parts based on the operation. .

  Feature D6. The game according to the feature D4 or the feature D5, wherein the deformation means switches the second operation unit from the restricted state to the permitted state based on the operation of the second operation unit. Machine.

  According to the feature D6, the switching of the second operation unit to the permitted state is performed based on the operation of the player. As described above, if the player is to switch the state switching operation to the operation of the first operation unit, an operation means for outputting a signal serving as an execution trigger for a predetermined effect (for example, a display effect on a display screen etc.) In addition to the function as a function, it is possible to add a function to determine whether or not to access the first operation unit, and to draw the player's attention to the second operation unit even after the operation of the second operation unit. Can. This can contribute to the improvement of the player's attention to the operation means.

Feature D7. The signal output unit is configured to output the operation signal when the second operation unit is operated.
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to any one of the features D4 to D6, wherein the signal output unit outputs the operation signal even when the first operation unit is operated.

  As shown in the feature D7, if the first operation unit and the second operation unit are configured to use the signal output means in combination, the mechanical and electrical configurations according to the operation means and the deformation means can be simplified. It is possible to suppress the complication of the configuration resulting from it while making it appear as if the game mode is being diversified.

Feature D8. The operation direction of the first operation unit and the operation direction of the second operation unit are the same.
The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the signal output unit outputs the operation signal based on displacement of at least one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit in the operation direction.

  If the operation directions of the respective operation units are the same as shown in the feature D8 and the operation signal is output based on the displacement of one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit, the signal output means shown in the feature D7 Can be realized preferably.

Feature D9. Means for prompting the player to operate the operation means when at least the permitted state is established,
The gaming machine according to the feature D4, wherein the first operation unit and the second operation unit are different in at least one of a surface shape and / or a material of the surface.

  In the configuration in which the operation means is deformed, it is difficult to preferably exhibit the attention level improvement effect shown in the feature D1 or the like because the deformation of the operation means is not transmitted to the player. Here, in the present feature, even if the player can not visually grasp the deformation of the operation means, the operation means is changed by the difference in touch by touching the operation unit based on the operation suggestion. It is possible to understand that it has changed. As described above, by causing at least a tactile change, it is possible to prevent the deformation of the operation means from being overlooked.

  Feature D10. The first operation portion is formed to be softer than the second operation portion, and is in contact with the second operation portion, as described in the feature D4 or the feature D9. Gaming machine.

  When the first operation unit as the operation target is movable, it is assumed that it becomes difficult to secure the attachment strength of the first operation unit. Here, according to this feature, the stress generated when the second operation unit is operated can be dispersed to the second operation unit. This can contribute to the improvement of the durability of the operation means.

  Further, since the first operation unit is configured to be softer than the second operation unit, it is possible to suppress shaking of the first operation unit when the first operation unit is operated. That is, the damping function for the second operation unit can be provided to the first operation unit. Thereby, the fall of the operativity of the 2nd operation part can be controlled.

Feature D11. The operation means is configured to be displaced from the initial position to the operation completion position by the player's pressing operation,
In any one of the features D1 to D10, the deformation means starts deformation of the operation means while the operation means is displaced from the initial position and returned to the initial position again. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D11, it is possible to easily convey the deformation of the operation means to the player tactilely. As described above, it is possible to make it easy to convey the difference to the player even if the change is small, as compared with the case where the deformation in the non-touching state is promoted by promoting the deformation in the touching state.

Feature D12. The operation means is configured to be displaced from the initial position to the operation completion position by the player's pressing operation,
And a holding unit that holds the operation unit so as to be displaceable between the initial position and the operation completed position.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D11, wherein the holding means allows displacement to the operation completion position even during deformation by the deformation means.

  In the configuration in which the operation means is deformed as shown in the feature D1, etc., it is not preferable that the operability is lowered by the deformation function of the operation means. In this respect, as shown in the present feature, if the operation itself is permitted even during the deformation, the decrease in operability can be suppressed, and the operation function that the operation means originally has can be secured.

Feature D13. The operation means includes a first operation member (button member 720) and a second operation member (movable member 750).
The first operation surface (upper surface portion 722) pressed by the player in the first operation member and the second operation surface (end face of the tip portion 753) pressed by the player in the second operation member are adjacent to each other (Operation surface portion 705) is formed by the first operation surface and the second operation surface.
The deformation means is
Relative position changing means (solenoid 770) for changing the relative position between the first operation surface and the second operation surface;
Drive control for deforming the operating means by controlling the relative position changing means to change the relative position between the first operating surface and the second operating surface when at least the operating means is operated A game machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3, characterized in that it comprises means (MPU 412 of the display control device 410).

  According to the feature D13, the operation surface portion is constituted by the first operation surface of the first operation member and the second operation surface of the second operation member, and the operation surface portion is deformed by changing the relative position of both operation surfaces. Do. As described above, by deforming the portion directly touched by the player at the time of pressing operation, it is possible to reduce the opportunity for the player to overlook the deformation.

  Feature D14. The drive control means drives and controls the relative position change means to cause the operation means to start the first operation from a state in which the first operation surface and the second operation surface form a series of flat or curved shapes. The gaming machine according to the feature D13, characterized in that one of the surface and the second operation surface is projected more than the other to switch to a state in which a step is generated on the operation surface portion.

  As shown in the feature D14, the function of causing a tactile difference is secured by switching to a state in which a step (for example, unevenness) is generated in the operation surface portion from a state in which the operation surface portion has a flat or curved shape. While the increase in relative displacement can be suppressed.

  In the state where the operation surface portion has a series of flat or curved shapes, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of local load on the hand when pressing the operation surface portion. By setting the above two states, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the player's hand caused by each operation.

  Feature D15. In the arrangement pattern of the first operation surface and the second operation surface in the operation surface portion, the player presses the operation surface portion with a finger in a state where the operation surface portion has a series of flat or curved shapes. The gaming machine according to the feature D14, wherein the finger is set so as to be applied to both the first operation surface and the second operation surface, in the case where it is performed.

  According to the feature D15, when the player presses the operation surface portion with a finger, a palm or the like, the finger or the like touches both the first operation surface and the second operation surface. As a result, when the deformation shown in the feature 14 occurs, the player can easily grasp the change tactilely. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the player overlooks the deformation.

  In the operation surface portion including the first operation surface and the second operation surface, by adopting a configuration in which the first operation surface and the second operation surface are alternately exposed in a predetermined direction along the operation surface portion, The arrangement pattern shown in the present feature can be suitably embodied. By the way, instead of the present feature, “the first operation surface and the second operation surface alternate in the predetermined direction along the operation surface portion of the operation surface portion including the first operation surface and the second operation surface. It is also possible to adopt the gaming machine described in the feature D14 characterized in that the respective operation surfaces are disposed in such a manner as to be exposed.

Feature D16. The first operation surface and the second operation surface are juxtaposed in a direction intersecting the direction of the pressing operation,
The gaming machine according to feature D15, wherein a relative displacement direction between the first operation surface and the second operation surface is parallel to a direction of the pressing operation.

  According to the feature D16, it is possible to contribute to the simplification of the configuration concerning the movement of the operation means.

Feature D17. The first operation surface is formed such that an occupancy rate in the operation surface portion is larger than that of the second operation surface.
The game machine further includes a holder (holder unit 702) that holds the first operation member so as to be displaceable in the pressing direction when the player performs a pressing operation.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D14 to D16, wherein the second operation member is attached so as to be capable of relative displacement with respect to the first operation member.

  As the operation means is an operation target by the player, it is necessary to secure a certain degree of strength. Therefore, as shown in the present feature, if the configuration in which one with a small occupancy ratio is attached to one with a large occupancy in the operation surface portion is movably attached, the strength of the operation means can be suitably secured.

Feature D18. The second operation member is disposed in an area surrounded or sandwiched by the first operation member,
The relative position changing means is configured such that a portion constituting the operation surface portion in the second operation member is retracted with respect to a portion constituting the operation surface portion in the first operation member. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D14 to D17, which is characterized in that the operation surface portion is deformed by moving.

  According to the feature 18, it is possible to suppress the decrease in operability at the time of deformation by retracting the second operation member having a small occupancy rate.

  In addition, since the second operation member does not project to the player (hand) side, it does not hit the player vigorously when it is displaced. For this reason, it is possible to increase the displacement speed, which can contribute to shortening the period required for deformation.

Feature D19. The second operation member includes urging means (spring member 761) for urging the second operation member toward the side forming the operation surface portion together with the first operation member,
The gaming machine according to feature D18, wherein the second operation member is returned to the position before deformation by the biasing force of the biasing unit and is maintained at the same position.

  According to the configuration shown in the feature D19, when the second operation member returns to the position before deformation, the biasing force by the biasing means is used. Therefore, for example, when the second operation member tries to return while the player's hand is in contact with the operation surface portion, even if the hand interferes with the second operation member, the pressing operation is thereby performed. It can be made hard to produce the problem of being interrupted.

  Further, by making the second operation member displaceable in the backward direction (pressing direction), even if the second operation member is pushed in a state before deformation, the second operation member is displaced. It is possible to suppress an increase in the load generated on the structure. Thereby, the second operation member and the configuration associated with it can be protected.

Feature D20. The operation means is configured to be displaced from the initial position to the operation completion position by the player's pressing operation,
The deformation means is characterized in that the second operation member starts to retreat at a timing when the operation means reaches the operation completion position or while the operation means returns from the operation completion position to the initial position. The gaming machine according to the feature D18 or the feature D19.

  According to the feature D20, the deformation of the operation means can be easily transmitted to the player tactilely. As described above, it is possible to make it easy to convey the difference to the player even if the change is small, as compared with the case where the deformation in the non-touching state is promoted by promoting the deformation in the touching state.

Feature E1. Operation means (such as the operation switch mechanism 502) operated by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with effect execution means (a sound lamp control device 800 and a display control device 410) for executing an effect based on the operation of the operation means.
The effect executing means is
First specific operation determining means (voice lamp control device 800) for determining whether or not the first specific operation has been performed by the operation means;
The second specification for the same operation means in the game times after the game times when the first specific operation is performed based on the fact that the first specific operation is determined by the first specific operation determination means A gaming machine characterized by comprising: permission means (sound lamp control device 800) for permitting operation.

  According to the feature E1, by performing the first specific operation, the second specific operation is permitted in the later game play. In this way, by using the first specific operation as a trigger for the second specific operation in the later game round, the relationship between the game rounds is strengthened through the operation means, and the player integrated in a plurality of game rounds It is possible to perform participatory operation effects. This makes it possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous and draw the attention of the player across the game times.

  When the configuration in which the operation means has one operation unit is adopted, the targets of the first specific operation and the second specific operation may be the one operation unit. Further, in the case where a configuration in which the operation unit has a plurality of operation units is adopted, it is possible to set the target of the first specific operation and the target of the second specific operation as separate operation units.

  Also, the “first specific operation” includes, for example, “an operation performed by the player based on the operation ball when the operation request is issued from the gaming machine side”, and the “second specific operation” is, for example, It includes “an operation that can not be performed when the first specific operation request is issued, and can be performed by performing the first specific operation”.

Incidentally, "permit the second specific operation" shown in this feature is
(1) Permitting the second specific operation by switching the operation detection sensor corresponding to the second specific operation to a valid state from the state where the operation detection sensor corresponding to the second specific operation is invalidated (2) Detection from the operation detection sensor Permitting the second specific operation by switching from the state in which the operation is forcibly invalidated in the operation determination process based on the information to the state in which the determination process is activated (3) the operation itself is performed as described later The second specific operation is permitted by switching from a state in which the operation is structurally restricted to a state in which the restriction is canceled so that the second specific operation can not be performed.

Feature E2. The operation means is provided with a restricting device (cover stopper device 540, etc.) provided switchably from the restricted state which restricts a predetermined displacement or deformation accompanied by the operation of the player to the released state which releases the restriction.
Whether or not the second specific operation is performed is determined based on displacement or deformation of the operation means in a state where the restriction device is in the release state.
The second permission operation is performed by switching the restricting device from the restricted state to the release state based on the fact that the first specific operation determination means determines that the first specific operation is performed. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that

  According to the feature E2, the second specifying operation is permitted by releasing the restriction by the restricting device based on the determination that the first specifying operation is performed. As described above, by making it possible to operate the target that can not be usually operated based on the first specific operation, the degree of attention to the operation itself can be suitably improved.

Feature E3. A restricting device (cover stopper device 540 or the like) provided switchably from a restricted state for restricting displacement or deformation of the operation means by the second specific operation to a released state for releasing the restriction;
Determination means for determining whether or not to permit the second specific operation when the first specific operation determination means determines that the first specific operation is performed (audio lamp control device 800) To permit the second specific operation by switching the restricting device from the restricted state to the released state when the determination means determines that the second specific operation is permitted. Yes,
It is provided with a means for concealing whether or not the restriction of the second specific operation by the restriction device is released from the appearance of the operation means and the restriction device so that it can not be determined.
The effect execution means, when it is determined by the first specific operation determination means that the first specific operation has been performed, the second specific operation for the player regardless of the result of the determination by the determination means A game machine according to feature E1, characterized by having means for performing a prompt (the notification function of the sound lamp control device 800 and the display control device 410).

  According to the feature E3, even if the first specific operation is performed, the second specific operation is not necessarily permitted, and it may be divided into a case where the second specific operation can be performed and a case where the second specific operation can not be performed. . Here, whether or not the second specific operation is permitted is concealed so that it is difficult to determine from the appearance, so whether or not the second specific operation can be performed is actually tried for the operation. I do not know. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation for the second specific operation from being reduced prematurely.

Feature E4. The permission means may allow the second specific operation at a plurality of game times after the first specific operation is performed,
Second specific operation determining means (determining function in the sound lamp control device 800) for determining whether or not the second specific operation has been performed at a game time when the second specific operation is permitted by the permission means;
Even if the second specific operation is permitted in a plurality of game times, the second specific operation determination that the second specific operation is not performed in the previous game time among the respective game times The apparatus is characterized by comprising means for invalidating the permission of the second specific operation by the permission means in the later game play when the means is determined (invalidation function in the sound lamp control device 800). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

  In the configuration in which the second specific operation can be permitted with the first specific operation as a trigger, the occurrence opportunity of the second specific operation depends excessively on the occurrence frequency of the first specific operation. Certainly, by increasing the chance of occurrence of the first specific operation, it is possible to increase the chance of occurrence of the second specific operation. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the first specific operation is likely to be mechanically performed by the player as the first specific operation frequently occurs and the degree of attention to the first specific operation decreases. .

  In this respect, as shown in the present feature, if the second specific operation in a plurality of game times is permitted based on the first specific operation in one game time, the frequency of the first specific operation is not increased. The opportunity to carry out the second specific operation can be increased.

  Generally, in a gaming machine, when similar effects are continuously executed, an expectation degree to shift to a gaming state advantageous to a player becomes higher as the number of continuous times increases. There are many things. For this reason, in the configuration in which the second specific operation in a plurality of game times is permitted based on the first specific operation in one game time, the last one is most expected if it is performed a plurality of times. It is assumed that an action is taken such that the second specific operation is attempted only if the second specific operation is permitted several consecutive times. In this case, the meaning of permitting the second specific operation in a plurality of game times is diminished.

  Therefore, in the present feature, the second specific operation is permitted on the condition that the second specific operation has been performed in the previous game run. According to this configuration, when the previous second specifying operation is not performed, the second specifying operation after that is invalidated, so that it is possible to prompt the player to perform the second specifying operation every time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience that the second specific operation is not performed although the operation opportunity is given.

Feature E5. Game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) for firing game balls to a game area (play area PE) based on a predetermined firing operation;
A ball entry portion (operation opening 83) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
Information acquisition means (practice processing for the operation opening in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry portion;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area in the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determination means (a pass / fail determination function of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information;
The game state is changed to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the transition judgment by the transition judgment means being the transition correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the transition information. Special gaming state transition means (a transition function to the opening / closing execution mode in the main control device 162) to be shifted;
Prior to the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, or based on the transition determination being performed by the transition determination means, an operation for a game session is started, corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means As the stop result and the end of the game circulation operation are regarded as one game circulation, the game circulation operation of each game circulation is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means (main control device 162, sound lamp control device 800, display control device 410) for controlling predetermined notification means;
Equipped with
The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the first specific operation is permitted when the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means.

  In the configuration where the second specifying operation in the subsequent game times may be permitted based on the first specifying operation as shown in each of the above features, under the situation where it is not promised that the next game time will be executed. Even if the first specific operation is performed, there is a high possibility that the player who has performed the first specific operation is not given the right to perform the second specific operation. This is harsh for the player who has performed the first identification operation in anticipation of the second identification operation.

  Therefore, as shown in the present feature, if special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the first specific operation can be permitted if it is configured that the first specific operation is completely prevented from being wasted. The occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

  In addition, even if the first specific operation is performed under the situation where the special information is not stored, the transition to the special gaming state is not decided at that point, so the sense of expectation for the second specific operation is It becomes difficult to raise. That is, it is possible to give the player an impression that it is useless only by trying the second specific operation. It is feared that this is a factor that reduces the attention to the first specific operation as well as the second specific operation.

  In this respect, in the present feature, since the first specific operation can be permitted when the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed, and the operation means (specific It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's attention to the operation).

  Feature E6. The permission means may permit the second specific operation at a game time related to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the first specific operation is performed. The gaming machine described in.

  According to the feature E6, even when the player is replaced or the like, the second specifying operation is not permitted to the player who has not performed the first specifying operation. In this manner, by limiting the target to which the benefit (the permission of the second specifying operation) is given by performing the first specifying operation to the player who performed the first specifying operation, the player It is possible to secure the fairness between

  In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to give an impression that the second specific operation is permitted without performing the first specific operation, and to prevent the first specific operation from being performed.

Feature E7. The information reflecting the determination result in the case where the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the transition determination is before the predetermined special information is the target of the transition determination. Destination identification means (audio lamp control device 800) for identifying in timing;
A determination unit (voice lamp control device 800) for determining whether or not to permit the second specific operation based on the determination that the first specific operation is performed by the first specific operation determination unit ,
The determining means is
A means for determining whether or not to permit the second specific operation when the specific result by the destination specifying means corresponds to the transition to the special game state;
It is characterized by having means for determining whether or not to permit the second specific operation when the specific result by the destination specifying means does not correspond to the transition to the special game state. The gaming machine according to feature E6.

  According to the feature E6, the availability of the second specific operation is determined according to the availability of the transition to the special game state. This makes it possible to improve the player's attention to whether or not the second specific operation can be performed after the first specific operation.

Feature E8. The acquired information storage unit is configured to store the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number defined in advance as an upper limit.
A target selecting means for selecting an object for which the second specific operation is permitted among gaming times according to the special information when a plurality of the special information is stored when the first specific operation is performed; The game machine according to the feature E6 or the feature E7 characterized by comprising.

  According to the feature E8, it is possible to suppress that the target to which the second specific operation is permitted is uniform, and to diversify the permission pattern of the second specific operation. This can enhance the expectation of the second specific operation being permitted in each game play.

Feature E9. The target selection means is
The first selection means for making the selection such that the second specific operation is permitted in the game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponding to the transition to the special game state When,
When it is selected by the first selection means to permit the second special operation, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is stored before the one corresponding to the transition to the special game state. The game machine according to Feature E8, further comprising: second selection means for performing the selection in such a manner that the second special operation is permitted at a game time for the game being played.

  In the case where the second specific operation is permitted in the game times in which the transition to the special gaming state is determined, the opportunity for the second specific operation to be permitted decreases, and the second specific operation is attempted. As a result, it is easy to give the player an impression that he or she can not operate. In this case, it is assumed that the player's attempt to perform the second specific operation is reduced, and the rendering function of the operation means is not sufficiently exhibited.

  In order to eliminate such inconveniences, if the second specific operation is possible even though the transition to the special game state has not been decided, there is a link between the transition to the special game state and the second specific operation. become weak. As a result, the player is given the impression that the second specific operation has not been made to transition to the special gaming state as a result, and it becomes difficult to eliminate the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  In this respect, according to the present feature, the second specific operation can not be performed only by the game times serving as the transition to the special game state, but if the transition to the special game state is determined, Also by having a configuration that enables the second specific operation in the previous game times, the opportunity to be able to the second specific operation while increasing the connection between the second specific operation and the transition to the special gaming state is increased be able to. This makes it easy to exhibit the rendering function of the operation means.

  Feature E10. The operation means is based on a mode of the second specific operation in the game time when the second specific operation is permitted based on the selection of the first selection means, and the second based on the selection of the second selection means. The gaming machine according to Feature E9, which is configured to be different from the mode of the second specific operation in the game time in which the specific operation is permitted.

  According to the feature E10, the mode of the second specific operation is different between the game times serving as the transition trigger to the special game state and the game times before that. For this reason, even when the second specific operation can be performed, the player's attention tends to be directed to what the operation mode is, and repetition of the second specific operation causes monotony. Can be suppressed.

  Feature E11. The effect execution means, when the first specific operation is performed, regardless of whether or not the second specific operation is permitted, the acquired information storage means when the first specific operation is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature E9 or the feature E10, wherein the second specific operation is prompted at a game time according to special information stored in the game.

  As shown in the feature E9 etc., if the second specific operation is possible only when the transition to the special game state is determined, the relationship between the second specific operation and the special game state becomes unique, If the second specific operation is not prompted after the first specific operation, the player's attention to the game may be reduced at that time. In this case, it is easy to give the player an impression as if it was useless to perform the first specific operation, and it is feared that the first specific operation will be difficult to be performed.

  Then, as shown to this feature, when 1st specific operation is performed, when 1st specific operation is performed, it is the 2nd game time concerning the special information which is remembered in the acquisition information storage expedient The player can be guided to try at least the operation by performing a prompt for the specific operation (for example, notification that there is a possibility that the second specific operation is possible), and the second specific operation can be performed. It becomes possible to play the game of confirming the character. Thereby, the above-mentioned inconvenience that the first specific operation is difficult to be performed can be less likely to occur.

Feature E12. The game number control means has display control means for performing variation display of a pattern on the pattern display device (the symbol display device 94) every game number,
As a fluctuation display period in which the fluctuation display is performed, a reach correspondence fluctuation display period in which reach display is performed, and a reach non-correspondence fluctuation display period which is a period shorter than the reach correspondence fluctuation display period and in which reach display is not performed. Is set,
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means includes one corresponding to the transition to the special game state, the special information among the special information stored in the acquired information storage means When the special information stored before the special information concerning the transition to the gaming state corresponds to the reach-corresponding variation display period, the selection by the object selection means, the first specific operation, those The gaming machine according to feature E11, wherein prompts for the first specific operation and the second specific operation are respectively regulated.

  In the configuration in which the second specific operation and the transition to the special game state are associated, if the second specific operation can not be performed even if the reach display is performed after the first specific operation, the special game state It gives the player the impression that the transition is not made to the player, and makes it easy to give the player an impression as if the reach display itself was executed needlessly. This makes it easy for the player's attention to the reach display to be reduced.

  In addition, even if the second specific operation is not actually performed even if the second specific operation is tried, it is preferable to move to the next game round immediately, but it is transitioned to reach display and the game time is unnecessarily prolonged. It is assumed that the player's attention is likely to be reduced.

  In this respect, as shown in the present feature, in the case where the reach display is executed in the game times prior to the game times serving as the transition opportunity to the special game state, the first specifying operation, the second specifying operation and those If the configuration is configured such that the request for each operation is restricted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience such as the unexpected reach display being executed wastefully and the interest being reduced.

Feature E13. The reach-corresponding variation display period in which the reach display is performed and the reach display is not performed are set shorter than the reach-corresponding variation display period in which the reach display is performed as the variation display period in which the variation display in the game times is performed by the display device A non-correspondence change display period is set,
First specific operation prompting means for prompting the first specific operation when the special information stored in the acquired information storage means does not have special information relating to transition to the special gaming state;
When the first specific operation is performed based on the prompting by the first specific operation prompting means, the second specific operation is prompted in the game round according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means 2 equipped with specific operation prompting means,
The first specific operation prompting means urges the first specific operation when there is special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponding to the reach-corresponding variation display period,
When the first specific operation is performed based on the prompt by the first specific operation prompting means, the second specific operation prompting means causes the acquired information storage means to execute the first specific operation. The gaming machine according to the feature E11 or the feature E12, wherein the second specific operation is prompted until the game time according to the special information corresponding to the reach correspondence change display period among the stored special information.

  Generally, in the reach-display compatible game times, there is a high possibility of transition to the special game state as compared with the reach display non-support game times. Therefore, when there is a thing corresponding to reach display among the stored special information, on the condition that the first specific operation is performed, the second specific operation is provoke until the game turn corresponding to the reach display. This makes it easier for the player to have a sense of anticipation that the second specific operation → special gaming state is made, even if the game is not actually switched to the special gaming state.

Feature E14. A condition setting unit configured to set an operation completion condition of the first specific operation;
The condition setting means is
First setting means for setting the operation completion condition when there is no special information stored in the acquired information storage means as a trigger for transition to the special game state;
And second setting means for setting the operation completion condition when there is a special information stored in the acquired information storage means as a trigger for transition to the special game state.
In the first setting means and the second setting means, the operation completion condition set by the first setting means can be more easily achieved by the player than the operation completion condition set by the second setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E5 to E13, which is configured to be the following.

  According to the feature E14, the first specific operation is not completed when the second specific operation is permitted, or the first specific operation is excessively completed even though the second specific operation is not permitted. It can be suppressed. In this way, by weighting the operation completion condition of the first specific operation according to the subsequent development, it is possible to predict the tendency of whether the second specific operation is permitted by executing the first specific operation. This makes it easy to contribute to the improvement of the amusement of gaming machines.

Feature E15. A condition setting unit configured to set an operation completion condition of the first specific operation;
The game according to any one of features E5 to E13, wherein the condition setting means sets the operation completion condition according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Machine.

  According to the feature E15, by diversifying the operation completion condition of the first specific operation, it is possible to suppress that the first specific operation is mechanically operated merely as a foothold to the second specific operation.

  It is also possible to apply the technical idea shown in the present feature to the feature E14.

  Feature E16. In the feature E15, the condition setting unit is set such that the operation completion condition becomes easier for the player as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit increases. Of gaming machines.

  The greater the number of stored special information, the more likely it will be the transition from the first specific operation to the second specific operation to the special gaming state, and the opportunity for the second specific operation to be permitted. Will also increase. Therefore, it is assumed that the player plays a game in such a manner that the state in which even a lot of special information is stored can be maintained. As a result, the opportunity for the second specific operation to be permitted is also increased, and the rendering function given to the operation means can be suitably exhibited.

  In the present feature, by storing as much special information as possible, the chance of being able to execute the second specific operation increases, so it is possible to play the game for the player who is interested in the second special operation. (Eg, continuation of the game ball launch operation). This can contribute to the improvement of the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Feature E17. When the number of operations of the operation means reaches a predetermined number, the first specific operation is completed.
The condition setting unit is configured to delay the end timing of the reception period of the first specific operation as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit increases.
A game machine according to feature E15 or feature E16, comprising means for concealing the end timing of the operation reception period according to the first specific operation until the end timing is reached.

  In order to realize the configuration shown in the feature E15 etc., for example, when the number of special information is large, it is also possible to reduce the number of operations (predetermined number) corresponding to the operation completion. However, in the configuration in which the predetermined number of times is changed, it is assumed that the operation is difficult to be performed if it is not possible to complete with a small number, and the operation becomes difficult. Ru.

  In this respect, according to the feature E17, the end timing of the operation reception period is delayed as the number of stored special information increases, so that the operation reception period becomes longer, and the end timing is further concealed. Become. If the operation reception period is changed instead of changing the predetermined number of times, it is possible to enjoy the operation itself, and it is less likely to cause a mechanical operation as a trigger of the second specific operation. be able to.

Feature E18. The permission means is
A unit for permitting the second specific operation in subsequent game times based on the execution of the first specific operation;
E. One of features E1 to E17 characterized by having means for permitting the second specific operation in subsequent game times based on the fact that the second specific operation has been performed. The gaming machine described in.

  When the second specific operation is performed in a plurality of game times by performing the first specific operation, the player who is not interested in the operation from the first may give an impression of being bothersome. This can be a factor that reduces the interest in the first specific operation itself as a result. Here, as shown in the present feature, if the second specific operation is permitted after the second specific operation is performed on condition that the previous second specific operation is performed, the second specific operation is performed. When the operation is not performed, since the second specific operation later is not permitted, the above-mentioned inconvenience does not occur.

  On the other hand, the player who is interested in the operation itself can increase the chance of encountering the second specifying operation by continuing the second specifying operation after the second specifying operation is performed. . Thereby, a desirable gaming machine is realized for both players who are interested in the operation and players who are not interested.

Feature E19. The operation means is
A first operation unit (push button member 550) to be a target of the first specific operation;
And a second operation unit (cover body 530) which is provided separately from the first operation unit and is a target of the second specific operation,
The second operation unit is provided displaceably at both the standby position and the operation position,
A control unit (cover stopper device 540) for switching between a restricted state for restricting the displacement of the second operation unit and a released state for releasing the restriction;
The permission means permits the second specific operation by switching the restriction means from the restriction state to the release state so as to be displaceable from the standby position to the operation position of the second operation unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E18, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature E19, the second operation unit, which can not normally be operated, can be operated. It is preferable that the tactile change can be transmitted to the player as compared with the configuration in which the movement detection is performed but the operation detection is restricted.

  In the combination with the feature E2, etc., the "regulating means" described in the feature E2 and the "regulating means" described in the feature can be the same.

Feature E20. When it is determined that the first specific operation is performed by the first specific operation determination unit, the permission unit is configured to perform the plurality of game times after the game cycle in which the first specific operation is performed. 2) It is configured to allow specific operations,
When the first specific operation is performed, regardless of whether or not the second specific operation is permitted by the permission means, at the game times after the game times when the first specific operation is performed. A second specific operation prompting means for prompting the second specific operation;
The monitoring is performed to monitor whether or not the second specific operation attempt is made by the player when the second specific operation prompting means performs a prompting under the condition that the restricting means is in the restricted state. Means (monitoring function in the audio lamp control device 800),
When it is determined by the monitoring means that the player has not attempted the second specific operation, a feature E19 is characterized in that the second specific operation prompting means in the subsequent game play is restricted. The gaming machine described.

  A player who is not interested in the operation will be bothered if the prompt of the second specific operation continues, and the interest itself in the first specific operation will also fade. Therefore, when the second specific operation is not attempted during the prompting of the second specific operation, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by restricting the prompt.

  In addition, the said effect can be exhibited still more suitably by, for example, restricting the 2nd specific operation itself according to the control of the prompt of the 2nd specific operation.

Feature E21. The detection unit is configured to detect the displacement or deformation of the second operation unit, and the presence or absence of the second specific operation is determined based on the detection information from the detection unit.
The game machine according to Feature E20, wherein the monitoring means is a contact sensor that monitors contact with the second operation unit or a pressure sensor that monitors pressurization to the second operation unit.

  According to the feature E21, when attempting the second specific operation, the player's hand touches the second operation unit. Therefore, if a contact sensor or a pressure sensor is used as the monitoring means as shown in the present feature, it can be monitored whether or not the player has attempted to perform the second specific operation.

  Feature E22. When the second specific operation is not performed in the game times when the second specific operation is permitted, permission of the second specific operation in the game times when the second specific operation is permitted thereafter A game machine according to feature E20 or feature E21, comprising means for disabling the game.

  According to the feature E22, although the second specific operation is permitted, if the second specific operation is not performed, the permission of the second specific operation in the subsequent game is canceled. Become. It is assumed that for a player who is not very interested in the operation itself, there will be many machines in which the operation is not performed even if the second specific operation is permitted. Therefore, when the second specific operation is not performed, the permission of the second specific operation is disallowed (for example, canceled), whereby the opportunity for the restriction means to switch to the allowable state in vain can be reduced.

  Feature E23. The gaming machine according to any one of features E19 to E22, wherein the first operation unit is disposed at a position where it can be operated in a state in which the second operation unit is put on a hand.

  In the configuration in which the operation of the second operation unit is normally restricted as shown in the feature E23, convenience can be achieved by a configuration in which the first operation unit can be operated in a state where the second operation unit is put on the hand. Can be improved.

  In such a configuration, by restricting the displacement or deformation of the second operation part as much as possible unless necessary, it becomes easy to exhibit the function as a pedestal for putting a hand on. In this respect, in combination with the feature 22, it is possible to prevent the switching to the state of permitting the second specific operation from being wasted, and to easily exhibit the function as the pedestal described above.

Feature E24. The game machine is provided with a storage plate (upper plate 501) which is provided on the front face of the game machine so as to be bulging forward to the game machine and can store game balls.
The storage dish has a main body portion (upper dish main body 510) fixed to the front face portion of the gaming machine and provided with a storage area forming portion (bottom portion 511 and peripheral wall portion 512),
The second operation portion is a front movable panel portion provided along the front surface portion of the main body portion and covering the front surface portion from the front of the gaming machine and provided to be movable relative to the main body portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features E19 to E23, which is characterized in that

  In the configuration having the storage section provided in the front of the gaming machine, for example, the game is performed with the hand hooked on the storage section for the purpose of checking remaining balls with a fingertip and avoiding ball clogging (evening) etc. There is. The second operation unit in the present embodiment is normally in a state in which the operation is restricted, so that it can be used as a manual placement.

Feature F1. Operation means (such as the operation switch mechanism 502) operated by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with effect execution means (a sound lamp control device 800 and a display control device 410) for executing an effect based on the operation of the operation means.
The effect executing means is
First specific operation determining means (voice lamp control device 800) for determining whether or not the first specific operation has been performed by the operation means;
A permission unit (a voice lamp control device 800) for permitting a second specific operation on the operation unit based on the fact that the first specific operation determination unit determines that the first specific operation has been performed;
The operation means is
A first operation unit (push button member 550) to be a target of the first specific operation;
And a second operation unit (cover body 530) which is provided separately from the first operation unit and is a target of the second specific operation,
The second operation unit is provided so as to be displaceable at both the operation position and the non-operation position.
The control device includes a restricting device (cover stopper device 540) that switches between a restricting state that restricts displacement of the second operation unit from the non-operating position and a releasing state that releases the restriction.
The permission means permits the second specific operation by switching the restriction device from the restriction state to the release state so that the second operation portion can be displaced from the non-operation position to the operation position. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature F1, when the first specific operation for the first operation unit is performed, the second specific operation for the second operation unit is permitted. As a result, the displacement restriction of the second operation unit is released, and it is possible to notify the player who actually attempted the second specific operation that a tactile change has occurred. By being able to operate the one whose operation has been structurally restricted up to that point, attention to the operation itself can be improved.

  Further, for example, as compared with a configuration in which the second operation unit is displaced but the operation detection is restricted, the degree of attention to the operation itself can be easily increased.

Feature F2. Determination means for determining whether or not to permit the second specific operation when the first specific operation determination means determines that the first specific operation is performed (audio lamp control device 800) To permit the second specific operation by switching the restricting device from the restricted state to the released state when the determination means determines that the second specific operation is permitted. Yes,
It is provided with a means for concealing whether or not the restriction of the second specific operation by the restriction device is released from the appearance of the operation means and the restriction device so that it can not be determined.
The effect execution means, when it is determined by the first specific operation determination means that the first specific operation has been performed, the second specific operation for the player regardless of the result of the determination by the determination means The gaming machine according to the feature F1, characterized by having means for performing a prompt (the notification function of the voice lamp control device 800 and the display control device 410).

  According to the feature F2, it is determined from the appearance whether or not the second specific operation is permitted until the player attempts the second specific operation after the first specific operation (for example, until the second operation unit is touched). Can not. For this reason, the game of confirming whether or not the second specific operation is possible by touching the second operation unit is realized, and the attention level improvement effect shown in the feature F1 can be more suitably exhibited. Become.

  Feature F3. The permission means performs the same operation at a game time later than the game time at which the first specific operation was performed, based on the fact that the first specific operation is determined by the first specific operation determination means. The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or the feature F2, which may allow the second specifying operation to the means.

  According to the feature F3, by performing the first specific operation, the second specific operation is permitted in the later game play. In this way, by using the first specific operation as a trigger for the second specific operation in the later game round, the relationship between the game rounds is strengthened through the operation means, and the player integrated in a plurality of game rounds It is possible to perform participatory operation effects. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to expect the effect of improving the player's attention level across the game times.

  Further, by performing the first specific operation and the second specific operation at different game times, a period required for the first specific operation, a period required for the second specific operation, a period for performing the switching, etc. It can be easily secured. In particular, considering that the first specific operation is performed in order to acquire the challenge right to the second specific operation, the first specific operation is given some degree of difficulty or complexity, and only if it is achieved. 2) It is preferable to be able to acquire the right of challenge to the specific operation. In this case, although the period required to complete the first specific operation is extended, even if such a period is secured by configuring the second specific operation to be performed in the later game round as described above, the second It is possible to avoid pressure on the period required for the specific operation and further the period for performing the switching. Therefore, according to the configuration shown in the present feature, it is possible to contribute to the realization of such a practically preferred configuration.

Feature F4. When it is determined that the first specific operation is performed by the first specific operation determination unit, the permission unit is configured to perform the plurality of game times after the game cycle in which the first specific operation is performed. 2) It is configured to allow specific operations,
When the first specific operation is performed, regardless of whether or not the second specific operation is permitted by the permission means, at the game times after the game times when the first specific operation is performed. The configuration is such that the second specific operation is prompted,
Monitoring means (voice lamp control device 800 for monitoring whether or not the player has attempted the second specific operation when the prompting is performed under the situation where the restricting device is in the restricting state Monitoring function in the
If it is determined by the monitoring means that the player has not attempted the second specific operation, the prompting of the second specific operation in the subsequent game round is restricted. Features F1 to F3 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  A player who is not interested in the operation will be bothered if the prompt of the second specific operation continues, and the interest itself in the first specific operation will also fade. Therefore, when the second specific operation is not attempted during the prompting of the second specific operation, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by restricting the prompt.

  In addition, the said effect can be exhibited still more suitably by, for example, restricting the 2nd specific operation itself according to the control of the prompt of the 2nd specific operation.

Feature F5. It has a detection means which detects the displacement of the said 2nd operation part, and it has become a structure by which the presence or absence of 2nd specific operation is determined based on the detection information from the said detection means,
The gaming machine according to the feature F4, wherein the monitoring means is a contact sensor that monitors contact with the second operation unit or a pressure sensor that monitors pressurization to the second operation unit.

  When trying the second specific operation, the player's hand touches the second operation unit. Therefore, if a contact sensor or a pressure sensor is used as the monitoring means as shown in the present feature, it can be monitored whether or not the player has attempted to perform the second specific operation.

  Feature F6. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F5, wherein the first operation unit is disposed at a position where the first operation unit can be operated in a state where the hand is put on the second operation unit.

  In the configuration in which the operation of the second operation unit is normally restricted as shown in the feature F6, the operability can be achieved by allowing the first operation unit to be operated in a state in which the second operation unit is put into a hand. The convenience of the player can be improved by the configuration having a plurality of operation units closely arranged for the purpose of improving the quality of the game.

Feature F7. The game machine is provided with a storage plate (upper plate 501) which is provided on the front face of the game machine so as to be bulging forward to the game machine and can store game balls.
The storage dish has a main body portion (upper dish main body 510) fixed to the front face portion of the gaming machine and provided with a storage area forming portion (bottom portion 511 and peripheral wall portion 512),
The second operation portion is a front movable panel portion provided along the front surface portion of the main body portion and covering the front surface portion from the front of the gaming machine and provided to be movable relative to the main body portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, which is characterized in that

  In the configuration having the storage section provided in the front of the gaming machine, for example, the game is performed with the hand hooked on the storage section for the purpose of checking remaining balls with a fingertip and avoiding ball clogging (evening) etc. There is. The second operation unit in the present embodiment is normally in a state in which the operation is restricted, so that it can be used as a manual placement.

Feature G1. With the door body (game machine main part 12),
A support frame (outer frame 11) provided with a support (lower support bracket 18) for supporting the door so as to be able to open and close;
The support has a plate-like support base (support base 911) provided so that the upper surface faces the door.
The door is configured to be opened and closed in a state of being supported by the support base,
The support base is formed with a recess (reinforcing bead portion 912) by being recessed downward from the upper surface of the support base,
When the game ball existing in the recess is pushed by the door along with the movement of the door from the open position to the close position, the recess does not disturb the movement of the door A game machine characterized by comprising a guide passage (groove portion 912a) for guiding to a ball relief portion (opening portion 906).

  In the configuration in which the door is supported by the support (specifically, the support base) so as to be openable and closable, the gaming ball placed on the support base is pinched between the door and the support frame (support) when the door is closed. So, the movement of the door is easily disturbed.

  Although such a problem can be avoided by checking in each case whether the game ball is positioned on the support (support base) when closing the door, it is necessary that such a confirmation operation is required. It can be a factor to lower

  In this respect, in the present feature, even when the game ball is positioned on the support base, the game ball located on the support base can be released to the ball relief portion through the guide passage by closing the door. You will be guided. As a result, the closing operation of the door is not disturbed, and the confirmation operation is not necessary.

  In addition, by forming a recess in the support base, the recess can be provided with a function as an accommodation unit for accommodating a fixing tool such as a screw or the like, or can be provided with a function as a reinforcing means for improving the strength of the support base. You can do it.

  Feature G2. The recess is formed such that a part of the gaming ball having flowed into the recess protrudes above the upper surface of the support base, and a passage path along which the end of the door passes when the door is closed The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the gaming machine is disposed at a position overlapping vertically.

  According to the feature G2, since a part of the gaming ball protrudes upward from the recess, when the door is closed, the protruding portion is pushed by the end of the door. As a result, the gaming ball having flowed into the recess can be easily moved along the guiding passage, and the guiding function to the ball relief portion can be suitably exhibited.

  For example, the recess may be set to have a depth dimension from the upper surface of the support base smaller than a diameter dimension of the gaming ball.

  Feature G3. The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or G2, wherein the ball relief portion is an opening portion opened rearward to move the gaming ball to the back side of the gaming machine.

  In a state where the gaming machine is arranged on an island facility or the like of the gaming hall, it is general that the gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine are collected by the gaming ball collecting mechanism provided after the gaming machine. Therefore, by making the ball relief part open to the rear of the gaming machine, it is possible to return the rolling ball to the island facility in the same manner as the gaming ball discharged from the gaming machine. As a result, compared with the configuration in which the game balls placed on the support base are released to the front of the game machine or to the side of the game machine, it is possible to reduce the chances of the game balls falling in the passage of the game hall.

  However, directing the opening toward the rear of the gaming machine does not necessarily have a positive effect. Such an open part is likely to be targeted as a foothold when cheating with a wrong tool or the like. Specifically, it becomes easy to be targeted as a route for invading illegal tools such as wires. Here, if the technical idea shown in the feature G1 is applied, the gaming ball is guided to the ball relief portion along the guide passage, so that the relief function is secured even if the ball relief portion is made smaller. As described above, since it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the ball relief portion, it is possible to make the above-described fraudulent action difficult and to preferably suppress the decrease in the crime prevention property.

  Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G3, wherein the recess is disposed at a position close to the rear end of the support base and extends in the width direction of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature G4, the game ball placed on the support base is easily pushed into the recess by being pushed by the door. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from avoiding the recess and the like and the guide function given to the recess not to be exhibited well.

Feature G5. The support frame has a lower frame portion (lower frame portion 11a) extending in the width direction of the gaming machine,
The entire area of the lower surface of the recess is in contact with the lower frame portion,
The concave portion and the lower frame portion are fixed by a fixture (screw 920) attached from the support side,
The gaming machine according to the feature G4, wherein a portion (head 921) of the fixing tool that protrudes to the support side is accommodated in the recess.

  According to the feature G5, interference between the door moving on the support base and the fixture can be avoided by housing the protrusion of the fixture in the recess. In particular, in the configuration in which the recess extends in the width direction of the gaming machine as shown in feature G4, the entire area of the lower surface of the recess may be in contact with the lower frame portion of the frame as shown in this feature. According to this configuration, in addition to the collecting function of the gaming ball shown in the feature G4, the posture of the support when the recess and the lower frame are fixed can be stabilized by increasing the contact area.

  Feature G6. The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the fixing tool is disposed at an end of the concave portion opposite to the ball relief portion.

  According to the feature G6, it is possible to prevent the guide of the game ball having flowed into the recess (guide passage) from being hindered by the fixing tool.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G6, wherein a passage wall surface forming the guiding passage is inclined to increase a passage width upward.

  According to the feature G7, even if the gaming ball is caught between the passage wall surface and the door during guidance of the gaming ball, biting of the gaming ball can be suppressed by the gaming ball running upward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences such as the movement of the door being impeded.

  In the first place, in the case of forming a support fitting using a mold or the like, a taper is formed in consideration of die cutting. In the configuration shown in the present feature, by using this taper, the suppression function can be reinforced while suppressing the complication of the configuration (while making the special configuration for biting suppression unnecessary).

Feature G8. A shaft portion (shaft pin 914) is formed on one of the support frame and the door, and a bearing portion (bearing portion 933) on which the shaft portion is fitted is formed on the other.
The door is pivotable about the shaft,
The support frame has a vertical frame portion (left frame portion 11b) extending in the vertical direction,
The side surface portion of the door body is formed to face the vertical frame portion from the inside of the support frame when the door body is disposed in the closed position,
The shaft portion and the bearing portion are disposed at positions forward of the vertical frame portion and close to the front surface of the door body,
The ball relief portion is provided at a position closer to the end portion of the support on the vertical frame portion side,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G1 to G7, wherein the recess extends from the ball relief portion in the width direction of the gaming machine away from the vertical frame portion.

  According to the feature G8, when the game ball is placed on the support (more specifically, the support base) when closing the door, the game ball is a side surface of the door by the rotation of the door to the closed position. The section is pushed to the back side of the gaming machine. Here, in the present feature, by arranging the door at the closed position, the side surface portion of the door is opposed to the vertical frame portion of the frame from the inside of the frame, and therefore illegal devices such as wires are provided from the gaming machine side. It is difficult to insert.

  When such a security measure is taken, when the door is closed, the game ball is caught between the side of the door and the vertical frame, which prevents movement of the door to the closed position. And be concerned. If the technical idea shown in the feature G1 etc. is applied to such a configuration, even if the above-mentioned security measures are taken, it can be avoided that it becomes difficult to open and close the door body, which makes it possible to prevent crime And workability can be improved.

  The game ball pushed by the door (more specifically, the side face) is pushed toward the vertical frame, but the ball relief part is provided at a position closer to the end of the support on the vertical frame side. Since the recess extends away from the ball escape portion in the width direction of the gaming machine away from the vertical frame, the gaming ball pushed as described above moves along the guide passage and is disposed closer to the vertical frame It becomes easy to reach the ball relief section. Thereby, the guide function provided to the recess can be suitably exhibited.

  For example, although it is possible to incline the upper surface of the support base and move the gaming ball to the ball relief portion by its own weight, it is possible to incline the upper surface of the support base to stabilize the posture of the door or It is not a preferable configuration in consideration of the distribution of the supporting load. In this respect, in the configurations shown in the features G1 to G8, if the game ball is pushed by the movement of the door to the closed position, there is no need to provide the above-mentioned inclination or the like on the support base, and the support base is horizontal. It will be possible to Thereby, the ball releasing function can be exhibited while securing the support function of the support base.

Feature H1. A gaming machine comprising a mounting mechanism (support mechanism 16) for rotatably attaching a door (for example, the main game unit 12) to a frame (for example, the outer frame 11),
The mounting mechanism is
A first shaft portion (shaft pin 953) provided on one of the frame and the door and extending vertically;
And a first bearing portion (bearing portion 963) provided on the other of the frame and the door and through which the first shaft portion is inserted.
The first bearing portion has an inlet portion (open portion 964) into which the first shaft portion is inserted, and the first shaft portion inserted from the inlet portion is pushed into a standby position of the first shaft portion And a guide groove (joint portion 966) for guiding to (the back 965),
Furthermore, in the other side, a restricted state in which the first shaft is restricted from falling off from the inlet by closing the inlet, and the first shaft passing through the inlet by opening the inlet. There is provided a restricting portion (stopper 971) provided switchably to the restricting release state which permits entry and exit of the portion.
By lifting the door in the axial direction of the first shaft portion, it is possible to separate the first shaft portion from the first bearing portion while maintaining the control portion in the restricted state,
The restriction portion can be switched between the restriction state and the release state by being pushed to the back side of the guide groove by the first shaft portion and horizontally displaced, and the displacement in the axial direction A gaming machine characterized in that it is mounted in a permitted state.

  According to the feature H1, when assembling the door to the frame, the first shaft portion is pushed into the guide groove through the inlet portion, whereby the first shaft portion is inserted into the first bearing portion. At this time, since it is not necessary to check the positional relationship between the first shaft portion and the first bearing portion by looking in from above, it is possible to easily position the first shaft portion and the first bearing portion. it can.

  On the other hand, when removing the door from the frame, it is not necessary to release the restricting portion, and the first shaft is disengaged from the first bearing simply by lifting the door upward. This is intended to facilitate the removal work of the door.

  As described above, the following problems may occur in the configuration in which the door attaching and detaching operation is facilitated. That is, when the door is dropped by mistake when removing the door, there is a concern that the shaft collides with the restricting portion and the function of the restricting portion is impaired. Therefore, in the present feature, the restricting portion can be switched between the restricting state and the releasing state by being pushed to the back side of the guide groove by the first shaft portion and horizontally displaced, and the axial displacement is possible. Was installed in a state where it was permitted. For this reason, even if the shaft portion and the restricting portion collide due to the drop of the door as described above, the force of the collision can be weakened by displacing the restricting portion in the opposite direction to the separating direction. It is possible to avoid that a control part is damaged etc. by this.

  In addition, even if bending or the like to the opposite side to the separating direction occurs in the restricting portion due to the collision, it is different from the displacement direction at the time of restricting, so the inconvenience that the restricting function is reduced hardly occurs. It has become.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the risk of the attachment function deterioration resulting from it, achieving facilitation of the attachment / detachment work of the door.

Feature H2. The mounting mechanism is
A first hinge mechanism (upper hinge portion 16U) configured by the shaft portion, the bearing portion, and the restricting portion;
And a second hinge mechanism (lower hinge portion 16L) provided separately from the first hinge mechanism and separated from the first hinge mechanism in the vertical direction,
The second hinge mechanism is provided on one of the frame and the door and extends in the vertical direction to a second shaft (shaft pin 914), and the other of the frame and the door on the second shaft. And a second bearing portion (bearing portion 933) through which the second shaft portion is separated from the second bearing portion by lifting the door upward. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that

  When the door in the gaming machine is rotatably supported, it is desirable to use a plurality of hinge mechanisms in combination in consideration of its size and weight. However, although providing a plurality of hinge mechanisms is beneficial in achieving stabilization of the posture of the door, etc., it is not necessarily preferable in carrying out the work of attaching and detaching the door. Therefore, if the technical idea shown in feature H1 is applied to the configuration shown in feature H2, even if a plurality of hinge mechanisms are used in combination, it is possible to suppress that the work of attaching and detaching the door becomes difficult. It is possible to achieve both stabilization of attitude and security of work efficiency.

Feature H3. The second hinge mechanism is configured to be in a state in which the door is supported by the frame by inserting the second shaft into the second bearing.
The first hinge mechanism is configured such that the first shaft portion passes through the inlet portion while the second shaft portion is inserted into the second bearing portion and the door is supported by the frame body. The gaming machine according to the feature H2, characterized in that it can be inserted into the bearing portion.

  According to the feature H3, after the second shaft portion is inserted into the second bearing portion to complete the union work of the second hinge mechanism, the union work of the first hinge mechanism can be performed. As a result, it is not necessary to simultaneously perform the combined work of both hinge mechanisms, and it is possible to avoid that the work becomes difficult. In particular, since the weight of the door can be deposited on the frame in a state where the second hinge mechanism is combined, there is no need for the operator to position the first hinge mechanism while holding the door. Therefore, it can contribute to the facilitation of work.

Feature H4. The frame has a projecting portion (extending portion 915) projecting forward of the gaming machine,
The first bearing portion is provided on the projecting portion,
The door has a facing portion (a facing plate portion 931) facing the projection from above in a state where the door is closed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the first shaft portion is provided on the facing portion so as to extend downward from the facing portion.

  According to the feature H4, the presence of the facing portion makes it difficult to check the first shaft portion from above, and also makes it difficult to access the restricting portion. Therefore, if the technical idea shown in the feature H1 or the like is applied to such a configuration, the first shaft portion and the first bearing portion can be attached by enabling the first shaft portion to be attached to the first bearing portion from the side. There is no need to look into the top from the top. In addition, since the operation of manually switching the restricting portion to the release state is unnecessary, there is no problem even if access to the restricting portion is hindered by the opposite portion. Thereby, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature H5. The regulatory unit
A pressing portion (shielding portion 973) pressed by the first shaft portion by the first shaft portion being pushed into the guide groove through the inlet portion;
And a contact portion (partition portion 974) for restricting the displacement toward the inlet portion side by contacting the first shaft portion that has reached the standby position with the first shaft portion from the inlet portion side,
The pressing portion and the contact portion are disposed such that the first shaft portion can be inserted between the pressing portion and the contact portion. The gaming machine described in one.

  According to the feature H5, when the door falls down with the first shaft portion positioned above the regulating portion due to a worker's mistake or the like in the process of removing the door from the frame, the shaft portion is pressed By being fitted between the part and the contact part, the control part is caught. Thereby, even if the hand is separated from the door, it is possible to prevent the door from falling as it is, and it is possible to make it difficult to cause the door to collide with the floor or the like and to be damaged. The restricting portion is given a certain level of resistance to the load in the direction of dropout in order to originally restrict dropout of the door. For this reason, even if the fall prevention function of the door body is provided, it is possible to suppress the loss of the original function of the regulating portion due to the above-mentioned catching.

  The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be shown below.

  Pachinko game machine: operation means (game ball emission handle 45) operated by the player, game ball emission means (game ball emission mechanism 110) for emitting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and the emitted A ball passage (guide passage 103 of the induction rail 100) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and game components (nails 87 etc.) arranged in the game area are provided. A gaming machine that provides a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passage portion (general winning opening 81 or the like) among them.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A variable display means is provided to display symbols in the final stop mode after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, and the variation of symbols starts due to the operation of the starting operation means The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop or by the lapse of a predetermined time, the special stop game advantageous to the player as a necessary condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a status (a bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type gaming machine: A variable display means is provided for variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbol row at the final stop, and the variation of symbols is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means for the game or by the elapse of a predetermined time, the special gaming state (bonus advantageous to the player as a necessary condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device for generating a game, etc., and further providing a ball saucer to take in game balls from the ball saucer, and a payout device for paying out gaming balls to the ball saucer; A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is inserted.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 14 ... front door frame which comprises a game machine front part, 20 ... frame, 28 ... upper bulging part, 28a ... upper plate as a storage tray, 35 ... front as a guidance passage Door side upper plate passage, 36: ball detection sensor as game ball detecting means, 40: operation switch unit, 45: game ball emission handle, 80: game board, 83: operation opening as ball entry part, 94: symbol display Device, 110: game ball launch mechanism as game ball launch means, 162: main control device constituting lottery means, 224: payout device as payout means, 310: housing, 320: push button member constituting operation means, 322: Operation surface part as operation surface, 330: Shutter member as cover part, 340: Solenoid constituting drive means, 340: Gears constituting drive means, 351, 352: Detection means Position detection sensor to configure, display control device 410 to configure change means and effect execution means, ROM to configure storage means, 500 upper bulging portion, 501 upper plate as a storage tray, 502 operation switch Mechanism, 510: Upper dish main body as main body, 511: Bottom portion constituting storage area forming portion, 512: Peripheral wall portion constituting storage area forming portion, 522: Partition portion as wall portion, 523: As intake passage Alignment passage of 524 ... game ball intake port, 530 ... cover body constituting the second operation unit, 532 ... top plate as an upper surface portion, 540 ... cover stopper device, 555 ... constitute the first operation unit Push button member, 560: button stopper device, 600: operation switch unit, 601: operation portion constituting operation means, 602: holder portion, 610: inside as first operation portion Operating member, 620: Outer operating member as second operating portion, 655: Detection sensor, 660: Locking device, 700: Operating switch unit, 701: Operating portion, 702: Holder portion, 705: Operating surface portion, 708: Detection sensor , 720: a button member as a first operation member, 750: a movable member as a second operation member, 761: a spring member as urging means, 800: an audio lamp control device, 802: MPU, 900: curtain plate, 902 ... Upper surface portion, 906 ... Opening portion constituting the ball relief portion, 911 ... Support base, 912 ... Reinforcing bead portion constituting the recess, 912 a ... Groove portion constituting the guiding passage, 914 ... Shaft pin as shaft portion, 920 ... Screws as fasteners, 921: head, 931: opposing plate portion, 933: bearing portion, 952: extending portion, 953: axial pin, 962: opposing portion, 963 ... Bearing part 964 Open part 965 Back part 966 Connecting part 971 Stopper Coil 973 Shielding part 974 Partitioning part 975 Contact part 981 Shaft body AE AE Operation range, PE ... game area, S ... operation stroke.

Claims (2)

An operation unit having an operation unit which is displaced from a predetermined position in the operation direction by the operation of the player, an urging unit which displaces the operation unit to the opposite side to the operation direction, and a movable unit which is displaceable in the same direction as the operation unit. When,
A restricting portion that restricts displacement of the movable portion in a direction intersecting the operation direction;
Signal output means for outputting an operation signal when the operation unit is operated and displaced to the detection position;
Effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation signal from the signal output means;
By displacing the movable portion, the operating means is deformed from the first state to the second state so that the appearance of the operating means is recognized as changing according to the game situation as viewed from the front side of the gaming machine Equipped with deformation means,
Said operating means, said movable portion in accordance with the displacement of the operation direction of the operation unit when the operation unit from a first state during deformation to the second state has been operated the skilled the manipulation means displaced to the operation direction, Ri Contact is configured even during the deformation is permitted displacement to the detection position of the operating unit,
The direction in which the operation unit is displaced by the operation in the state where the operation means is in the second state is the direction in which the operation unit is displaced by the operation in the situation where the operation means is in the first state A gaming machine characterized in that it is in the same direction as in.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, which is a pachinko machine.

Images